index sr no course name page number 1 advanced excel 1 2

INDEX

Sr No

Course Name Page Number

1 Advanced Excel 1

2 Advanced Operations Management 3

3 Advanced Operations Research 6

4 Advanced Project Management 10

5 Advanced Statistics 13

6 Advanced Strategic Management 15

7 Basic French I 18

8 Basic German I 21

9 Basics of Financial Management 24

10 Behavioral Finance 27

11 Brand Management 30

12 Business Analytics 35

13 Business Awareness Test 1 38

14 Business Awareness Test 2 39

15 Business Communication 40

16 Business Communication - II 44

17 Business Development in Knowledge Economy 49

18 Business Environment 53

19 Business Forecasting 57

20 Business Intelligence I 61

21 Business Modeling and Business Plan 64

22 Business Process Management 67

23 Business Statistics 70

24 Business to Business Marketing 74

25 Business Transformation and Organizational Turnaround 77

26 Business, Government and the Global Political Economy 80

27 Capstone Project and Defence 82

28 Case Study Writing and Analsysis Method 85

29 Cases in Information Technology 88

30 Cloud Management 90

31 Coaching, Counseling and Mentoring 93

32 Commercial Banking 97

33 Compensation and Reward Management 100

34 Conflict and Negotiation 104

35 Consumer Behaviour 108

36 Contemporary Practices in Business 112

37 Corporate Accounting 116

38 Corporate Governance and Ethics 119

39 Corporate Internship 125

40 Corporate Valuation 126

41 Customer Relationship Management 129

42 Data Driven Decision Making 132

43 Derivative Markets 136

44 Design Thinking 140

45 Digital Marketing 142

46 Direct Taxation 146

47 Dissertation 149

48 Emotional Intelligence at Workplace 151

49 Employment Related Laws 155

50 Enterprise Resource Planning 157

51 Entrepreneurship 159

52 Environment Management Systems 164

53 e-Retailing 166

54 Essentials of Marketing Management 170

55 Export Import Management 174

56 Financial Accounting 177

57 Financial Management 180

58 Financial Modeling 183

59 Financial Risk Management 185

60 Financial Services 187

61 Financial Statement Analysis 192

62 Fixed Income Markets 194

63 Foreign Trade Policy 197

64 Game Theory for Strategic Thinking 200

65 Global Business Environment 203

66 Global Immersion Programme 209

67 Global Strategic Management 211

68 Goods and Service Tax (GST) Law 213

69 HR Analytics 216

70 HR Challenges in Mergers and Acquisitions 219

71 HRD Audit and Scorecard 221

72 HRD Instruments 224

73 Human Resource Management 226

74 Indirect Taxation 229

75 Industrial Relations 231

76 Information Technology & Intellectual Property 234

77 Insurance Management 238

78 Integrated Disaster Management 242

79 Integrated Marketing Communication 243

80 Intellectual Property Rights 246

81 International Banking 248

82 International Business and Global Strategy 251

83 International Finance 254

84 International Human Resource Management 258

85 International Logistics 260

86 International Marketing 263

87 Introduction to Business Intelligence 265

88 Introduction to Entrepreneurship 267

89 Introduction to Financial Markets and Institutions 269

90 Introduction to Operations Management 274

91 Introduction to Trade Finance and FOREX 277

92 Investment Banking 280

93 Knowledge Management 282

94 Leadership and Capacity Building 285

95 Learning and Development 288

96 Legal Aspects of Business 292

97 Macroeconomics for Managers 296

98 Management Accounting 298

99 Management Consulting 300

100 Management Information Systems 302

101 Management of Operations 305

102 Managerial Economics 308

103 Marketing in Emerging Economies 311

104 Marketing Strategies For Entrepreneurs 315

105 Marketing Strategy 318

106 Marketing Strategy and Implementation 321

107 Materials Management 324

108 Mergers and Acquisitions 327

109 Multinational Management 329

110 Operations and Diversity Management 332

111 Operations Planning and Scheduling 335

112 Operations Research 339

113 Operations Strategy and Control 343

114 Organizational Behaviour 346

115 Organizational Development and Change 349

116 Performance Management System 352

117 Principles and Practices of Management 354

118 Product Innovation 358

119 Product Management 364

120 Project 367

121 Project Feasibility and Financing 371

122 Project I 373

123 Project -II 376

124 Project IV 378

125 Project Management 382

126 Project Management Suite 385

127 Quality Management 388

128 R Programming 391

129 Regulatory Framework For Entrepreneurs 393

130 Research Methodology 396

131 Retail Banking 399

132 Retail Distribution and Logistics 401

133 Retail Franchising 404

134 Retail Management 407

135 Retail Merchandising and Buying 410

136 Retail Store Operations Management 414

137 Retail Strategy 418

138 Rural Marketing 422

139 Sales and Distribution Management 425

140 Sales Force and Channel Management 428

141 Security Analysis and Portfolio Management 432

142 Service Operations Management 436

143 Services Marketing 439

144 Software Engineering 442

145 Software Project Management 446

146 Software Quality Systems 449

147 Strategic Human Resource Management 452

148 Strategic Management 455

149 Supply Chain Management 458

150 Supply Chain Performance Measurement 461

151 Supply Chain Strategy 464

152 Sustainable Marketing 466

153 Talent Acquisition 470

154 Talent Management 473

155 Taxation 476

156 Technology and Innovation Management 479

157 Technology in HR /SAP HR/ People Soft 482

158 Warehouse Management 484

159 Wealth Management 486

160 World Class Manufacturing techniques 489

1

Sub Committee for Curriculum Development

IT Systems for Management Specialization

Format to submit syllabus

Course Name: Advanced Excel

Course Code : T3152

(UG/PG): PG

Number of Credits: 1

Level: 3

Learning Objective(s):

To make the student competent enough to use excel applications for data analysis and interpretation.

To help the student to understand excel applications with respect to financial functions.

Pedagogy: Lecture Discussion Case Study

Pre-learning:

Type text here

2

Course Outline

Books

Recommended • Next Generation Excel ; Modelling in Excel for Analysts &MBAS -Isaac

Yottliel –WILES

• Excel Data Analysis –Modeling & Simulation Hector Yuerrero

• M S Excel 2010: Data Analysis & Business Modeling –Wayne Winstion

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Assignment Written Test Presentation

Parallel/Similar courses the existing curriculum: S.No. Name of the course Institute where it was offered

Name of Member

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Name of the Expert: Signature:

Date:

S.No. Topic Hours

1 1. Using Excel for statistical Data Analysis

1.5

2 2. Sensitivity Analysis ( Quantitative & Qualitative)

1.5

3 3. Multipage Budget (Modeling & Simulation)

1.5

4 4. Data Mining using Pivot Tables

1.5

5 5. NPV & IRR – Evaluating Capital Investments

1.5

6 6. Unconventional Financial X NPV & X IRR

1.5

7 7. Amortisation Tables

3

8 8. Accounting Depreciation Functions

3

3


Operations Management Specialization


Course Name: Advanced Operations Management

Course Code: T2185

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP24


Level: 5


1. To introduce Operations Management and their linkages with other business functions 2. To understand the strategic importance of OM in manufacturing and service sectors. 3. To analyze the various issues related to product and process design. 4. To discuss the emerging concepts in operations management such as, TOC, Lean management etc.

Pedagogy:

1. Lectures supported by examples, case studies 2. Assignments on various Operations concept in Various organizations

Pre-learning: Introduction to Operations Management (OMP23)

4

Course Outline

Books

Recommended 1. Operations Management for Competitive Advantage by Chase, Jacobs & Aquilano, Tata McGraw Hill. 2. Operations Management by Roberta Russell & Bernard Taylor, Prentice Hall India, 4th Edition 3. Principles of Operations Management by Heizer Jay & Render Barry, Prentice Hall. 4. Theory of Constraints – Eliyahu Goldrutt 5. Toyota Production System – Taaichi Ohno

Suggested Evaluation Methods:

• Class Assignments • Case study

Sr. No. Topic Hours

1 Operations functions, systems views on operations, role of operations 1.5

2

Operations Strategy: Introduction, competitive dimensions, methodology, productivity measurement.

1.5

3

Processes & Technology: Process selection types, flow structures, Break-even analysis, process re-engineering, product process matrix and virtual factory, Technology decisions, Classification of process technologies - manual, mechanized & automated, Process technology in service and non-manufacturing operations - distribution and transport, warehousing

4

4

Products & Services Design: New product development: strategies and processes, design process, Cross functional product design, designing for manufacture and assembly, designing for customer, concurrent design, considerations in service design, Product design tools – Basics of: QFD, Value analysis, Modular design, Product life cycle, Taguchi methods, Process analysis, process flow charting, types and evaluation, Concurrent Engineering: Fundamentals, Integrated product, Models matrix and methodology

6

5

Capacity Management: Overview, Capacity planning, measurement of capacity, Strategy, process, Simulation procedure, and capacity planning in services Vs. manufacture

2.5

6 Scheduling: Scheduling and control functions, priority rules, Shop floor control, Heuristic methods. Master schedule.

2

7

Simulation: Simulation Methodology, constructing a simulation model, evaluating results and validation, simulating waiting lines, advantages and disadvantages

2

8

JIT and Lean Manufacturing: Introduction, Objectives, planning for JIT and lean manufacturing systems JIT layouts and design flows, JIT applications, Framework for implementation. Limitations.

3

9

Agile Manufacturing: Why, What and How of agile manufacturing, characteristics of agile manufacturing, internal Vs external agile manufacturing.

2.5

10 Theory of constraints: Introduction, how to implement, bottlenecks and capacity constraint resources, modes of control

3

11 Maintenance: why Maintenance, types of maintenance, Introduction to TPM

2

Total Hours 30

5

Parallel/Similar courses the existing curriculum:

S.No. Name of the course Institute where it was offered

1 Operations Management II SCMHRD

2 Operations Management – I SCMHRD

3 Operations Management SIOM

4 Cases in Operations Management SIMS

Name of Member

Dr. Padmanabha Aital

Prof. P.N. Parameshwaran

Dr. Suresh Jakhar

Prof. Shirish Jeble

Designation

Dy. Director Head Corporate Relations and Placements

Assistant Professor

Assistant Professor

Org. / Inst. SIOM SIOM SCMHRD SIBM-Pune

Signature

Name of the Expert:

1. Dr. Vandana Sonwaney 2. Prof. Manisha Ketkar

Signature:

Date: 3rd August 2013

6


QS&A Specialization

Course Name: Advanced Operations Research

Course Code: T2222

(UG/PG): PG


Course No. QS&A P 9

Level: 5


1. To enable students to synthesize and solve real life decision making problems in operations

industry

2. To equip students to capitalize on the power of Operations Research (OR) in

resource management

3. To demonstrate the power of OR in addressing strategy and competiveness

Pedagogy:

1. Lectures 2. Case studies 3. Simulations

Research papers/ articles from journals/ magazines such as OR/MS Today, Interfaces,

Operations Research, International Journal of Production Research, and International

Transactions of Operations Research

7

Pre-learning: Operations Research (Level4); Statistics (Level4)

Course Outline

8

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Integer Programming Problems: • Pure, Mixed and Binary integer Programming • Gomory’s Cutting Plane Method • Branch and Bound Method • Applications

4

2 Goal Programming • Introduction and Formulation • Pre-emptive goal programming • Graphical and Simplex Method

4

3 Game Theory

• Game with Pure Strategies • Game with Mixed Strategies • Two person zero sum games, Saddle points • Linear Programming Approach to Game Theory

2

4 Non Linear Programming

• Langrage’s Multiplier • Kuhn-Tucker Condition • Quadratic Programming

3

5 Flows and Networks • Scope of network models; • Transshipment Problems; • Shortest Route Problem; • Minimal Spanning Tree Algorithm; Maximal Flow

Algorithm; • Applications

4

6 Equipment Replacement Models • Economic considerations in replacement; • Reliability • Optimum Replacement Strategies for items that

deteriorate over time and items that fail suddenly.

3

7

Dynamic Programming Problems • Recursive nature of computations; • Principle of Optimality; • Shortest Route Problem; • Other Common Applications.

4

8

Heuristic Approaches in Decision Making • Need for heuristics, definitions of heuristics, • strategies for development of heuristic approaches, • evaluation of heuristic approaches

3

9 Problem Formulation and Modeling and OR Applications in Operations Management

3

9

Books

Recommended

• Hiller and Lieberman, Introduction to Operations Research, Seventh edition, TataMcGraw-Hill

• Taha, H. A. (1995). Operations research: an introduction. Prentice Hall • Hillier and Hillier Introduction to Management Science (with CD ROM), Tata McGraw Hill.

• Anderson, D. R. (2012). An introduction to management science: Quantitative approaches to decision making. CengageBrain. com.

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Quiz/ test 20 Assignment 20 Project 20 External Examination 40


1 OR –II SCMHRD

2 Advanced OR SIOM 3 Operations Research SIBM-P

Name of Member

B V Cadambi B. Tripathy S . Bhattacharya KritiPriya Gupta

Vani Rajesh

Designation Professor Assistant

Professor Associate Professor

Associate Professor

Assistant Professor

Org. / Inst. SIBM SIOM SCMHRD SCMS-

Noida SCMS- Pune

Signature

Name of the Expert: Asmita Chitnis

Signature:

Date:

• Principles of Modeling and applications- Trim Loss Problems,

• Vehicle Routing Problems • Revenue Management

30

10




Course Name: Advanced Project Management

Course Code: T2201

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP40

Number of Credits:2

Level: 5


1. To study advanced concepts, theory and applications in the area of complex projects in global environment.

2. To discuss the critical factors in Execution of Complex projects. 3. To illustrate issues in designing project organization and teams in cross – cultural, socio-economic,

technology driven global environment 4. To analyze project cost, quality and risk management 5. To discuss various project management strategies.

11

Pedagogy: • Lectures supported by examples, case studies

Pre-learning:

• Project Management (OMP32)

12

Course Outline

Books

Recommended 1. Global Project Management Handbook, Planning, organizing and controlling international projects, David,

I. Cleland and Roland Gareis, Mc- Graw Hill company, NY 2. Advanced Project management, Best Practises on implementation, Kerzner Harold, John wiley and sons,

NY 3. Advanced project portfolio management and the PMO, Gerald I.Kendall and Steven C.Rollins, J.Ross

Publishing, International Institute of Learning Inc. 4. Stanford advanced project management – http://www.apm.stanford.edu/info.


• Case studie • Parallel/Similar courses the existing curriculum:


1 Advanced Project Management SIOM

Name of Member



Dr. Suresh Jakhar

Prof. Shirish Jeble

Designation


Assistant Professor

Assistant Professor


Signature

Sr. No. Topic Hours

1

Advanced project management – Necessity and issues related to its suitability and applicability of advanced concepts and theory in project management

3

2 Execution of Complex projects, programs and project portfolio management in the changed local and global environment

3

3

Project scheduling and resource allocation for complex projects – scheduling of projects in different geographies, virtual networking of projects, constrained resource scheduling and critical chain approach using Theory of constraints (TOC) approach.

3

4

Designing project organization and teams in cross – cultural, socio- economic, technology driven global environment. Legal framework and environmental constraints on projects. Leading effective project teams

3

5 Mastering project portfolio and program management – Project portfolio process (PPP) –steps involved in PPP, Project council.

3

6 Strategies for execution of projects and components of competency model – Leadership, Strategy, Decision making, Innovation and Execution

3

7 Managing global initiatives for projects – Strategy and execution, Leveraging the customer relationships, Financial mastery of projects.

3

8 The strategic Project Management office (PMO) – Projects to enterprise 3

9 Project cost, quality and risk management 3

10 Case studies, PMP chapter - Workshops, seminars etc 3

Total 30

http://www.apm.stanford.edu/info

13

Name of the Expert: 1. Dr. Vandana Sonwaney 2. Prof. Manisha Ketkar

Signature:Date: 3rd August 2013


QS &A Specialization

Course Name: Advanced Statistics

Course Code: T2218

(UG/PG): PG

Course No. QS&A P 5


Level: 5

Learning Objective(s): 1. To equip students with advanced statistical concepts and techniques 2. The course enables students to apply advanced techniques in consultancy and research assignments

Pedagogy:

1. Lectures 2. Case studies using statistical software

Pre-learning: Business Statistics

14

Recommended

Course Outline

Books

• Hair, J.F.; Anderson, R.E.; Tatham, R.L. and Black, W.C. (1998), “Multivariate Data Analysis”, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall International, Inc.

• Hayduk, Leslie A. 1987. Structural Equation Modeling with LISREL: Essential and Advances. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press.

• Hood, W. and Koopmans, T. 1953. Studies in Econometric Method. Cowles Foundation Monograph 14. New Haven: Yale University Press.



Business Statistics SIOM, Nashik

Name of Member

Dr.Rameshwar Dubey

Designation Assistant

Prof.(Selection Grade)

Org. / Inst. SIOM Nashik

Signature

Name of the Expert: Prof. Asmita Chitnis

Signature:

Date:

Serial

No.

Topic Hours

1 Data Reduction using Factor Analysis, Principal Component Analysis, Parsimonious Factors, Orthogonal Rotation, Oblique Rotation

6

2 Confirmatory Factor Analysis through Ordinary Least Square Regression using AMOS/PLSR

3

3 Cluster Analysis, Discriminant Analysis and Multi Dimensional Scaling 6

4 Conjoint Analysis and Canonical Correlation 3

5 Structural Equation Modeling using AMOS and LISREL 6

6 Partial Least Square Regression Analysis 6

15

Sub Committee for Curriculum Development: Strategy

Course Name: Advanced Strategic Management (SP3) (No. should be between 600 and 899) Course Code: T2255 (UG/PG): PG Ideal positioning will be in Sem III/IV Number of Credits: 2 Level: 5 Learning Objective(s):

1. To help students interpret advanced issues in strategic management and make decisions to create

competitive advantage for organizations

2. Students should be able to evaluate the existing market conditions and make decisions related to the use

of ‘strategy as stretch’

3. Students should be able to interpret market situations and decide upon a suitable strategy after taking into account the growth, maturity and fragmentation prevalent in the market

4. Students should be able to evaluate the implementation of strategy and make a choice of suitable tools for

strategy implementation

5. Students should be able to take decisions related to the use of innovation to drive competitive advantage

for the firm

Expected Outcome(s): 1. Students will be able to evaluate strategic situations and recommend decisions based on analysis

using the tools taught in the course 2. Students will be able to recommend the use of suitable strategic planning methods, approaches for

innovation in order to drive competitive advantage for the firm Pedagogy:

3. Case Study discussions 4. Interactive discussions on strategic management theories

Pre-learning: Strategic Management

16

Books /Articles

Recommended

• Crafting and Executing Strategy by Thompson, Strickland, Gamble and Jain published by Tata McGraw Hill

• Re-engineering the Corporation by Michael Hammer and James Champy published by Harper Business

• Competing for the future by CK Prahalad and Gary Hamel published by Harvard Business Review Press

• Using the Balanced Scorecard as a Strategic Management System. By: Kaplan, Robert S.; Norton, David P.

Harvard Business Review. Jul/Aug2007, Vol. 85 Issue 7/8, p150-16

• Strategic Leadership: The Essential Skills. By: Schoemaker, Paul J.H.; Krupp, Steve; Howland, Samantha.

Harvard Business Review. Jan/Feb2013, Vol. 91 Issue 1, p131-134

• Reinventing Your Business Model. (cover story). By: Johnson, Mark W.; Christensen, Clayton M.;

Kagermann, Henning. Harvard Business Review. Dec2008, Vol. 86 Issue 12, p50-59

• STRATEGY AS REVOLUTION. (cover story). By: Hamel, Gary. Harvard Business Review. Jul/Aug1996, Vol.

74 Issue 4, p69-82

• 10 Rules for Managing Global Innovation. By: Wilson, Keeley; Doz, Yves L. Harvard Business Review.

Oct2012, Vol. 90 Issue 10, p84-90

• Strategic Intent. (cover story). By: Hamel, Gary; Prahalad, C. K. Harvard Business Review. Jul/Aug2005,

Vol. 83 Issue 7/8, p148-161

• Managing Differences: The Central Challenge of Global Strategy. (cover story). By: Ghemawat, Pankaj.

Harvard Business Review. Mar2007, Vol. 85 Issue 3, p58-68

S.No. Topic Hours

1.

Linking strategy with the firm and the environment – using strategy as

stretch to disrupt the equilibrium (Hamel & Prahalad’s theory)

2

2.

Strategy adaptation – how to adapt strategies for growth markets, mature

markets, fragmented markets etc.

4

3. Strategic planning – managing the sources of risk 4

4.

Strategy implementation – managing operations and ensuring high quality –

use of Balanced Scorecard and Business Process Re-engineering

4

5.

Use of innovation to gain competitive advantage – fostering innovation

culture and knowledge management

4

6.

Gaining advantage through globalization – strategies adopted by

multinational firms

4

7.

Sustaining competitive advantage by reinventing the business model of the

organization

4

8. Strategic Leadership – guiding the organization 2

9. Guest lectures by strategy practitioners from industry 2

http://web.ebscohost.com/ehost/viewarticle?data=dGJyMPPp44rp2%2fdV0%2bnjisfk5Ie45PFItqauT66k63nn5Kx95t%2fxWLalsEewpq9Lnqi4TbKwr0iet8s%2b8ujfhvHX4Yzn5eyB4rOvS7Gst06vprdOpOLfhuWz44ak2uBV4OrmPvLX5VW%2fxKR57LOwTbGrtk20raR%2b7ejrefKz5I3q4vJ99uoA&hid=22

http://web.ebscohost.com/ehost/viewarticle?data=dGJyMPPp44rp2%2fdV0%2bnjisfk5Ie45PFItqauT66k63nn5Kx95t%2fxWLalsEewpq9Lnqi4TbKwr0iet8s%2b8ujfhvHX4Yzn5eyB4rOvS7Gst06vprdOpOLfhuWz44ak2uBV4OrmPvLX5VW%2fxKR57LO2TLKoskqurKR%2b7ejrefKz5I3q4vJ99uoA&hid=22

http://web.ebscohost.com/ehost/viewarticle?data=dGJyMPPp44rp2%2fdV0%2bnjisfk5Ie45PFItqauT66k63nn5Kx95t%2fxWLalsEewpq9Lnqi4TbKwr0iet8s%2b8ujfhvHX4Yzn5eyB4rOvS7Gst06vprdOpOLfhuWz44ak2uBV4OrmPvLX5VW%2fxKR57LOxTbGutE6wraR%2b7ejrefKz5I3q4vJ99uoA&hid=22

http://web.ebscohost.com/ehost/viewarticle?data=dGJyMPPp44rp2%2fdV0%2bnjisfk5Ie45PFItqauT66k63nn5Kx95t%2fxWLalsEewpq9Lnqi4TbKwr0iet8s%2b8ujfhvHX4Yzn5eyB4rOvS7Gst06vprdOpOLfhuWz44ak2uBV4OrmPvLX5VW%2fxKR57LO3Tq6tr0iuqrFMpNztiuvX8lXk6%2bqE8tv2jAAA&hid=22

http://web.ebscohost.com/ehost/viewarticle?data=dGJyMPPp44rp2%2fdV0%2bnjisfk5Ie45PFItqauT66k63nn5Kx95t%2fxWLalsEewpq9Lnqi4TbKwr0iet8s%2b8ujfhvHX4Yzn5eyB4rOvS7Gst06vprdOpOLfhuWz44ak2uBV4OrmPvLX5VW%2fxKR57LO1UbevtEq0qqR%2b7ejrefKz5I3q4vJ99uoA&hid=22

http://web.ebscohost.com/ehost/viewarticle?data=dGJyMPPp44rp2%2fdV0%2bnjisfk5Ie45PFItqauT66k63nn5Kx95t%2fxWLalsEewpq9Lnqi4TbKwr0iet8s%2b8ujfhvHX4Yzn5eyB4rOvS7Gst06vprdOpOLfhuWz44ak2uBV4OrmPvLX5VW%2fxKR57LOvT7SmsEu2qqR%2b7ejrefKz5I3q4vJ99uoA&hid=22

17

• The Innovator's DNA. (cover story). By: Dyer, Jeffrey H.; Gregersen, Hal B.; Christensen, Clayton M.

Harvard Business Review. Dec2009, Vol. 87 Issue 12, p60-67

• The CEO's Role In Business Model Reinvention. By: Govindarajan, Vijay; Trimble, Chris. Harvard Business

Review. Jan/Feb2011, Vol. 89 Issue 1/2, p108-114

• Stop the Innovation Wars. (cover story). By: Govindarajan, Vijay; Trimble, Chris. Harvard Business Review.

Jul/Aug2010, Vol. 88 Issue 7/8, p76-83

• The Knowledge-Creating Company By: Nonaka, Ikujiro. Harvard Business Review. Jul/Aug2007, Vol. 85

Issue 7/8, p162-171

Suggested Evaluation Methods: • Case analysis • Group projects/assignments • Research Paper/Book Review


1 Business Strategy 2 SIBM – Executive MBA

Name of Member

Prof. Brig. Rajiv Divekar

Dr. Kaushik Mukerjee

Dr. Kiran Karande

Prof. Smit Gade

Designation Director Professor Associate

Professor Assistant Professor

Org. / Inst. SIMS SIBM SCMHRD SCMHRD

Signature

Name of the Expert: Prof. Brigadier Rajiv Divekar

18


_Foreign Language French

Name of Institute: Symbiosis Institute of International Business

Course Name and Code: Foreign Language: - Basic French 1

(UG/PG): PG Course code: FFP001

Course Code: T6014

Number of Credits: 2 credits

Level: 1


5. Students can construct / use simple sentences or everyday expressions when dealing with various situations

in daily life ( e.g. at the airport, in a supermarket, at the Hotel etc)

6. He/she can introduce him/herself and others and talk about others and themselves e.g. hobbies, and personal

details where do they come from etc. 7. Can read and understand medium level difficulty level texts and solve questions based on the same.

8. Can communicate in a simple manner. Can respond to simple and uncomplicated speech.

9. To develop intercultural and communicative skills

Pedagogy:

We stress on direct teaching methodology. With minimum usage of English or any other Language the students are

motivated to speak and understand the foreign language with the help of visual aids. The teacher enacts at times in the

class or takes help of visual aids for the same. Role plays and games are conducted to evaluate and help the students

apply the knowledge acquired. Cultural sensitization is done with the help of various activities such as discussions or

audio video aids, songs, reading material etc. It is activity-based and task-based and with little help from the first or

second Language.

Pre-requisites:

None.

19

French syllabus

Basic French I (2 credits)

Sr.

No

Name of the

Unit

Objective of the unit Material used Grammar

Topic(s) taught

Activities No. of

hours required

1 Fundamentals • Alphabet

• Phonetic

• Accent

AUDIO C.D Constructing

Sentences and

questions

Alphabet

song,

games to

reinforce

the

concept

taught.

5

2 Expression

Formal &

Informal

Meeting, greetings and

farewell.

Formal/ informal

expressions

Role plays

and

Games

3

3. Introduction Self and third person

introduction

Textbook +

listening of

audio c.d.

Role plays

Short

essay

My

Family

2

4. Time and

scheduling

Telling and asking for

time

Telephonic conversation

Fixing appointments,

rescheduling or

cancelling the same

Describing one’s daily

routine, Role plays etc.

Understanding transport

schedule

Textbook +

extra

Photocopies

from other

books

Various verbs ,

negation ,

interrogations

adjectives

Role-plays 10

5. Functional Grammar: French

• Articles : definite/ indefinite, article contracte, article partitif 10

• Nouns: singular, plural.

• Constructing Sentences and questions

• Various verbs , negation , interrogations adjectives etre, avoir, er ending verbs etc

Books Recommended : Jumelage

Research Papers/Articles recommended for reading: Not mentioned.

Suggested Evaluation Methods : As per SIU rules on page 20, 5.1 e) III.


20

1.

2.

Name of

Member

Dr. Surekha

Kher

Madhura

Kshirsagar

Medha Purkar Asavari

Tamhane

Sujata Arya

Designation Visiting

Faculty

Visiting

Faculty

Chief Co-

ordinator

Org. / Inst. SIFIL SIFIL SIFIL

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

21


_Foreign Language German

Name of Institute: Symbiosis Institute of International business, Symbiosis Institute of Computer and Research ,

Symbiosis School of Economics and Symbiosis Law College

Course Name and Code: Foreign Language: -Basic German 1

Course Code: T6012

(UG/PG): PG Course Code: FGP001


Level: 1


1. Students can construct / use simple sentences or everyday expressions when dealing with various situations

in daily life ( e.g. at the airport, in a supermarket, at the Hotel etc)

2. He/she can introduce him/herself and others and talk about others and themselves e.g. hobbies, and personal

details where do they come from etc. 3. Can read and understand medium level difficulty level texts and solve questions based on the same.

4. Can communicate in a simple manner. Can respond to simple and uncomplicated speech.

5. To develop intercultural and communicative skills

Pedagogy:

We stress on direct teaching methodology. With minimum usage of English or any other Language the students are

motivated to speak and understand the foreign language with the help of visual aids. The teacher enacts at times in

the class or takes help of visual aids for the same. Role plays and games are conducted to evaluate and help the

students apply the knowledge acquired. Cultural sensitization is done with the help of various activities such as

discussions or audio video aids, songs, reading material etc. It is activity based task based and with little help from

the first or second Language.

Pre-requisites:

None.

22

Course Outline

Sr. No.

Name of

Unit

Objective of

the unit Material used Grammar

Topic taught Activities No. of hours

required

1. Start auf

Deutsch

To introduce

German and

Germany,

International

Words, enable

participants to

introduce

themselves

and others,

spell names of

people, places, etc.

Textbook,

Sprach-training,

Constructing

Sentences and

questions

Alphabet

song, games

to reinforce

the concept

taught.

Presentation

and project

on Germany

Continuous

assessment

15 including

class tests and

assignments

2. Café d To enable

students to

begin a

conversation

in a day-to-

day situation,

e.g. Café /

Restaurant,

understand

and use

numbers,

place an order

in a restaurant.

Textbook +

Sprach-training,

Role plays

and Games

Continuous

assessment

15

including

class tests and

assignments

3. Functional Grammar taught during all classes

• Verbs: regular verbs, irregular verbs

• Verb form: present tense , past tense (only of the following verbs- sein and

haben)

• Personal pronouns only in nominative case: ich, du, er, es ,sie, wir ,ihr, Sie,sie

Why questions ,yes /no questions

Books Recommended : Studio D

Research Papers/Articles recommended for reading:

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Continuous Evaluation. 40 %Internal 60% external.

23



Name of

Member

Dr Surekha Kher Madhura

Kshirsagar

Medha Purkar Asavari

Tamhane

Sujata Arya

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

24


Banking & Finance Specialization

Course : FP33

Course Name: Basics of Financial Management (PG 1st year, preferably first semester)


Level:3

Course Code: T2769

Learning Objective(s) The students will be able to:

1. Develop an analytical/practical approach to corporate finance decision making

2. Apply & analyse the concepts in real life situations. 3. Evaluate various theories related to different concepts.

Pedagogy: 1. Classroom sessions 2. Lectures 3. Cases 4. Newspaper clippings, articles, research papers

Pre-learning:

25

Course Outline

Session Topic Hours 1 Financial Environment of Business

a. Capital Markets (Overview of different markets – Equity(Primary and Secondary), Debt, Derivatives, Foreign exchange, other asset classes)

b. Overview of financial Institutions c. Regulatory framework

4

2 Introduction to Financial Management a. Objectives and Functions

3

3 Investment Decisions

a. Time Value of Money 8 b. Valuation of Stocks and Bonds 4 c. Capital Budgeting and Analysis 7

4 Analysis of the firm 4

30

Books Recommended

• Stephen A. Ross, Randolph W. Westerfield, Jeffrey Jaffe (2010), Corporate Finance, McGraw-Hill • Stephen A. Ross, Randolph W.Westerfield, Jeffrey Jaffe & Ram kumar Kakani, (2009) Corporate Finance,

McGraw-Hill

• Aswath Damodaran, Corporate Finance: Theory and Practice, John Wiley and Sons

• Richard A. Brealey, Stewart C. Myers, Franklin Allen, Principles of Corporate Finance, 11/e McGraw-Hill, Latest Edition

• Richard Brealey, Stewart Myers, Franklin Allen, Pitabas Mohanty, (2012) Principles of Corporate Finance, Mc Graw-Hill


Quiz Class Test Case Analysis Assignments Problem sets Project Exam


Financial Management-I SIBM B Financial Management-I SCMHRD

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref%3Dntt_athr_dp_sr_1?_encoding=UTF8&field-author=Stephen%20A.%20Ross&search-alias=books&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref%3Dntt_athr_dp_sr_2?_encoding=UTF8&field-author=Randolph%20W.%20Westerfield&search-alias=books&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref%3Dntt_athr_dp_sr_3?_encoding=UTF8&field-author=Jeffrey%20Jaffe&search-alias=books&sort=relevancerank

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Richard%2BBrealey

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Stewart%2BMyers

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Franklin%2BAllen

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Pitabas%2BMohanty

26

Name of Member

Dr Madhvi Sethi

Designation Assoc Prof

Org. / Inst. SIBM-B

Signature

Name of the Expert: V.Ravi Kumar

Signature:

Date:17 August 2013

27


Marketing &



Course Name: Behavioral Finance

Course Code: T2055

Number of Credits:2

Learning Objective(s): d. To understand the behavior of investors e. To understand application of psychology in financial markets

Pedagogy: 5. Case Study 6. Research Papers discussion 7. Lecture

Pre-learning: Financial Management

28

Recommended

Course Outline

Books

1. William Forbes (2009), Behavioral Finance, Wiley

2. Stephen a. Ross (2004). Neo Classical Finance, Princeton University Press

3. John R Nofsinger (2007). The psychology of Investing, Prentice Hall

4. Hersh Shefrin (2007) Beyond Greed and Fear: Understanding Behavioural Finance and the Psychology of

Investing by, Oxford University Press

5. Parag Parikh (2009), Value Investing and Behavioral Finance, Tata McGraw hill

6. Michel M. Pompian, (2012)Behavioral finance and Wealth Management, Wiley

7. Richard Thaler, (1993)Advances in Behavioral finance Russell Sage Foundation

8. Bernard, Victor (1992), Stock Price Reactions to Earnings Announcements, Working Paper

9. Andrei Shleifer, (2000)Inefficient Markets: An Introduction to Behavioral Finance (Clarendon Lectures in

Economics), Oxford University Press

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Case Analysis, Assignments and Quiz



S.No. Topic 30

Hours

1

Introduction

Motivation to study behavioural finance

Theory and Empirical Evidence : Research studies from financial economics

and psychology

Efficient markets hypothesis (EMH); Definitions: EMH in supply and demand

framework; Return predictability in financial markets

4

2 Heuristics and Cognitive biases 4

3 Overconfidence and representativeness 4

4

Belief biases; Limited attention and categorization; Nontraditional

preferences-prospect theory and loss aversion; Social interaction, bubbles and

systematic investor sentiment.

4

5

Investment Strategies and Human behavior; Emotion and financial markets;

investor over and under reaction; “Buy on the Rumour”, Anticipatory affect

and investor behavior;

4

6 Crowd Psychology and markets, herding, fatal attractions 4

7 Applications : Stock market over reaction, under reaction, financial crisis, market timing, momentum etc.

6

30

29

1 Behavioral Finance SIIB

2 Behavioral Finance SCMHRD

Name of Member

Dr. Madhavi Sethi

Designation Associate Professor

Org. / Inst. SIBM-B

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

30


Marketing Specialization Course Name: Brand Management

Course Code: T2130 Number of Credits: 2 Course Code – MM P 018 Course Range – 700-899 Level – 4/5

Learning Objective(s): After the completion of this course, a student shall be able to :

i) Discuss problems faced by organisations with regards branding and positioning.

ii) Apply the concepts of building Brand Equity.

iii) Analyse the Brand Marketing Programs.

iv) Create and design important issues in planning, implementing and evaluating brand strategies.

v) Organise and plan Brands as relationship builders.

vi) Compare and choose different brand positioning strategies.

vii) Integrate the different theories and models to measure brand equity.

Pedagogy: 8. Lecture 9. Case Study 10. Projects 11. Group Presentation

Pre-learning:

1. Marketing Management

31

Course Outline

Sr. No. Topic Hours

1. Understanding Brands

o What is a Brand, Product vs. Brand

o Why Branding? - Brand Role & Relevance

o Evolution of brand

RRM 1: Brand Ecosystem management by Thomas Foydel

2

2. Brand as relationship builders

i) Value of brands to manufacturers, retailers and consumers and any other stakeholders

ii) Building brand relationships with internal consumers.

RRM 2: Brands, Consumers and relationships by M. Patterson and Lisa O’Malley

2

3. How Consumers Choose brands

i) Brand & Branding perspectives, (Brand identity , Brand personality and Brand Association)

ii) Creating customer value ( Customer Based Brand Equity)

RRM 3 : Brand Management to protect Brand Equity

4

4 Identifying and establishing Brand Positioning

i) Brand Positioning – the concept ii) Competitive Frame of reference- Differential Advantage (POD

and POP) iii) Using symbols, celebrity endorsements for Positioning

RRM 4 : Meaningful Brands From Meaningless Differentiation: the dependence on irrelevant attributes by Gregory Carpenter, Rashi Glazer, and Kent Nakamoto

4

5 Managing Brand Architecture, Hierarchy & Portfolio

i) Branding strategies ( Umbrella, individual, Combination) ii) Brand Architecture

RRM 5: Choosing between line extensions and second brands by Richard Speed

RRM 6: Understanding Brand Equity for successful brand extension

4

32

6 Research in Branding Decisions ( to measure Brand awareness and Loyalty)

i) Projective Techniques, ZMET, Brand Personality and Values, Experiential Methods)

ii) Quantitative Research Techniques (Brand Awareness, Brand Image, Brand Responses,

Relationships Brand Dynamics)

RRM 7 : Note on measuring brand awareness brand image brand equity and brand value

3

7 Implementing Brand Communication Programs

i) Choosing brand elements for communication

ii) Role of Multiple communication channels (Events/Advertising/Sales Promotion/PR)

3

8 Brand Evaluation:

i) Brand and marketing-mix elements. ii) Consolidation, Extension, Deletion, Repositioning Brands iii) Managing Brand over time and brand life cycle iv) Relevant Branding Models (Kapferer Brand Identity Prism, Aaker,

Fournier’s Relationship Model

3

9 Building Brand Culture

RRM 8 : Why do Brands cause trouble? A dialectical theory of consumer culture and branding by Douglas Holt

1

10 Brand Equity Measurement

i.) Brand Audit, ii.) Models of Equity measurement - concept

2

11 Contemporary issues in Branding & Case studies on innovative branding.

(Suggested)

Luxury Brands Online Branding

Creating a Brand Cult

Emotional Branding

Sensory Branding (Lindstorm)

Social Branding

Cause Related Branding

Brand Communities

Sports Branding

Impression Management (Self Branding)

2

Total Hours 30

33

Recommended Reading Material: 1. RRM 1: Brand Ecosystem management by Thomas Foydel 2. RRM 2: Brands, Consumers and relationships by M. Patterson and Lisa O’Malley 3. RRM 3 : Brand Management to protect Brand Equity 4. RRM 4 : Meaningful Brands From Meaningless Differentiation: the dependence on irrelevant attributes by

Gregory Carpenter, Rashi Glazer, and Kent Nakamoto 5. RRM 5: Choosing between line extensions and second brands by Richard Speed 6. RRM 6: Understanding Brand Equity for successful brand extension 7. RRM 7 : Note on measuring brand awareness brand image brand equity and brand value 8. RRM 8 : Why do Brands cause trouble? A dialectical theory of consumer culture and branding by Douglas

Holt

Textbooks and Reference Material:

1. Strategic Brand Management (3rd Edition) by Kevin Lane Keller, M. G. Parameswaran. & Issac Jacob (To be distributed to students from Book Bank under sharing basis).

2. Strategic Brand Management Creating and Sustaining Brand Equity Long Term - J.N Kapferer. Second edition.

3. Brand Management; Y L R Moorthy 4. Positioning; Al Ries and Jack Trout 5. Harvard Business Review on Brand Management (Harvard Business Review Paperback Series) by Erich

Joachimsthaler, David A. Aaker, John Quelch, and David Kenny 6. Building Brands by Advertising; David Aaker, Myers and Batra 7. Brand Asset Management – Driving Profitable Growth through Your Brands by Scott David, Wiley Publication,

2000 edition. 8. Brand Positioning – Strategies for Competitive Advantage by Subroto Sengupta. Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing, Eleventh reprint 1997. 9. Brand Vision to Brand Evaluation-Leslie De Chernatony, Malcolm McDonald. 10. Brand Sense : How to build Powerful brands through touch, taste, smell, sight and sound by Martin

Lindstorm 11. Building Strong Brands by Aaker. 12. Brand Positioning Strategies for Competitive Advantage. By Subroto Sengupta 13. Building Brands That Win Kaushik Mukerjee Tata McGraw Hill Education , 2013.


2 credits –

i) Internal –

a. Surprise Test/ Assignments -

b. Project on Brand Portfolio -

c. Case studies and presentation

d. Brand Quiz/ Class Test

34


1. Brand Management SCMHRD

2. Brand Management SIIB

3. Brand Management SIMS

4. Brand Management SITM

5. Brand Management SCMS PUNE

6. Product and Brand Management

SIBM PUNE


SIBM BENGALURU


SITM


SIOM AS MINOR

Name of Member

Prof. Tarun Ghosh

Dr. Trupti Dhote

Dr. Nivedita Sharma

Dr. Swati Nalawade

Designation Faculty Assistant


Associate Professor

Org. / Inst. SIMC UG Pune SITM Pune SIIB Pune SIMS, Pune

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

Benchmarking:

• Strategic Brand Management Course Outline – Wharton University of Pennsylvania, Spring 2013.

• http://bschool.nus.edu/Portals/0/images/BBA/docs/MKT3418_S2.pdf

• http://www.brescia.uwo.ca/academics/CourseOutlines/Archive/2011- 2012/documents/MOS4415Sharen.pdf

• Canadian Marketing Association : http://www.the-cma.org/education- events/certificates/branding/outline

• XIM B – Product and Brand Management - http://www1.ximb.ac.in/users/Off/Dean/DoDox4Co.nsf/27e84f44a7052f4ce52569fe0 0080a03/2586493e91883b91652579510031d453/$FILE/Course%20Outline-PBM.pdf

http://bschool.nus.edu/Portals/0/images/BBA/docs/MKT3418_S2.pdf

http://www.brescia.uwo.ca/academics/CourseOutlines/Archive/2011-2012/documents/MOS4415Sharen.pdf

http://www.brescia.uwo.ca/academics/CourseOutlines/Archive/2011-2012/documents/MOS4415Sharen.pdf

http://www.the-cma.org/education-events/certificates/branding/outline

http://www.the-cma.org/education-events/certificates/branding/outline

http://www1.ximb.ac.in/users/Off/Dean/DoDox4Co.nsf/27e84f44a7052f4ce52569fe00080a03/2586493e91883b91652579510031d453/%24FILE/Course%20Outline-PBM.pdf

http://www1.ximb.ac.in/users/Off/Dean/DoDox4Co.nsf/27e84f44a7052f4ce52569fe00080a03/2586493e91883b91652579510031d453/%24FILE/Course%20Outline-PBM.pdf

35

Sub Committee for Curriculum Development IT Management Specialization


Course Name: Business Analytics

Course Code: T3079

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 5 Learning Objective(s): The increasing availability of data in the current information society has led to the need for valid tools for its modelling and analysis. Data mining and other statistical methods are the appropriate tools to extract knowledge by analyzing data. Students should be able to understand the nature of data, especially business related data, and apply the tools to extract information or knowledge from the data. This information can be used for various business objectives like for cross-selling or up-selling, understanding ideal customer for targetted marketing.

Pedagogy: Business Analytics concept understanding, discussion, application using analytics tool to solve business analytics problem with case studies & examples.

Pre-learning: Quantitative Techniques

36

Course Outline

Books

Recommended

1. Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques, Jiawei Han and Micheline Kamber, Second Edition, The Morgan Kaufmann Series in Data Management Systems, Jim Gray, Series Editor

2. Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, March 2006. ISBN 1-55860-901-6

3. Applied Data Mining, Statistical Methods for Business and Industry, Paolo Giudici, Wiley, 2003, ISBN 0-470-84679-8

4. Business Intelligence: Making Better Decisions Faster, Elizabeth Vitt, Michael Luckevich, Stacia

Misner, Microsoft Press, 2002, ISBN 0-7356-1627-2 5. Business Intelligence Practices, Technology and Management, Rajiv Sabherwal and Irma Becerra-

Fernandez, John Wiley and Sons 2011

6. Successful Business Intelligence - Cindi Howson, McGraw Hill

7. Business Intelligence RoadMap – Larissa T. Moss and Shaku Atre, Addison-Wesley

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Business Analytics (BA) Overview - Definition, Need, Its Application, Complexity Gradient, Role of Business Analytics in creating business benefits, How business analytics meets enterprise operation

1.5

2 BA Approach - Strategy and Planning, Methodology, Architecture,

Framework 1.5

3

BA Technology Enabler – Operational Data Store (ODS), Dimensional Modeling Concepts and terminology, Dimensional Model Design Techniques, Dimensional Modeling Process, Datawarehouse, Datamart Multidimensional data model, data warehouse implementation issues relevant to businesses

4

4 BA Technology Enabler – On Line Analytical Processing (OLAP) versus Online Transaction Processing (OLTP)

2

5

BA Technology Enabler – Data mining, Data Preprocessing: Why preprocessing is necessary? How businesses can manage the data so that it can be processed better? Text mining, Mining Model Algorithms - Decision Trees

4

6

BA Technology Enabler – Frequent pattern mining: Association rules, market basket analysis with a detailed case study showing the use of analysis is business scenario Analytics Tool: Weka/ other relevant tool

4

7

BA Technology Enabler – Clustering: Clustering algorithms with a detailed case study Analytics Tool: Weka/ other relevant tool

2

8

BA Technology Enabler – Time Series Analysis, Predictive data mining: Classification algorithms, prediction using classification techniques, predictive and prescriptive analytics, accuracy of the models, application of models in real life scenario; Analytics Tool: Weka/ other relevant tool

4

9 Role of Business Analytics in Big Data 1.5

10 Business Analytics - Roles and Responsibility - System Integrator Perspective, Tool Vendor Perspective and Customer Perspective

1.5

11 BA Tools - Features, Dashboards, KPIs, Scorecards, Forecast, Measurement Framework

2

12

BA Best Practices - Lessons learnt, optimization viewpoint, BA Trends - 4 dimensions (organize, measure, impact, innovate), advanced analytics, social intelligence

2

37

8. Dimensional Modeling: In a Business Intelligence Environment - Chuck Ballard, Daniel M. Farrell, Amit Gupta, Carlos Mazuela, Stanislav Vohnik

9. IBM RedBooks - www.IBM.com/redbooks

Reference Reading

Data Mining: Practical Machine Learning Tools and Techniques, Second Edition, Ian H. Witten and Eibe Frank, Morgan Kaufmann, 2005, ISBN 0-12-088407-0

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Presentation Take home assignments/case study Quizzes Projects/practical application using tool Midterm examination End term examination



Name of Member

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Name of the Expert: Biswajit Mahopatra

Signature:

Date:3/8/2013

http://www.ibm.com/redbooks

38


Strategy

Course Code: T2262

Name: Business Awareness Test-1

Course Code: T2566

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): • To help students understand the current business environment in India and across the globe

Pedagogy: News letters and news updates on daily basis along with daily evaluations of business world updates.

Pre-learning: No specific

Students are distributed the newsletters through mail & Tests will be conducted online in computer Lab

Daily basis update of news

Books Recommended:

a) News letters - Online

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Written tests - online

Name of the Expert: Prof. Sunil Patil

39

Signature:

Date: 26/4/2014

SubCommitteeforCurriculumDevelopment

Strategy

Course Code: T2262

Name: Business Awareness Test - 2

Course Code: T2567

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): • To help students understand the current business environment in India and across the globe

Pedagogy: Newsletters and news updates on daily basis along with daily evaluations of business world updates.

Pre-learning: No specific

Students are distributed the newsletters through mail & Tests will be conducted online in computer Lab

Daily basis update of news

Books Recommended:

b) News letters - Online

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Written tests - online

Name of the Expert: Prof. Sunil Patil

40

Signature:

Date: 26/4/2014


General Management Stream


Course Name: Business Communication

Course Code: T2239

(UG/PG): PG

Course Code : GM –P -4


Level: 4


At the end of this course, students will be able to :

10. Understand the meaning and importance of communication in current globalized scenario.

11. Communicate effectively in a professional environment.

12. Overcome communication barriers by using tools and methods of effective communication.

13. Effectively use latest communication technologies.

Pedagogy:

12. Class room lectures

13. Interactive Discussions

14. Case lets

15. Practice Group Discussions, Presentations, etc

16. Games and Activities

17. Audio and Video Sessions

Pre-learning:

41

• Basic comprehension of English language.

42

Recommended

• Business Communication by Shirley Taylor

• Basic Business Communication by Lesikar Flatley

• Body Language by Julius Fast

• Basic Business Communication by Scott Ober

• How to Speak Without Fear by Natalie Rogers


• Class Tests

• Group Discussions

• Extempore and Presentations

• Assignments and Projects


Course

Outline

Books


1 Effective Business

Communication

University of Cambridge

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Introduction - Meaning, process, types, modes, channels and importance 2

2 Barriers of Communication and its consequences 1

3

Planning & Structuring Communication - setting goals, understanding

audience, knowing context, deciding mode and structure of communication

2

4 Body Language 2

5 Presentation Skills and use of audio-visual tools 2

6 Voice Culture - Pitch, tone, pace, volume, etc 1

7

Technology in communication - video conferences, telephonic conversations,

skype, etc

1

8 Public Speaking 1

9 3 C's of Communication - Clear, concise and correct 1

10

Captivating Audience-Making communication interesting by Analogies,

Surprises, Credible sources, Use of Story, Emotions & Humor etc

2

11 Interpersonal Communication 2

12 Meetings & Discussions 2

13 Effective Listening Skills 1

14 Efficient Email and Letter writing 2

15 Report Writing 2

16 Essay Writing 2

17 Proposal Writing 1

18 Getting Feedback and asking questions 1

19 Cross Cultural Sensitivity and Diversity Communication 2

43

2 Effective Business

Communication

Harvard Summer School

Note: We went through the course structures of IIM-A, FMS, MDI, JBIMS, SPJIMR, XLRI, NMIMS. None of these

institutions’ syllabus is available. Websites provide only the name of subject.

Name of

Member

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

44

Sub Committee - Specialization for

Curriculum Development

Course Name : Business Communication - II

Course Code : T5959

Faculty : Media and Communication

Programme Type : PG

Course Credit : 1

Course Level : 5

Sub-Committee (Specialization) : Communication Management

Batch : 2020

Learning Objectives :

45

Books Recommended :

Students should be able to understand and apply communication strategies linked

toteam, leadership and organisational effectiveness

Students should be apply writing skills to influence audiences in high-stake

contextssuch as employment processes and financial investment

Students should be able to understand gender and cultural differences in

organisations,and identify strategies to overcome potential organisational fault lines

Students should be able to apply negotiation and conflict resolution techniques

Book Author

Publisher

Business Communication: Developing

Leaders for a Networked World

Cardon McGrawHill

The New Articulate Executive Toogood McGraw-Hill

Course Outline : Sr. No. Topic Hours

-1 Communication and Organizational Effectiveness: a review of key concepts (formal and informal systems, teams, leadership, communication networks)

1.5

2 Recruitment-process communications: crafting personal narratives in cover letters, resumes, online profiles

1.5

3 Executive storytelling for Persuasion and Motivation: contexts and applications

1.5

4 Business proposals: Writing to reader expectations, presenting outcomes and potential effectively; communicating with data

1.5

5 Communication strategies for conflict resolution 1.5

6 Negotiation management 1.5

7 Intercultural communication competence: concepts and applications

1.5

Page: 1

46

Technology-mediated communication and communicationmanagement in virtual teams

8 Diversity and communication in organizations: principles andpractices

1.5

1.5

47

Pre Requisites :Evaluation :

Pedagogy :Expert :

48

9 Communicating during crises 1.5

Business Communication - I

Group Discussion

Presentation

Individual Proposals and LettersBusiness

Simulations

Lecture, Case method, Simulations and Experiential LearningGirija

Shankar Semuwal,Assistant Professor,SIMC

49




Course Name: BUSINESS DEVELOPMENT IN KNOWLEDGE ECONOMY

Course Code: T3178

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): To understand the specifics of selling solutions in the knowledge ecnomy

Pedagogy: 1. Conceptual Learning 2. Case studies 3. Group Assignments 4. Presentations

Pre-learning:

50

S.No. Topic No of hrs

1

THE KNOWLEDGE ECONOMY Evolution of the knowledge economy., Critical trends and their business impact in the knowledge economy , The increasing role of technology Dynamic customer expectations , Need for “Business Development In The Knowledge Economy”: course synopsis

3

2

KNOWLEDGE IS THE BUSINESS Understanding knowledge and its role , Characteristics of knowledge ,Essentials of managing knowledge , Innovation – the need of the hour!

2

3

THE NEED FOR A SOLUTION “My offerings are getting commodities!”, Customer expectations beyond products and services – focus on solution“ Why should we invest?”; what are the business benefits to be achieved? Knowledge has to manifest itself in the solution offered Need to understand the modern enterprise system and its specific needs Different organization views using tools like value chain and business processes.

2

4

BASICS OF SOLUTION SELLING What constitutes a solution , The solution lifecycle: need to understand the entire lifecycle of the solution to be able to market it properly; its differences against product / services selling , Building the “Elevator Pitch”, Objective of building good references , Understanding customer’s business problems; pain points identification Use of external consultants by customers and its impact on solution selling

2

5

THE SOLUTION SELLING PROCESS Making customer contact , Essentials of account management Judging the customer’s needs , Deciding the solution selling strategy Adopting a consultative approach , Process of the consultative approach Roles and responsibilities , Methods used

2

6

THE SOLUTION PROPOSAL The solution proposal and its components , Judging the customer’s capacity to pay – budgetary quote , Detailed proposal Positioning the solution , Pricing strategies

2

7

FOCUS ON DELIVERING CUSTOMER VALUE The customer’s lifecycle , Opportunities for solution providers at different stages of customer lifecycle , Comparing alternative solutions, Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) , Return On Investment (ROI); calculation and related difficulties , What is the value proposition? Implementing solutions for business benefits , Measuring the benefits Building good reference customers

2

8

BEYOND SOLUTION IMPLEMENTATION Customer satisfaction and reference , Solution health check audit Solution maintenance & upgrades , Up-sell and cross-sell Special areas:, Business Process Reorganization , Enterprise Resource Planning , Supply Chain Management , Customer Relationship Management Collaborative Product Commerce , Enterprise Application Integration Data Warehousing

3

9

IT – AN INTEGRAL PART OF KNOWLEDGE DRIVEN SOLUTIONS The boom in ICT; convergence and its implications on business The need for an IT solution. , IT solutions and enterprise strategy decisions; change management , Partners in collaboration Customer , Consulting

3

51

partner , Implementing partner , Product vendor,Hardware vendor , Connectivity vendors , Turnkey solution providers – Systems Integrators

10

SPECIAL FOCUS: THE IT SOLUTION LIFECYCLE Selection Factors of evaluation , Industry specific solutions, Software licensing Implementation : Analyzing business processes , Implementation methodology Trainings , Business process reengineering, Implementation issues for customer and solution provider Optimization : Making best use of implemented software , Extending the solution

3

11

SPECIAL FOCUS: ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING (ERP) – PART I The need for ERP , Evolution of ERP; What ERP is…and is not Analyzing the need for ERP – questionnaire Selecting an ERP system and the implementation partner

2

12

SPECIAL FOCUS: ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING (ERP) – PART II Implementing an ERP system , Implementation Challenges, Typical technical, business and people issues involved , Post implementation use and optimization; upgrades, Case study and discussion: Well known success and failure stories

1

13

SPECIAL FOCUS: SCM & CRM SOLUTIONS Relevant principles of SCM , Basics and need of SCM solutions Buy / Operations / Sell side solutions , Benefits / pitfalls in SCM solutions Pitfalls in SCM solution implementations , Relevant principles of CRM Basics and need for CRM solutions , CRM solutions , Benefits / pitfalls in CRM solutions , Integration with ERP system

1

14 SPECIAL FOCUS: CURRENT ERP, SCM, CRM SOLUTIONS IN MARKET 1

15

SPECIAL FOCUS: CAREERS IN PROVIDING SOLUTIONS Submission of Assignment , Sales , Solution evaluation Pre-sale consulting , Post-sale implementation , Solution audit Management consulting

1.

1

Course Outline

Books Recommended Managing For Results – Peter Drucker, Competitive Advantage – Michael Porter Enterprise Resource Planning: Concepts and Practice – Vinod Kumar Garg, N.K. Venkitakrishnan – Prentice Hall India , ERP Demystified – Alexis Leon – Tata McGraw-Hill




52

Name of Member

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

53




Course Name: Business Environment UG/PG): PG

Course Code: T2238

Course Code : GM – P -3

Number of Credits: 2 Level: 3/4/5


On completion of this course, students will be able to :

14. Enhance their understanding of Indian economic reality, government policies, problems and solutions.

15. Widen their' intellectual horizons through understanding the domestic and global economic and non-economic factors, and their impact on business.

16. To comprehend the economic and non-economic factors in different sectors of Indian Economy.

Pedagogy: 18. Class Discussions 19. Case Study/ Games 20. Research based Presentations

54

Pre-learning:

Knowledge of Micro (Managerial Economics) and Macro Economics.

55

S.No. Topic Hours

1. Introduction to Business Environment: Internal and External

Environment (PESTLE) and Current Affairs Analysis 4

2. Features of Indian economy: Agriculture and

Five Year Plans: Achievements and failures 4

3.

Fiscal Policy: Public revenues, public expenditure, deficit/ surplus, public debt, development activities financed by public

expenditure, FRBM, An evaluation of recent fiscal policy of Government of India – Highlights of Budget.

3

4. RBI’s Monetary Policy: Instruments, Objectives of monetary and credit

policy, Recent trends 2

5. Industrial Policies: A brief review of industrial policies, BoP crisis, and Industrial policy of 1991: Liberalization, Privatization, Globalization, and

recent developments.

4

6. Trade Policy – Magnitude and direction of Indian International trade,

bilateral and multilateral trade agreements, EXIM Policy, WTO. 3

7. Foreign Exchange Market: Exchange rates & RBI intervention, forex

reserves, BoP, Convertibility, FDI-FII. 2

8.

Sectoral Analysis: Automobile Industry, IT, Ites Industry, Pharmaceuticals Industry, Power – Generation and Distribution

Steel Industry, Retail Sector, Telecom sector, Banking Sector, BASEL, Aviation Industry, Tourism, and Hospitality Industry.

4

9.

Business in Other Economies: Economic Transition- Stagflation, US sub-prime crisis, European Debt crisis, Japanese liquidity trap, the Great Depression, South East Asian currency crisis, German unification, Birth of

Euro.

4

Total (hours) 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended: Dutt and Sundaram, Indian Economy, S. Chand, New Delhi, 2007. K.Aswathappa, Essentials of Business Environment, 9/e Himalaya, 2007. Justin Paul: Business Environment, 1e 2006, Tata MH Misra and Puri: Indian Economy,, Himalaya, 2007. Francis Cherunilam: Business Environment: Text and Cases, 17/e, Himalaya, 2007. Recent Economic Survey Report of Government of India. RBI Bulletins, Business Newspapers and articles in Journals and Magazines.

56

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Written Assignments, Research Projects, Presentations, Quiz, Class Tests.


1. Socio-Cultural Environment of Business

SCMHRD

2. Business Awareness SITM 3. Business Environment SIMS

4. Business Environment SIOM (Nasik)

Name of Member

Dr. Shubhada Sabade

Dr. P.A. Ratna Dr. Jasmeet Kaur

Designation Asso. Prof. Asst. Prof. Asst. Prof.

Org. / Inst. SIMS SIOM SITM

Signature

Name of the Expert: Dr. Shrirang Altekar

Signature:

Date: 02/08/13

57


QS & A Specialization

Course Name: Business Forecasting

Course Code: T2209

(UG/PG): PG

Course No. QS&A P 17


Level: 4

This course looks at the use of econometric/statistical techniques relevant to time series forecasting in a business environment, including computer implementation of econometric/statistical methods. Applications are emphasized in this course.


On completion of the course, students should be able to: 1. Describe and interpret basic characteristics of economic time series. 2. Select, estimate and diagnostically check basic time series models for economic time series data. 3. Apply learnt principles and techniques to implement and evaluate forecasts. 4. Present and interpret modeling and forecasting outcomes.

58

Pedagogy: Teaching theory through real life data Teaching through case using statistical software like SPSS/Minitab,SAS,R-Software or MS Excel, XLMiner

Pre-learning: Must have completed course on “Business Statistics” successfully

59

Course Outline:

Module Topics Session Hours

1 Forecasting Perspective Why Forecast? Overview of Forecasting Techniques Basic Steps in Forecasting

2

2 Basic Forecasting Tools Time Series and Cross Sectional Data Time Series and its components Graphical Summaries Numerical Summaries Forecasting Accuracy Transformation and Adjustments

3

3 Time Series Decomposition Principles of decomposition Additive Decomposition Multiplicative Decomposition Forecasting and Decomposition

3

4 Exponential Smoothening Methods Averaging Methods Holt’s Linear Method Holt-Winter’s Trend and Seasonality Method

6

5 Causal Methods Simple Regression Multiple Regression Problems converted to Multiple Regression

2

6 ARIMA Model Introduction to ARIMA Model PACF – Partial Auto Correlation Factor Determining p, d, q, P, D, Q Backshift Notation Cases

8

7 Cases 4

8 Other Topics Advanced Forecasting Models Use of Forecasting Methods in practice Implementing Forecasting

2

Books Recommended

Makridakis, Wheelwright and Hyndman, “Forecasting Methods and Applications, 3rd Edition, Wiley Diebold, F.X. (2007), Elements of Forecasting, 4th Edition, Thomson South-Western Brockwell, P.J. and R.A. Davis (1996), Introduction to Time Series and Forecasting, Springer-Verlag Wilson, J.H. and B. Keating (2007), Business Forecasting, 5th Edition, McGraw-Hill/Irwin

60

Brockwell, P.J. and R.A. Davis (1996), Introduction to Time Series and Forecasting, Springer-Verlag


Quizzes 30 % (2 Quiz) Assignments 30 % (2 Group Assignment) Final Exam 40 %


S.No. Name of the course Institute where it was offered 1 Business Forecasting The University of New South Wales 2 Forecasting DUKE UNIVERSITY-THE FUQUA SCHOOL OF BUSINESS 3 Business Forecasting University of Stellenbosch Business School

Name of Member

Dr.Rameshwar Dubey

Designation

Org. / Inst. SIOM,Nasik

Signature


Signature:

Date:18-10-13

61


Course Name: Business Intelligence I

Course Code: T3289

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): Business intelligence, or BI, is an umbrella term that refers to a

variety of software applications used to analyze an organization’s raw data. BI as a discipline

is made up of several related activities, including data mining, online analytical processing,

querying and reporting. BI technologies provide historical, current and predictive views of

business operations. BI consistently rates at the top of companies’ investment priorities.

Companies use BI to improve decision making, cut costs and identify new business

opportunities. BI is more than just corporate reporting and more than a set of tools to coax

data out of enterprise systems. CIOs use BI to identify inefficient business processes that

are ripe for re-engineering. With today’s BI tools, business people can jump in and start

analyzing data themselves, rather than wait for IT to run complex reports. This

democratization of information access helps users back up—with hard numbers—business

decisions that would otherwise be based only on gut feelings and anecdotes.

Notes to teachers: It is hard to include every aspect or topic in a syllabus. This syllabus be treated as a living

document and addition, deletion or expansion of topics are expected/encouraged to keep up

with changes in technology and applications. Assignments to students and student

presentation is an excellent opportunity for teachers to include topical issues to this syllabus.

Pedagogy: 1) Lectures

2) Class discussion

3) Case Studies

4) Lab Sessions

62

Pre-requisites: DBMS, Data Modeling, Data Warehouse

Course Outline

Topic

No. Topics for Classroom Sessions Clock Hours

1 Need for Business Intelligence: when and why? 2

2 The history of Business Intelligence 2

3 Business Intelligence from business side - How BI provides business

value 2

4 The information pyramid 2

5 Business Performance Management 4

6 Self-service BI 2

7 The BI Front End - Business Scorecards, Dashboards, Reports 2

8 Mobile Business Intelligence and Analytics 2

9 Success factors of implementation 2

10 Implementing BI Solutions 4

11 Case study on BI 4

12 Big Data: What It Is and Why You Should Care?,

Challenges and Opportunities with Big Data 2

30

Books Recommended

🟃 Making the Business Intelligence Decisions Faster By Elizabeth Vitt, Michael Luckevich, Stacia Misner , Published by MicroSoft 🟃 Business Intelligence Practices, Technology and Management Rajiv Sabherwal and Irma Becerra-Fernandez, John Wiley and Sons 2011 🟃 Successful Business Intelligence - Cindi Howson, McGraw Hill 🟃 Business Intelligence RoadMap – Larissa T. Moss and Shaku Atre, Addison-Wesley 🟃 Dimensional Modeling: In a Business Intelligence Environment

63

Chuck Ballard, Daniel M. Farrell, Amit Gupta, Carlos Mazuela, Stanislav Vohnik IBM RedBooks www.IBM.com/redbooks 🟃 Big Data: What It Is and Why You Should

Care(http://businessintelligence.com/white-paper-big-data-what-it-is-and-why-

you-should-care/) 🟃 Challenges and Opportunities with Big Data

(http://businessintelligence.com/white-paper-challenges-and-opportunities-with- big-data/) 🟃 Mobile Business Intelligence and Analytics

(http://businessintelligence.com/white-paper-mobile-business-intelligence-and- analytics/)

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Written Test

Case Study

Assignments

Group Activities


Name of

Member Mr. Vijay Shrotriya

Designation Visiting Faculty

Org. / Inst. SICSR

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

http://www.ibm.com/redbooks

http://businessintelligence.com/white-paper-big-data-what-it-is-and-why-you-should-care/

http://businessintelligence.com/white-paper-big-data-what-it-is-and-why-you-should-care/

http://businessintelligence.com/white-paper-challenges-and-opportunities-with-big-data/

http://businessintelligence.com/white-paper-challenges-and-opportunities-with-big-data/

http://businessintelligence.com/white-paper-mobile-business-intelligence-and-analytics/

http://businessintelligence.com/white-paper-mobile-business-intelligence-and-analytics/

64

Sub Committee for Curriculum Development Entreprenruship Specialization


Course Name: Business Modeling and Business Plan Course No. ENTRE U 14

Course Code: T2352 (UG/PG): UG Number of Credits: 4 Level: 3 Learning Objective(s):

🟃 Understand the essentials of a Business Model 🟃 Create a detailed business plan for an identified business idea

Pedagogy: ICT, Interactive, Case Based, Experiential Pre-learning: Entrepreneurship

65

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Business Models: Osterwalder’s Business Model Canvas preparation for the business Idea; customer segment, Value proposition, , distribution channals, Customer relationship, key activities, key resources, key partners, cost structure and revenue streams

10

Formalities for setting up a business enterprise: Legal structures, patents, copyrights and trademarks, Licensing, product safety and liability, insurance, contracts, Schedule of Execution, Project Management tool

10

2 Entrepreneurial marketing The marketing concept, Market research, Marketing Tools, E-marketing, Marketing Strategy and Market Plan 4

3 The organizational Plan: The management team, Legal forms of business, Designing the organization

4

4

Business Plan Scope and value of the business plan, Information needed, contents of the business plan, writing the business plan, using and implementing the business plan.

10

5

The Financial Plan :Operating and capital budgets, financial statements, cash flow, balance sheet, break-even analysis, Ratio Analysis, software packages

10

6

Sources of capital: Funding options , Debt or Equity, Internal or External, Angel funding, Bootstrapping, Commercial Banks, Government Grants, Private placement, any other

4

7

Growth, Valuation and Exit Policy Growth Strategy, Mergers and Acquisition, Continuous review of Business Model and moving to Plan B

4

8 Social Entrepreneurship

4

60

Books Recommended

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Case Analysis Mini Projects Presentations



Business Modeling and Business Plan

SICSR BCA and BBA IT Sem.VI

66

Name of Member

Rajashree Jain

Designation Asst.Prof

Org. / Inst. SICSR

Signature

Name of the Expert: Prof. Vinod Shastri Signature: Date:

67


Course Name: Business Process Management

Course Code: T3288

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4


Superior competitive advantage results from effective business processes. Study of Business Process Analysis and Management are relevant to achieve Business and IT alignment and to design and implement IT applications integration in the extended enterprise of today to deliver Business Strategy. This course focuses on principles of process management and process architecture components for understanding essence of process design. Students learn tools for process design. The course presents contemporary Business Process Management Systems (BPMS) with its components, architecture, standards, functionalities, life cycle and success factors for implementation. Students study intra- and inter- organizational business processes modeled through hands-on use of selected software.

Pedagogy:

Lectures Assignments Case study

Pre-learning:

Knowledge of Software Engineering principles based on Structured Methodologies and UML based approaches.

Course Outline

68

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Principles of Process Management: Business change drivers and organizational response Principles of Process Management and Process Management Framework Business Process orientation: Functional view of organization, evolution of process view Review of process documentation in structured methodologies Business Process Management Initiative (BPMI)– An overview

4

2

Introduction to Business Process Design: Process definition and types Process architecture components Process Frameworks – industry based Essence of process design: Impact on business performance and strategy; Incremental improvements versus process design; revolutionary and evolutionary approach Phases of successful Process Management: Ownership, boundaries/interfaces, process definition, control points, monitoring for control and measurements, feedback and corrective actions Study process improvement approaches: Six sigma quality programs Business Process Re-engineering (BPR)

4

3

Simulation-based framework for process design: Process identification Evaluate design enablers Process understanding Creative process design Process modeling and simulation Process implementation

4

4

Tools for Process Design: Tools for modeling static aspects of business processes Tools for modeling dynamic behavior of processes Process flow analysis: General process charts, process flow diagrams, activity charts flow charts Work flow design principles and tools Additional diagramming tools

6

5

General Study of Business Processes: Intra-organizational processes: Sales and Distribution; Manufacturing; Financial Accounting; HR Management; selected business domains/industries

6

6

Business Process Management Systems: Benefits of BPMS – why BPM?

4

69

BPM and business strategy: value chain, business focus and performance measurement Capturing a business process in computer BPM Life Cycle; Flowchart vs. Modeling BPMS capabilities and BPMS architecture BPMS and SOA - applications integration BPMS – critical success factors Technical Standards: Need for standards, Graphical, Execution and Interchange standards and standards for life cycle phases; Overview of BPMN 2.0 and BPEL

7

Assignments Students study real life business situations to document As Is and To Be processes using selected software tools and prepare requisite documentation for design of application software to deliver the designed processes

2

Total Hours 30

Books Recommended 🟃 Business Process Management – by Roger T. Burlton 🟃 Business Process Orientation – by Kevin McCormack and William Johnson 🟃 Business Process Modeling, Simulation and Design – by Manuel Laguna and Johan Marklund 🟃 Oracle Business Process Management Suite 11g Handbook – by Manoj Das, Manas Deb and Mark Wilkins 🟃 Business Analysis – by Pradeep Pendse 🟃 Reengineering the Corporation – Michael Hammer and James Champy 🟃 Organizational Transformation through Business Process Reengineering – by Vikram Sethi and William R. King

References www.bpmi.org www.omg.org

Suggested Evaluation Methods: 🟃 Written test 🟃 Assignments 🟃 Presentations

http://www.bpmi.org/

http://www.omg.org/

70


QS &A Specialization

Course Name: Business Statistics

Course Code: T2216

(UG/PG): PG


Course No. QS&A P 3

Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): 🟃 To enable students to present, analyze and interpret data. 🟃 To enable students to use concepts of probability in business situations. 🟃 To enable students to make inferences from samples drawn from large datasets. 🟃 To enable students to apply univariate and multivariate statistical techniques.

Pedagogy: 🟃 Classroom lectures and laboratory sessions

Pre-learning: Foundation course in Statistics

71

Course outline:

72

Sr. No. Topic Hours

1

The need for statistics and probability theory. Basic descriptive statistics. Populations and samples – the need for inference tools. Mean, variance and standard deviation for populations and samples. Measures of location and dispersion. Graphical depictions of data. Frequency graphs, histograms, scatter-plots. Using software to explore data.

3

2

The correlation coefficient. The normal distribution, Standard scores. Bivariate data. Interpretation of the Pearson correlation coefficient. The ubiquity of the normal distribution. z-scores and their use. Chebyshev's theorem and it's comparison with the normal distribution.

3

3 Introduction to linear regression. Fitting a linear model to data. Interpretation of the regression coefficients.

2

4 Introduction to multiple regression models. Using statistical software to build regression models. The principle of parsimony and the need for probability theory.

3

5

Probability theory. Basic definitions and basic probability models. Basic ideas of probability theory. Rules for calculating probabilities. Mutually exclusive and independent events. Joint, marginal and conditional probabilities. Baye's theorem. The binomial distribution. Probabilities for the normal distribution.

3

6 Sampling theory. Parameters and statistics. The sampling distribution. The Central Limit Theorem. Probabilities for the sampling distribution. 2

7 Estimation: point and interval. Confidence intervals and their use. 2

8

The hypothesis testing framework. t-tests Type I and Type II errors. Power of a test. Hypothesis testing using the normal distribution. The t-distribution. One sample, paired and independent samples t-tests. Lab session with software.

4

9

ANOVA The need for a new technique to compare means of multiple groups. The omnibus hypothesis and post-hoc tests. The ANOVA table. ANOVA using software.

4

10 Non-parametric tests. Chi-square tests. Cross tabulations. The need for non-parametric tests. Wilcoxon and Mann-Whitney tests. Lab session with software.

4

Books Recommended 1) Anderson, Sweeney and Williams, “Statistics for Business and Economics”, Cengage Learning,

2001(11e) 2) Levin and Rubin, “Statistics for Management”, Prentice-Hall, 2007

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Written tests & evaluation using statistical software


73


1 Business Statistics SCMHRD, SIIB, SIOM, SSBM, SCIT, SIBM - P,

Name of Member

Ravi Kulkarni Trupti Bhosale

Designation Professor Asst. Prof.

Org. / Inst. SCMHRD SSBM

Signature


Signature:

Date:

Benchmarks:

Cornell University http://forum.johnson.cornell.edu/faculty/mcclain/StatsAMBA/

Wharton School of Management http://www-stat.wharton.upenn.edu/~waterman/Teaching/smmdIs03/Syllabus/Syllabus.html

http://forum.johnson.cornell.edu/faculty/mcclain/StatsAMBA/

http://www-stat.wharton.upenn.edu/~waterman/Teaching/smmdIs03/Syllabus/Syllabus.html

74


Marketing Specialization

Course Name: Business to Business Marketing Number of Credits: 2

Course Code – MM P 040 Course Range – 600-899

Level- 4/5

Learning Objective(s): After the completion of this course the student shall be able to:

1. Develop insight into Organizational buying behavior in very competitive situations

2. Analyse and examine the globalized, business-to-business environments and similarities

and differences between Business-to-Business Marketing and Consumer Marketing

Organizational buying behavior in very competitive situations.

3. Apply the knowledge and skills for devising implementable industrial marketing strategies

Pedagogy: 21. Lecture

22. Case Study 23. Projects

Pre-learning:


Course Outline

Sr. No Topics Hours

75

1

Introduction and Overview of B2 B Marketing Understanding firms as customers

2

2

Industrial Customers, Demand Analysis, Purchasing Orientation. Buying Decision Process. Purchasing Sequence. Contemporary Trends in Purchasing

Activities. Model of Buyer Behavior.

3

3 B2 B market planning - strategic perspectives 2

4

Developing and B2B marketing strategies

Segmentation strategies Pricing Strategies

Branding strategies Business marketing communications strategies

Sales Strategies

6

5

Channel Strategy Integrated Approach to Total Distribution Cost & Customer Service. Trends in

Ind. Marketing Channels. Integrated Approach to

4

6 Managing products and services for business markets 3

7. Controlling and monitoring marketing strategy in B2B Marketing 2

7 CRM strategies for business markets 3

8 Managing innovation and new industrial product development 2

9 Contemporary trends in B2B marketing (digital, green etc.) 3

Total 30

Books Recommended

1. James C Anderson and James A Narus, “Business Market Management”, Pearson

2. Micheal D Hutt and Thomas W Speh, “Business Market Management - B2B”, Cengage

3. Gary L. Lilien, Rajdeep Grewal, “Handbook on Business to Business Marketing, Edward

Elgar Publishing

4. Robert R .Reeder, Edward G.Brierty and Betty H. Reeder , Industrial Marketing – Analysis,

Planning and Control, PHI

5. Richard Hill, Alexander Rosph and James S.Cross, Industrial Marketing, AITBS Publishers

& Distributors

76

6. Krishna K Havaldar, Industrial Marketing, TMH

7. P K Ghosh, Industrial Marketing, Oxford University Press


1. Projects 2. Research article review and presentation

77



Course Name: Business Transformation and Organizational Turnaround

Course Code: T2623

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4


• To attain managerial skills to identify situations in which business unit finds itself in crisis and manage them strategically through transformation

• To effectively assess failing ventures within a company

• To integrate different functional domain knowledge and devise a turnaround strategy for the business unit

• To analyse and implement strategies to make the business unit more competitive and a profitable enterprise

• To study and understand the challenges faced by decision makers in turning around a dying investment

• To learn contemporary and practical business tools that are successful in transforming the business

Pedagogy :

Interactive sessions with emphasis on related theory, case studies on contemporary issues and latest developments in the business world.

Pre-learning:

• Knowledge of strategy and decision making, models in marketing, financial tools, operations management, human resource management, organizational behavior and Entrepreneurship.

78

Syllabus, Teach Plan & Session Plan Topic Details of the topic to be covered Teaching Tools

(Cases/ Audio-Visual, Software etc.)

No. of hrs

The Corporate turnaround

Reasons for corporate failure; Predictable organisational crisis; Most common management errors; Early warning signals of decline

Lecture and Discussion 7.5

Role of Management and Leadership

Management change; Turnaround leader characteristics; Stages in turnaround cycle; Key factors in turnaround success

Lecture and Discussion 10

Turnaround strategies and practices

Structure of evaluations; Financial, competitive, organizational assessments; Planning strategies by stages

Lecture and Discussion 6

Emergency stage and Stabilisation stage

Asset redeployment; Financial, Operations and Marketing management in Emergency stage, The Return-to-Growth stage; Financial, Operations and Marketing management in Stabilisation and Return-to- Growth stage

Lecture and Discussion 6.5

30

Recommended Text Books: 1. Surviving Transformation: Lessons from GM's Surprising Turn Around

by Vincent P Barabba 2. Corporate Turnaround: How Managers Turn Losers Into Winners by Donald B. Bibeault. Beard

Books, 1999

Additional Readings: Study materials if required and found suitable will circulated in the form of cases from ecch, and other selected sources, relevant videos of solutions providers and from other sources as selected by the faculty.

79

Internal Assessment Parameters

1. Quizzes, 2. Assignments (Take-

home) 3. Class Tests 4. Case Studies

TOTAL External As per SIU Norms

80


International Business Specialization

Course Name: Business, Government and the Global Political Economy

Course Code: T2389

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): 1. Compare and contrast the interdependence between business and government in various

countries across the world.

2. Analyse the ways in which states regulate industry, and the influence of business on

government policy.

3. Interpret the current issues affecting business and government relations

Pedagogy: 1. Class Room Sessions

2. Discussions

3. Case Studies

Pre-learning:

NA

81

Course Outline:

S.No. Details Hours

1 Introduction 2

2 State and Market 4

3 State Capitalism vs. Liberal Capitalism 4

4 Business and Government in China 4

5 US and Europe: State and Market 2

6 Euro Crisis 2

7 Welfare States 2

8 Developmental States 2

9 Brazil 2

10 India 2

11 Africa 2

12 Going Global 2

Total 30

Books Recommended 1. Robert Grosse, International Business and Government Relations in the 21st Century, Cambridge University

Press, (Cambridge, MA), 2005

2. The Oxford Handbook of Business and Government Edited by David Coen, Wyn Grant and Graham Wilson

(Oxford University Press, 2010)

3. Governments, Globalization, and International Business (Oxford University Press,1997).

4. State Directed Development Political Power and Industrialization in the Global Periphery AtulKolhi

(Cambridge University Press, 2004)


1. Class Test 2. Presentations



Name of Member

Mrs. SmitaSantoki

Mr. Deepak Havaldar

Mrs. Ishita Dutt

Dr. P. A. Ratna

Dr. AnithaPathak

Designation Asst. Prof. Asst. Prof. Asst. Prof. Asst. Prof. Adjunct

Faculty

Org. / Inst. SIIB SCMS SCMS SIOM SIIB

Signature

Name of the Expert: Dr. AnithaRamannaPathak SignatureDate: 02-08-2013

82


Human Resource Management

Specialization

Course Name: Capstone Project and Defence

Course Code: T2802

(UG/PG): P.G

Number of Credits:_2

Level:4


1) Effective business management: Develop graduates with rigorous understanding of

core business functions and with problem-solving skills reflecting an integration of

functional perspectives. Graduates should be prepared to assume positions of

leadership and contribute immediately to the improved performance of their

organizations.

2) Management use of information: Develop graduates with the capability to organize,

describe, and make intelligent inferences from empirical evidence. Graduates

should be able to apply sophisticated statistical techniques to data; make informed

forecasts of business trends; and formulate, solve, and interpret quantitative

business decision models.

3) Recognize opportunities and evaluate potential for business success, and consider

implementation issues including financial, operational and administrative

procedures involved in running a business venture.

4) Critical Thinking Skills: Critically evaluate, analyze and interpret information to

solve problems and make business decisions. Students will interpret and evaluate

unstructured situations, define the problem, apply theories to ambiguous situations,

draw conclusions and implement solutions

5) Utilize business decision support and productivity tools: Demonstrate ability to

utilize spreadsheet technology to enhance analysis and presentation of data related

to a specific business issue, the use of computer-based productivity tools to enhance

83

an oral presentation of a business issue, the ability to locate and use internet data

sources.

Course Outline:

1

Pre Simulation reading and familirization group formation and registration details

2

Simulation Inroductory lectures, deomonstration and move-along

2

Introduction to Capstone Business Simulation and Running Practice Financial Year 1

3


4


5


6

Analysis, Formulation and Implementation: Competition Financial Year 1

7


8


9


10


11


12


13


14 Experiential Learning






84










85


Course Name: Post Graduate Diploma in Globalization and Urban Governance

Module Name: Case Study Writing and Analysis Method

(UG/PG): PG Course code: ENP006

Course Code: T6011


Level: 4

Outline:

A case study is a description of an actual administrative situation involving a decision to be made or a

problem to be solved. It can be a real situation that actually happened just as described, or portions have

been disguised for reasons of privacy. Most case studies are written in such a way that the reader takes the

place of the decision maker whose responsibility is to make decisions to help solve the problem. The case

method of analysis is a learning tool in which students and Instructors participate in direct discussion of

case studies. The module also includes case study writing by students wherein assigned cases are prepared

by students under the direction of the Instructor. Since students of the Globalization and Urban Governance

course would be exposed to real life situations demanding policy solutions, it is imperative that they imbibe

the skills of case study writing and analysis.


The module seeks to develop in students

86

17. The skills of case study writing, by knowing some of the Do’s and Don’ts of the case study

writing.

18. Ability to evaluate a problem, make decisions, and argue a point of view

19. Ability to think in terms of the problems faced by an administrator

20. Ability to collect the facts and figures of any topic and put that all in a structured form.

21. Better writing skills

Pedagogy:

24. Lecture/presentations, analyzing the best, published case studies.

25. Actual site visit

S.No. Topic Hours

1. What is a case study? 1

2. Types of Case study 1

3. Selection of topic and methodology 2

4 Components of the Case, structuring it 2

5. Importance and preparation of the teaching notes 1

6 Components of the teaching notes 1

7. Common pitfalls in the case study writing 1

8. Analyzing few good case studies 4

9. Actual case study writing experience – site visit, data collection 7

10. Writing part of the case study 5

11. Presentation and assessment of the case study 5

26. Actual writing of the new case study.

Pre-requisites: None specific, but good grasp of English language.

Course Outline

87

Books Recommended

1. Renee Campoy, 2005, ' Case Study Analysis in the Classroom', Sage Publications, Inc.

2. Robert E. Stake, 2006, ' Multiple Case Study Analysis', Guilford Publication.

Robert K. Yin, 2003, ' Case Study Research, Design and Methods', Sage Publication.

Research Papers/Articles recommended for reading: (discretion of faculty)


Internal Assessment: 60 Marks (Internal: CE (20) + Innovative (40)) =60)

Would include Case Studies/Group Discussion/Continuous Evaluation/Innovative presentation etc.



Name of

Member

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:Date

88




Course Name: CASES IN INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY (IT)

Course Code: T3185

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4


Learning to deal with various IT problems coming up in day to day activities and different ways in resolving them by learning different case study related to the IT sector


Pre-learning:

89

S.No.

Topic

No of Sessions

1 Case on IT

12

2 Cases in IT implementation in Companies

18

Course Outline

Books Recommended

• Mehdi Khosrowpour, “Cases on Information Technology and Business Process

Reengineering”, 2006 by Idea Group Inc, ISBN: 1-59904-396-3 • Mehdi Khosrowpour, Cases on Information Technology Planning, Design and

Implementation”, 2006 by Idea Group Inc, ISBN 1-59904-408-0




Name of Member

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

90




Course Name: Cloud Management

Course Code: T3168

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4


1. To understand Cloud Concepts 2. To understand cloud infrastructure 3. To understand Virtualised Data Centre

Pedagogy:

1. Conceptual Learning 2. Case studies 3. Group Assignments 4. Presentations

Pre-learning:

1. Fundamentals of Networks 2. Computer Fundamentals

91

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Introduction • List the Business drivers for Cloud computing • Define Cloud computing • Build Cloud infrastructure

1.5

2

Classic Data Center • Compute to compute communication • Compute to storage communication • Types of Replication • Local Replication Methods • Remote Replication Methods • Key Management activities in a CDC • Information Lifecycle Management (ILM)

6

3

Virtualized Data Center-Compute • Drivers for compute virtualization • Types of hypervisor • Benefits of compute virtualization • Resource management and resource pool • Share, limit, and reservation • CPU and memory resource optimization techniques • Converter components • Conversion options • Conversion process • Conversion considerations

7.5

4

Virtualized Data Center-Storage • Key benefits of storage virtualization • Implementation of storage virtualization at compute, network,

and storage layers • Virtual machine storage options • Virtual machine storage considerations • Block-level storage virtualization • File-level storage virtualization • Virtual provisioning and its benefits • Thin LUN and Thin Pool • Virtual Provisioning for virtual disks • Automated Storage Tiering • Sub-LUN Tiering and Cache-Tiering

7.5

5

Virtualized Data Center-Networking • Overview of network virtualization • Overview of network that is virtualized • Virtualization tools that enable network virtualization • Benefits of network virtualization • Network infrastructure and components • Network connectivity and traffic flow • Features and functions of network components

7.5

92

• Definition and benefits of VLAN and VSAN • VLAN and VSAN trunking and tagging • Convergence of VLAN and VSAN traffic using FCoE

Course Outline

Books Recommended • Cloud Computing and Management - EMC


1. Written Tests 2. Group Assignments 3. Presentations


Name of Member

Yatin jog

Designation Assistant Professor

Org. / Inst. SITM

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

93


Human Resource Specialization

Course Name: Coaching, Counseling and Mentoring HR P20

Course Code: T2298

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4 and 5


22. To understand the difference between therapy, coaching, counseling and mentoring

23. To analyze and evaluating self-awareness of one’s own emotional state and its impact on

interactions.

24. To develop the knowledge required to build a coaching and mentoring relationship.

25. To apply the dos and don’ts in coaching, counseling and mentoring

Pedagogy:

27. Interactive lectures

28. Role plays

29. Case studies

30. Supervised Coaching and mentoring of 2 volunteers.

31. Team and individual assignments

Pre-learning:

Organizational behavior

Course Outline:

94

S.No Topic Hours

1

Introduction to coaching, counseling and mentoring.

Similarities and differences between coaching counseling and mentoring.

Differences between psychotherapy and coaching, counseling and

mentoring

4

2 Relevance of coaching, counseling and mentoring in the current

Organizational scenarios. 2

3

What is coaching?

What does a coach do?

What makes an effective coach?

What are some different types of coaching? What are the forces that have shaped the coaching world

4

4

Developing Characteristics of a Successful Coach

• Self -awareness

• Building relationships

• Inspiring and challenging others

• Becoming an effective listener

• Flexibility

• Overcoming prejudices

• Managing professional boundaries

4

5

Coaching For High Performance

• Who is an ideal client?

• Establishing the initial relationship and forming an effective

partnership.

• Developing a vision for change using the GROW Coaching

Model to

1. Clarify goals

2. Discuss current reality

3. Explore options

4. Commit by deciding what action will be undertaken and when

• Formulating a realistic plan for change

• Working the plan.

• Confronting and dealing with resistance

4

6

What is mentoring?

Requirements of effective mentoring.

Mapping life transitions, Career stages and building a mentoring

relationship.

4

7

Basics of counseling: Relationship building and unconditional positive

regard.

Cognitive –Behavioral model using Rational emotive approach of ABC

analysis

4

8

Core coaching, mentoring and counseling

Professional values: personal values,

Differentiating your needs from client’s need.

Attachment and intimacy- Maintaining Boundaries

4

95

Total 30

Books Recommended:

1. Coaching, Mentoring and Organizational Consultancy; Hawkins & Smith: Tata McGraw

Hill 2010

2. Counseling: A Comprehensive Profession; Gladding Samuel T; Pearson; 6th Edition

2009

3. Techniques for Coaching and Mentoring; Megginson &Clutterback; Elsevier; 2005


Role-play of case situations

Observation of mock Coaching, mentoring and Counseling session of volunteers



1 Coaching, Counseling and mentoring SIMS and SCMS- Noida

SCMS Pune

2 Graduate Certificate in Coaching and

mentoring

Swinburne university of Technology

3 Managerial Counseling XLRI

Name of

Member

Dr. Rupavataram Sunita

Ramam

Designation Adjunct facukty H.R

Org. / Inst. SIIB

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature and date:

Other members

SNo Name Institution Signature

1 Dr. Asha Nagendra SIMS

2 Dr. Shubhasheeesh Bhattacharya SIIB

3 Dr. Deepa Tanksale SCMS Pune

4 Dr. Ajith Kumar V.V SIBM - Bangalore

5 Prof. Lavina Sharma SIBM- Pune

96

6 Prof. Priya Gupta SCMHRD- Pune

7 Prof. Anju Chawla SCMS – Noida

8 Prof Netra Motadu SCMS, Pune

97



Course : FP11

Course Name:Commercial Banking

Course Code: T2011


Level : 5

Learning Objective(s): The student will be able to:

1. Analyse the products offered and the operations of a bank.

2. Evaluate the legal framework associated with banking operations.

Pedagogy: 32. Interactive classroom session 33. Exercises and Case studies

Pre-learning: Basic aspects of Economics, Accountancy and Commercial Law

98

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Theory of Financial intermediation

2

2 Commercial bank: Growth and Organization

2

3 Indian perspective : RBI, Nationalization, Evolution

2

4 Credit Process

4

5 Treasury Operations

2

6 Bank financial statement analysis

4

7 Asset liability management

6

8 CAR

4

9 BASEL norms

4

Course Outline

Books Recommended 1. Fundamentals of Modern Banking, N C Majumdar, NCBA, Kolkata. 2. Commercial Banking Operations, IIBF, Macmillan Publications, NewDelhi 3. Banking Products and Services, IIBF, Oct 2010, Macmillan India Ltd. 4. Legal and Regulatory Aspects of Banking, IIBF, Jan 2008, Macmillan India Ltd.

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Periodic internal written test/quize Assignments


S.No. Name of the course Institute where it was offered 1 Commercial Banking SIBM Banglore

2 BANKING I SCMHRD Pune

3 Banking II SCMHRD Pune

Name of Member

Mr. Shridhar Potdar

Kunal Kunal Khairnar

Ms. Padmini Sundaram

Designation Adjunct faculty Assistant


Adjunct Faculty

Org. / Inst. SSBM, Pune SCMHRD SIBM, Pune SIIB, Pune

99

Signature


Signature:

Date:17 August 2013

100


Human Resources Management Specialization

Course Name: Compensation and Reward Management HR P 18

Course Code: T2296

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4 and 5


1. To describe various kinds of compensation and incentive programs (individual as well as

group) and the situations in which such programs would be effective.

2. To identify and describe the types of government and union influences on compensation

and benefit practices and management techniques for dealing with these influences

3. To describe various kinds of compensation and incentive programs and the situations in

which such programs would be effective

4. To perform a job analysis, write job descriptions, evaluate the value of specific jobs

within an organizational structure

5. To articulate a compensation strategy in line with overall organization strategy.

Pedagogy:

34. Lectures

35. Case Study

36. Presentations

37. Role Play

Pre-learning:

Human Resource Management, Performance Management System

101

Course Outline:

102

SNo. Topic Hours

1 Compensation – Introduction, Forms of Pay, Pay Model Compensation 2

2 Definition &, Steps in developing a total compensation strategy, strategic

and tactical compensation issues 2

3 Internal Alignment – Determining Structure 2

4 Job Analysis, Job Based Approach in Compensation 2

4 External Parity – Benchmarking 2

5

External Competitiveness – Determining Pay level, External

Competitiveness – Major Factors of External Competitiveness,

Organizational Factors. Salary Survey – How to design the survey, interpretation of survey results.

4

6 Person Based Structures – Skill Plans, Skill Analysis. 2

7 Designing Pay levels, Mix and Pay Structure 4

8 Employee Contribution determining Individual Pay/ Pay for performance

Plan, Performance Appraisal & Compensation Management 2

9 Employee Benefits, The Benefit Determination process 4

10 Executive Compensation India, International Compensation Management

Expat and Onshore 2

11 Basics on Salary Income Tax 2

Total 30

Books Recommended

1. Compensation – Milkovich, Newman, Venkata Ratnam – McGraw Hill

2. Compensation Management in a Knowledge-Based World - Henderson, Pearson

3. Reward Management - Armstrong, Murlis, Hay Group Kogan Page

4. People, Performance & Pay - Flannery, Hofrichter, Platten – Free Press


1. Test

2. Case Presentations

3. Assignments



1 Compensation and Benefits Management SIBM Pune

2 Compensation And Rewards Management SIBM Banglore

3 Compensation (Rewards And Benefits) SCMHRD

4 Compensation And Rewards Management SIIB

5 Compensation Management SCMS Pune

6 Compensation Management SCMS Noida

103

Name of

Member

Priya D Gupta Lavina

Sharma

Designation Associate Prof. Assistant

Prof.

Org. / Inst. SCMHRD SIBM

Signature

Name of the Expert: Dr. Asha Nagendra

Signature:

Date:

Other members










104


Human Resource Management Specialization

Course Name: Conflict and Negotiation HR P16

Course Code: T2294

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 5


26. To understand the concept of Conflict and evaluate both the positive and negative aspects

of conflict.

27. To apply, analyze and evaluate the practical skills required to resolve conflicts through

negotiations

Pedagogy:

38. Case studies

39. Case-lets based role plays

40. Interactive lectures

Pre-learning: Organization Behavior

105

Sl.No. Topic Hours

1

Nature of Conflict

• Defining Conflict

• Threshold of Conflict

• Conflict and Competition

• Power and conflict.

• Negative and Positive aspects of conflict.

• Impact of unattended conflict.

6

2

Intrapersonal Conflict in organizational context

• Types of Intrapersonal Conflict

• Role Conflict

• Role Ambiguity

3

3

Interpersonal Conflict

• Personality and its impact on conflict- handling

• Styles of Handling Interpersonal Conflict

• The Prisoner’s Dilemma

• Consequences of Interpersonal Conflict

• Managing Interpersonal Conflict

• Strategies for dealing with conflict resolution in electronic

communication

4

4

Intragroup Conflict

• Types of Groups

• Effects of Intragroup Conflict

• Managing Intragroup Conflicts

• Behavioral styles while handling conflict

• Tailoring one’s behavior to situational requirement using

Transactional analysis

6

5

Intergroup Conflict

• Dynamics of Intergroup Conflict

• Effects of Intergroup Conflict

• Managing Intergroup Conflict

3

6

Negotiation and Problem Solving

• Impact of poor negotiation skills.

• Role of Non- Verbal Communication in Negotiation and

Conflict resolution.

• Integrative vs. Distributive negotiation.

• Getting to Win/Win

5

7 Identifying and neutralizing the dirty tricks in negotiations 3

30

106

Books Recommended:

1. Managing Conflict in Organizations - M. Afzalur Rahim. Third edition Quorum Books

–London

2. Getting to Yes-Roger Fischer and William Ury

3. Conflict Management: A Communications Skill Approach – Engel wood Cliffs –

Prentice Hall

4. Conflict and conflict management in organizations –A framework for analysis

5. Jacob Bercovitch http://www.aspheramedia.com/v2/wp-content/uploads/2011/02/5000214.pdf


Case study based presentations

Team assignments


1 Conflict and negotiation SCMHRD

2 Assertiveness training XLRI

3 Collective Bargaining and

Negotiation skills

XLRI

Name of

Member

Dr.

Rupavataram

Sunita Ramam

Designation Adjunct faculty –H.R

Org. / Inst. SIIB

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

http://www.aspheramedia.com/v2/wp-content/uploads/2011/02/5000214.pdf

107

Other members










108


Marketing Specialization Course Name: Consumer Behaviour

Course Code: T2118 Number of Credits: 2 Course Code – MM P 006 Course Range – 600-699 Level – 5

Learning Objective(s): At the end of the course the student will be able to:

1. Analyze the impact of various factors on consumer decision making process.

2. Examine how consumer behavior affects marketing strategies.

Pedagogy:

• Case Studies.

• Industry / Field Visits.

• Assignments.

• Projects.

• Workshops.

Pre-learning: None

109

Course Outline

S.No Topic Hours

1 Introduction to Consumer Behavior

• Need, scope, overview of consumer decision

process, Consumer buying process

2

2 Consumer Motivation and Personality

• Classification of Motives -Theories of

Motivation

• Theories of Personality-The Concept of Self and

self image

5

3 Perception:

• Process of Perception.

• Consumer Imagery

• Perceived risk.

5

4 Learning:

• Behavioral Learning Theories

• Cognitive Learning Theories

• Brand Loyalty and consumer learning-

• Measures of consumer learning

5

5 Consumer Attitude

• Models of attitude -Formation of Attitudes

• Attitude change strategies

5

6 Influence of culture and society:

• Culture and social class

• Family & household influences,

• Group influence

4

7 Consumer decision making:

• Models of consumer decision making :

Consumer and organizational buying behavior.

• Diffusion of innovation

• Post purchase behavior

4

110

Books Recommended : Reference Books and Reading Material:

1. Schiffman and Kanuk [2010] Consumer Behavior, 10/e – Prentice Hall. 2. Blackwell Roger/Miniard Paul [2002] Consumer Behavior – Thomson 3. Kardes Frank [2005] – consumer Behavior and managerial decision making Pearson Education. 4. Assael Henry [2005] – Consumer Behavior: a Strategic Approach – Biztantra Publication. 5. Hawkins / Best / Coney [2004] Consumer Behavior 9thed Tata Mcgraw Hill Publisher.

6. Consumer Behavior and Marketing Strategy, 7e, Peter and Olson, TMH 7. Consumer Behavior in Action:Real-life Applications for Marketing Managers By

Lantos,Geoffrey.P Chennai/Yes Dee Publishing Pvt Ltd/ 8. Consumer Behavior:Concepts,applications and Cases By Raju,M.S. & Xardel,Dominique

Noida/Vikas Publishing House 9. CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR IN INDIAN PERSPECTIVE. BY NAIR, SUJA. R. 10. CONSUMER BEHAVIOR BY LOUDEN AND BITTA

11. Consumer Behaviour: Building Marketing Strategy, Hawkins, Mothersbaugh And Mookerjee, Mcgraw Hill, 2010

12. Consumer Behaviour, Blackwell, Miniard And Engel, Cengage Learning 2011 13. Consumer Behavior: A Strategic Approach, Henry Assael, Biztantra Publication, 2005


Group Project


S.No Name of the course Institute where it was offered.

1 Consumer Behavior SIIB IB

2 Consumer Behavior SITM

3 Consumer Behavior SCMHRD

4 Consumer Behavior SIOM

5 Consumer Behavior SIBM-P

6 Consumer Behavior SIMS

7 Consumer Behavior SCMS-P

Name of

members

Olive

Nerurkar

Surya

Rashmi

Rawat

Sujata

Joshi

TarunKhusw

a

VaishaliMahaja

n

RichaAror

a

Designatio

n

Associat

e

Professor

Assistan

t

professo

r

Assistan

t

professo

r

Associate

Professor

Associate

Professor

Assistant

professor

111

Org/Inst. SCMS-P SLS

Pune

SITM SIBM-P SCMHRD SCMS-P

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

Benchmarking:

112

`




Course Name: Contemporary Practices in Business

Course Code: T2555

PG

Course Code : GM – P -8


Level: 3


On successful completion of the course students will be able to:

1. Gain an understanding of Evolution of Business Organizations and Practices

2. Know the important aspects related to growth of Key Sectors In Business

3. Be aware of the Socio- Economic Trends in Business

4. Be able to analyze and interpret the business situations

5. Know, understand, and be able to suitably apply best practices in various industry sectors

Pedagogy:

• 40% Teaching Theory Through Interactive Classes, PPT’s, Role Plays,

113

• 60% Teaching through Case Studies (Sector Specific) and Group / Individual

Presentations.

• Emphasis on Self Study and Actual Business Research.

Pre-learning: NIL

114

Course Outline

S.No. Topic Hours

I Socio- Economic Trends

Pre 1991 and Post 1991 through 2008 – Impact of Sub Prime Crisis

on Global Business.

Current Scenario and Suggested Reforms including FDI.

5

II

Evolution of Business Organizations (Business Formats):

Forms of Organizations – Proprietorship, Partnerships, LLPs, Pvt.

Ltd. companies, Public Companies, MNCs, Govt. Corporations,

Public and Private Sector, PPPs.

5

III

Growth of Key sectors and PESTEL analysis ( Avoid Theory )

Identify 10 key sectors and conduct research into their growth

to be followed by PESTEL analysis of the sectors.

To be given as self - study and to be presentation based.

10

IV

Industry Best Practices (Sector Wise – and Functional Specialization wise ) based on Field Work and actual Primary Research

Suggested : presentations to be made before Industry experts

10

TOTAL

30 HRS

Books/Journal/Articles/ Newspapers Recommended

• Business Standard

• Times of India

• Economic Times

• The Economist

115

• Financial Express


• Written Test

• Group/Individual Presentation

• Quiz

• Assignment

• Projects- Individual and Group

Name of

Member

Mrs Mala Sane Dr. Mita

Mehta


Faculty

Associate

Professor

Org. / Inst. SIMS SIMS

Signature

Revisions suggested by :

Prof. Shrirang Altekar Director, Symbiosis Centre for Management Studies, NOIDA.

116


Marketing &


Under-Graduate

Course: FU3

Course Name: Corporate Accounting

Course Code: T2500


Level:3

Learning Objective(s): 28. To understand corporate accounting concepts with respect to the Companies Act, 1956.; 29. To compute profit and arrive at financial statement of companies; 30. To understand the meaning & preparation of final accounts of joint stock companies in the

prescribed firm; 31. To find out net profit/loss prior to incorporation & post incorporation

Pedagogy:

• Case Study

• Group Activity

• Workshops

Pre-learning: Basic knowledge of accounting required.

117

S.No. Topic Hours

1.

Profit prior to incorporation: Preparation of P/L appropriation account before the incorporation of Company.

2

2.

Company accounts

Issue, Forfeiture and reissue of equity shares

Preference shares and debentures – issue and redemption.

10

3

Final Accounts of the companies

Preparation of final accounts as per provisions of Companies Act, 1956

5

4 Liquidation of Company Provisions of Companies Act, 1956 regarding liquidation of a Company

5

118

Liquidator's Final Statement of Affairs

5 Amalgamation and takeovers Accounting treatment of Amalgamation and takeovers. 8

Total 30

Note: Students are expected to read latest journals, periodicals, reports and articles to keep abreast with the recent trends and developments in this subject.

Books Recommended

1. Chakraborty, Advanced Accountancy, Oxford University Press, (1978) 2. Maheshwari, S. N. and Maheshwari S.K., Advanced Accountancy, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.,

Noida (2011) 3. Paul, S. Kr., Advanced Accountancy, Chand and Co., (2008) 4. Sehgal, Ashok, and Sehgal, Deepak, Advanced Accountancy, Taxmann Allied Sevices Pvt. Ltd.,

Edition 4 (2004) 5. Shukla, M.C., Grewal, T.S. and Gupta S.C., Advanced Accounts, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi

(2012) 6. Tulsian, P. C., Accountancy Tata McGraw Hill, (2007)


1. Assignments/ Reports

2. Continuous evaluation tests

3. Projects

4. Presentation/ Viva/ MCQs/ Quiz

Name of

Member

Prof Arti C Vivek

Divekar

Designation Full Time

Faculty

Adjunct

Faculty


Signature

119




Course Name: Corporate Governance and Ethics

Course Code: T2236

(UG/PG): PG


Course Code : GM – P - 1

Level: 5


32. To understand, analyze, and review the larger theoretical and empirical aspects of

corporate governance, and ethics.

33. To equip managers of today’s world with emerging opportunities and challenges in the

domain of governance within corporate context by linking the micro context (corporate

governance) to that of macro context in a state and global context.

Expected Outcomes:

1. At the end of the course students will have a broad perspective on governance and ethics

related aspects within a corporate atmosphere.

Pedagogy:

41. Lecture.

42. Case Study.

43. Projects/field visits.

44. Workshops.

Pre-learning:

NIL

120

S.No. Topic Hours

1.

Corporate Governance

1. Introduction to Governance

a. Governance in General and Governance of an enterprise;

models of corporate governance-western vs. Indian

b. History of Corporate Governance

c. Emergence of Institutions: State, Legal frameworks-

courts, law of conduct, and Regulation of behavior

d. Linking Governance to performance of an enterprise;

accountability, and transparency.

6

2.

Theoretical Approaches:

a. Institutional Economics and Economic Sociology approaches

b. Transactional economics

c. Agency theory

d. Stewardship theory

e. Stakeholder theory

f. Shareholder theory

g. Resource Based Approach

h. Dynamic Capability Approach

6

3.

Practices and Elements of Corporate Governance

a. Selection, compensation, succession, and removal in the

context of organizational life cycle

(a) Board of Directors and independent directors: Past

and present

(b) Chief Executive Officer

(c) Executives

(d) Gender specific issues

b. Governance in differently controlled businesses (promoter

organization, public and private organizations).

4

4.

c. Overarching Institutions:

(a) International Acts (Sarbanes Oxley Act, 2002;

OECD)

(b) Brief History of India and the development of

Institutional system in history and present: judiciary,

and company law and company act. Securities Act,

SEBI regulation Mechanism, Company Bill and

Company law amendments.

(c) Corporate governance and socio-cultural

environment: an overview

(d) Role and responsibilities of financial institutions

(Creditors and credit rating agencies).

(e) Institutional Investor: scenario in India and world

(f) Corporate communication (Company reporting,

statutory disclosures); and Company Audit. (g) Corporate governance ratings

6

121

(h) Good and Bad Corporate Governance: Whistle blower

policy, insider’s trade, corporate takeovers (mergers

and acquisitions).

5.

Ethics

a. Theory and practice of ethics

b. Ethical and moral dilemmas.

c. Emergence of Ethics within corporate

governance (utilitarianism vs.

universalism).

d. Institutional framework in ethics; role of

state, corporate associations and Media,

Intellectual property rights, Consumer

protections, and Environmental

protection.

e. Social Justice and Corporate Governance

f. Welfare as a base for ethical practices:

Stakeholder perspective

g. Ethical practices at various functionaries;

marketing, human resources, operations,

and finance.

8

Books Recommended

1. Harvard Business Review on Corporate Governance. (2000), Harvard Business School

Press.

2. Adrian Davies. 1999. A Strategic Approach to Corporate Governance. Gower Publishing

Limited.

3. Anthony Williams. 2007. Corporate Governance: Who will Guard the Guardians?Jaico

Publishing House.

4. Darryl Reed and Sanjoy Mukherjee. 2004. Corporate Governance, economic Reforms,

and Development: The Indian Experience. Oxford University Press

5. N Gopalsamy. 1998. Corporate Governance: The New paradigm. Wheeler Publication.

6. Ram Charan. 2005. Boards that Deliver: Advancing Corporate Governance from

Compliance to Competitive Advantage”. Jossey-Bass.

7. SM Dewan, 2006. Corporate Governance in Public Sector Enterprises. Pearson

Longman.

8. Vasudha Joshi. 2004. Corporate Governance: The Indian Scenario. Foundation Books

Pvt. Ltd.

9. Larcker, D. &Tayan, B. Corporate Governance Matters. Upper Saddle River, NJ:

Pearson, 2011.

10. Baker, H.K. & Anderson, R., eds. Corporate Governance: A Synthesis of Theory,

Research, and Practice. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley & Sons, 2010.

11. Clarke, T. & Branson, D. The SAGE Handbook of Corporate Governance. Thousand

Oaks, CA: Sage, 2012.

12. Leblanc, Richard &Gillies, James, Inside the Boardroom: How Boards Really Work and

the Coming Revolution in Corporate Governance. Toronto: Wiley, 2005.

122

13. Monks, R.A.G. &Minow, N. Corporate Governance, 5th ed. Boston: Wiley & Sons,

2011.

14. Vinnicombe, A., et al., eds. Women on Corporate Boards of Directors: International

Research and Practice. Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar, 2008.

Additional Core Readings:

1. Oliver Williamson. 1985. The Economic Institutions of Capitalism. New York: Free

Press.

2. Jan Sammeck. 2012. A New Institutional Economics Perspective on Industry Self-

Regulation. Springer Publication.

3. T. N. Satheesh Kumar, 2010. Corporate Governance. Oxford University Press.

4. JayatiSarkar, SubrataSarkar. 2012. Corporate Governance In India. SAGE Publications

India Pvt Ltd

5. Claude Ménard, Mary M. Shirley. 2008. Handbook of New Institutional Economics.

Springer Publication.

6. David Levi-Faur. 2012. The Oxford Handbook of Governance. Oxford university press.

7. ArisSoloman Jill Soloman. 2010. Corporate Governance And Accountability. Wiley

India Pvt. Ltd

8. Ghosh B.N. 2011. Business ethics & corporate governance. McGraw-Hill.

9. Kate A. Nelson, Linda K. Trevino. 2004. Corporate Social Responsibility and

Managerial Ethics. John Wiley & Sons.

10. Andrew Crane, Dirk Matten. 2010. Business Ethics: Managing Corporate Citizenship and

Sustainability in the Age of Globalization. Oxford University Press, USA

11. S. RaoVallabhaneni. 2008. Corporate Management, Governance, and Ethics Best

Practices. John Wiley & Son.

12. Robert A. G. Monks, Nell Minow. 2011. Corporate Governance. Wiley publishers.

13. Jill Solomon. 2010. Corporate Governance and Accountability. Wiley publishers.

14. WimDubbink, Luc van Liedekerke, Henk van Luijk. 2011. European Business Ethics

Casebook: The Morality of Corporate Decision Making. Springer Publisher.

15. Norman E. Bowie, Meg Schnieder. 2011. Business Ethics For Dummies. Wiley publisher.

16. Antonio Tencati, Francesco Perrini. 2011. Business Ethics and Corporate Sustainability.

Edward Elgar Publishing ltd.

17. Alexander Brink. 2011. Corporate Governance and Business Ethics. Springer Publisher.

18. Marianne M. Jennings. 2012. Business Ethics: Case Studies and Selected Readings.

CENGAGE Learning publication.

19. SAGE Publications. 2012. SAGE Brief Guide to Business Ethics. Sage Publication.

Articles:

1. Aguilera, R.V. “Corporate governance and director accountability: An institutional

comparative perspective.” British Journal of Management, 16(s1), 2005: S39-S53.

2. Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, “Principles for Enhancing Corporate

Governance.” Bank for International Settlements Communications, October 2010.

123

3. Bonn, I., & Pettigrew, A. “Towards a dynamic theory of boards: An organisational life

cycle approach.” Journal of Management and Organization, 15(1), 2009: 2.

4. Carter, D. A., D’Souza, F., Simkins, Betty J. and Simpson, W. Gary, “The Gender and

Ethnic Diversity of US Boards and Board Committees and Firm Financial Performance.”

Corporate Governance: An International Review, 18(5), 2010, 396-441.

5. Dalton, D.R., & Dalton, C.M. In press. “Board of directors: A collision of theories and

collapsing applications,” in R. Fredrick and J. R. Boatright, eds., A Companion to

business ethics. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.

6. Erakovic, L. & Overall, J. “Opening the ‘black box’: Challenging traditional governance

theorems.” Journal of Management and Organization, 16(2), 2010: 250.

List of Journals focused more in Governance

1. Decision Sciences. Decision Science Institute, Atlanta, USA.

2. Family Business Review. Sage Publication.

3. Industrial and Corporate Change. Oxford Journals.

4. International Journal of Corporate Governance. InderScience Publishers.

5. International journal of Disclosure and Governance. Palgrave Macmillan publication.

6. Journal of Business Ethics. Springer publication.

7. Journal of Corporate Governance: An International Review. Wiley publications.

8. Journal of Management & Governance. Springer Publication.

Journal in Indian Context

Indian Journal of Corporate Governance.Published by Institute of public Enterprise, Hyderabad.

Video

1. Barbarian at the gate

2. The corporation

3. Corporate Governance Matters – Ira Millstein

4. Corporate Failures


1. Projects

2. Research paper review and presentation

Benchmark

124

1. Harvard University

http://archive.summer.harvard.edu/courses/syllabi/32881/mgmt_s_5018_2012.pdf

2. Georgia Tech University

http://ile.gatech.edu/files/Courses/Mgt4803_Corporate_Governance_spring2013.pdf

3. CIMA

http://www.cimaglobal.com/Documents/Student%20docs/cert-level/C05_guide_v3.pdf

4. LSE

http://www.lse.ac.uk/study/summerSchools/summerSchool/courseoutlines/law/LL135-

2013.docx



BUSINESS ETHICS &

CORPORATE

GOVERANCE

SIBM, P

Business Ethics and


SCMS,N

Business Ethics and


SIBM,B

Governance, Ethics and

CSR

SCMHRD

Corporate Governance SIBM,B

Business Ethics &

Responsible Businesses

SIBM,B

Business ethics SIMS Corporate governance SIMS

Corporate governance and

business Ethics

SIHS

Name of

Member

Venkatesha

Murthy

ArdhenduShekhar

Singh

ShrirangAltekar


Professor

Assistant

Professor

Director

Org. / Inst. SCMHRD SSBM SCMS,N

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

http://archive.summer.harvard.edu/courses/syllabi/32881/mgmt_s_5018_2012.pdf

http://ile.gatech.edu/files/Courses/Mgt4803_Corporate_Governance_spring2013.pdf

http://www.cimaglobal.com/Documents/Student%20docs/cert-level/C05_guide_v3.pdf

http://www.lse.ac.uk/study/summerSchools/summerSchool/courseoutlines/law/LL135-2013.docx

http://www.lse.ac.uk/study/summerSchools/summerSchool/courseoutlines/law/LL135-2013.docx

125


Marketing &


Post Graduate

Corporate Internship

Guidelines of CPS

2015

• Part of curriculum

• Carry 200 marks/ 4 credits

• PPO/PPI

• Industry Institute Interface

• Future Projects

• Joining Report (not after 30th Apr)

• Reporting to faculty guide (once in 15 days)

• Company Feedback form (15th July)

• POST COMPLETION

• Image building

• Learning practical aspects of functional areas

• Part of curriculum

• Carry 200 marks/ 4 credits

• PPO/PPI

• Industry Institute Interface

• Future Projects

• Image building

• Learning practical aspects of functional areas

• CPS EXECUTION

126


Marketing &


Post Graduate

Course : FP45

Course Name: Corporate Valuation (PG 2nd Year)

Course Code: T2045


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s) The student will be able to:

a. To appraise different methods used for valuation b. Application of valuation in different business situations and settings

Pedagogy: 1. Classroom sessions 2. Lectures 3. Cases 4. Newspaper clippings, articles, research papers 5. Excel Modeling

Pre-learning: Basic concepts of finance, a course on financial management.

Course Outline

127

Session Topic Hours 1 Introduction to Valuation 2

2 DCF Valuation

a. Estimating discount rates – Levered and Unlevered Beta, Ke, Kd,

WACC

4

3 b. Measuring and forecasting cash flows 4

4 c. Equity Discounted Cash flow Models

FCFE and Dividend discount models

3

5 d. Firm valuation models

Cost of Capital approach, Adjusted Present Value Approach, Excess return models

4

6 Relative Valuation a. Equity multiples and value multiples

3

7 Contingent Claim Valuation 2

8 Valuation of an IPO 2

9 Valuation of private businesses, small firms, new businesses etc. 2

10 Valuation of Merger 2

11 Valuation of LBOs 1

12 Real Options & Brand Valuation 1 30

Books Recommended

• Aswath Damodaran , Damodaran on Valuation, John Wiley and Sons

• Tim Koller, Marc Goedhart, David Wessels, Valuation, Wiley Finance, McKinsey & Company Inc


Quiz Class Test Case Analysis Assignments Problem sets Project Exam Parallel/Similar courses the existing curriculum:

S.No. Name of the course Institute where it was offered Corporate Valuation SIIB Equity Valuation & Analysis

Tools SIBM-P

128

Name of Member

Dr Madhvi Sethi


Org. / Inst. SIBM-B

Signature

Name of the Expert: V.Ravi Kumar Signature:

129


Marketing Specialization Course Name: CRM (Customer Relationship Management)



• Apply the concepts of customer relationship management in a dynamic environment.

• Develop a CRM strategy for developing profitable and rewarding relations with the

customers

Pedagogy:

• Case Studies.


• Assignments.

• Projects.

• Workshops.

Pre-learning: None.

130

Course Outline

S.No Topic Hours

1 Introduction to CRM, Building relationships,

Customer Loyalty and Satisfaction

2

2 Strategy And Organization Of CRM - Marketing-

Driven CRM, Building blocks of a Marketing-Driven

CRM strategy, Conceptualizing CRM Implementation,

CRM - tactics vs. Strategy, How can CRM create

strategic competitive advantage?

6

3 CRM Marketing Aspects and operational aspects

• Implementation of CRM in a B-to-B context,

managing the implications with respect to

customer segmentation, sales-force, marketing,

IT, and back office.

• What is customer loyalty?, When is

relationship marketing applicable?, How is

relationship marketing implemented in B-to-C

organizations?, When and how do loyalty

programs work?

6

4 Analytical CRM -

• Introduction to some basic analytic concepts in

the context of CRM and customer base

analysis.

• Learn how simple analytic techniques can be

used to address various CRM challenges.

• Look and feel of Analytical module

• Customizing Analytical module for generating

marketing driven reports

• Learn how simple analytic techniques can be

used to address various CRM challenges.

Demonstrate how to make predictions of future

customer profitability.

6

5 CRM Systems, implementation and Technical aspects

of CRM – CRM enterprise application

• CRM Architecture

• CRM Master Data

• CRM Marketing

10

131

• CRM Internet

• CRM Interaction Centre

Books Recommended:

1. CRM: Speed of Light Greenberg TMH

2. CRM: A strategic Perspective G Shainesh and Jagdish N Seth McMillan

3. CRM Concepts and Technologies Francis Buttle TMH Second edition

4. CRM Handbook Jill Dyche Pearson

5. CRM – The New face of Marketing: ICFAI

6. The Ultimate CRM handbook-John Freeland TMGH 2003

7. Customer Relationship Management: Concepts & Application by Alok Kumar,

ChhabiSinha, Rakesh Sharma

8. Customer Relationship Management,EdPeelen, May 2005, Pearson Education

9. Handbook of Relationship marketing, JagdishSheth, AtulParvatiar.

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Group Project Presentation



1 CRM SCMHRD

2 CRM SIOM

3 CRM SIBM-B- Elective

4 CRM SIBM B-4thSem

5 CRM SIBM-P

6 CRM SIMS

7 Digital Marketing and CRM SIBM-P

Name of

members

Olive

Nerulkar

Surya

Rashmi

Rawat

Sujata

Joshi

Tarun

Khuswa

Vaishali

Mahajan

Richa

Arora

Designatio

n

Associate

Professor

Assistant

professor

Assistant

professor

Associate

Professor

Associate

Professor

Assistant

professor

Org/Inst. SCMS-P SLS Pune SITM SIBM-P SCMHRD SCMS-P

Signature

Name of the Expert: Signature:Date:Benchmarking:

132

Sub Committee for Curriculum Development IT Systems for Management Specialization


Course Name: Data Driven Decision Making

Course Code : T3154

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 5 Learning Objective(s):

Today’s managers irrespective of their domain need to understand the data and anlalyse it to support the decision making. The current technological scenario it is not just a technical team who would be involved in understanding the data, data storage requirements and it’s analysis for decision making. The prospective business mangers should be able to understand the nature of the business data, and apply the tools & techniques to extract information or knowledge from the data using the software tools used in day today business.

Pedagogy: Nature of data & storage requirement understanding, decision making enabled with discussion, application using Spreadsheets & RDBMS tool to store & analyze business data with case studies & hands on examples in and outside the classroom

Pre-learning: Fundamental understanding of significance of the data in the business scenario

133

Course Outline

Sr No Topics No of Hrs

1 Introduction : Course contents Pre Induction Assignment discussion, group formation and submission details Introduction to concept of data and significance of data in decision making Case 1 discussion and hands on exercise

2

2 Pre Induction Assignment Presentation (Group wise) 2

3

Introduction to spreadsheets- MS Excel 2010 Managing data with Spreadsheets : Data Interpretation by excel Data organization for analysis in excel , advantages and limitations Data formatting tools Data Validation , Data sorting & customization Data representation and interpretation using charts Referencing techniques Case 2 discussion and hands on exercise

2

4

Decision making aided by Conditional Formatting Use of Functions for data computing Statistical, Mathematical , Text, Logical Functions etc Case 3 discussion and hands on exercise

2

5,6

Data analysis using subtotal Data analysis using filters- Auto filters Limitations & Advantages Advanced filters Empty Header criteria Database functions Advantages & Limitations Case 4 discussion and hands on exercise

4

7,8

What – if Analysis tools Goal seek, Data Tables and scenarios Case 5 discussion and hands on exercise Integrated Project for a business house

4

9 Introduction to databases – What , Why , When and How Integrated Assignment (Expected Deliverables)

4

134

10-15 Data storage and handling with RDBMS RDBMS advantages and limitations RDBMS application in business data Mapping a business organization data requirements using ERD Case studies and discussion Individual case assignment Group Case assignment and discussion MS Access as a tool for RDBMS Discussion , demonstration of Table Design, Constraints, form design using wizards Concept of Relationships in data storing Need for Primary Key, Foreign Key, validations Data import/ export and analysis Case presentation using ERD and MS Access

10

30

Books Recommended

• Philip Alan Streifer, “Tools and Techniques for Effective Data-driven Decision Making”,

2004 by Philip Alam straeifer, ISBN 1-57886-723-3. • Tracey Smith, “Data Driven Decision Making for Small Businesses: Unleashing the Power of

Information to drive business growth”, 2012 Tracey Smith, ISBN: 1470187450.

Reference Reading

1. Business Data Analysis Using Excel – David Whighham Oxford University Press- Indian Edition 2. Modern Database Management – Tenth Edition – Jeffrey A Hoffer, V. Ramesh, Heikki Topi – Pearson

Publications 3. MS Excel Tutorials and Blogs on www 4. Handouts, Cases and Presentations designed by the faculty.


Presentation Hands on – Class assignments and homework assignments Projects/practical application using tool Case study Term / Semester end examination



Name of Member

Viraja P Bhat

Designation IT-HOD, Asst. Professor

135

Org. / Inst. SIIB

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

136



Post Graduate

Course: FP13

Course Name: Derivative Markets

Course Code: T2013

Number of Credits: 2 Credits

Level:4

Learning Objective(s) Students will be able to:

• Compare and contrast different derivative instruments.

• Analyze the strategies for profit and risk mgt through derivatives

• Evaluation of different models.

Pedagogy:

45. Simulation techniques for encountering real life situations 46. Problem solving 47. Case Studies 48. Presentations and Computer / Industry and Capital Market data based Assignments

Pre-learning:

Economics Quantitative Techniques Financial Management Financial Markets & Services

137

Course Outline

138

Hrs

1 Introduction to Derivatives 1

2 Fundamentals of Futures & Forwards, Future contracts, Clearing House, Daily Settlement & Margins

2

3 Orders & Exchanges 2

4 Equity Shares & Stock Market Indices 2

5 Valuation of Forwards & Futures 2

6 Hedging & Speculation 2

7 Foreign Exchange Forwards & Futures 2

8 Stock & Stock Index Futures 2

9 Fundamentals of Options, 1

10 Arbitrage Restrictions 2

11 Option Strategies & Profit Diagrams 2

12 Valuation of Options 1

13 Options on Stock Indices, Foreign Currencies; Futures Contracts & Volatility Indices

1

14 Exotic Options, European Digital Option, Pay later Option, Compound Option 1

15 Fundamentals of Currency Swaps 1

16 Credit Derivatives 2

17

The Binomial Model, Lognormal Distribution, Stochastic differential equation representation, Pricing Model, Single period example, Multi period example

2

18 The Black- Scholes Model, Interest rates, Ito’s lemma 2

Total 30

Books Recommended 1. John.C.Hull , (2005) “Options, Futures and other Derivatives”, Prentice Hall, New York 2. Satyajit Das (2011), “Swaps and Financial Derivatives: Products, Pricing, Applications

and Risk Management (4 Volume Set), Wiley Publications 3. Raiyani, Jagadish R (2011), “Financial Derivatives in India” , New Century

Publications 4. Dhanesh Kumar Khatri (2011), “Derivatives and Risk Management” Macmillan

Publishers India 5. Philip James Hunt, (1998), “Financial Derivatives in Theory & Practice”,

Pennsylvania, 6. S.L.Gupta, Financial Derivatives, Prentice Hall

http://www.isbs.com/search.asp?manufacturer_number=Raiyani%2C%2BJagadish%2BR%2E

139

7. McDonald, “Derivatives Markets”, Pearson publications 8. Robert Kolb, “Futures, Options and Swaps” Blackwell Publications

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Exams Online Exams


Name of Member

Prof. Ashwini Purandare

Prof. Jeevan Nagarkar


Teaching Associate

Org. / Inst. SIMC SIIB

Signature


Signature:

Date:17 August 2013

140

Sub Committee for Curriculum Development IT Business Management (IT Management)


Course Name : Design Thinking

(UG/PG) : PG

Number of Credits : 1

Level : 4

Learning Objective(s) :

This course will introduce the participants to the concept and practice of design thinking. This course will bring out the understanding on the expansion of design concept beyond visual aesthetics, to systems, services, business and organizations.

Pedagogy :

The pedagogy will be predominantly participant-centric to bring out iterative problem solving process of discovery, ideation and experimentation. In other words, the students will be engaged in a series of skill development projects though out the duration of the course. The course will culminate in a prototype deliverable which will be the testimony to the understanding on the concept and its application. Students will explore to unearth in themselves skills of ethnographers, visual thinkers, strategists, and storytellers. This course pedagogy will be aligned to the SAP Design Thinking Workshops, Stanford Institute of Design and the Gordon-MIT Engineering Leadership Program.

141

Syllabus, Teach Plan & Session Plan Topic Details of the topic to be covered Teaching Tools (Cases/

Audio-Visual, Software etc.)

No. of hours (1.5

hrs/session)

Introduction Design Thinking – Origins, concept and development

Videos / Presentation 1

Process Design Thinking process overview – Empathize, Define, Ideate, Prototype and Test

Videos / Presentation 2

Project Project building by student team by the application of design thinking to a chosen areas of business/social/environmental domains

Group activities 7

Recommended Readings:

• Change by Design by Tim Brown

• Design for the Real World by Victor Papanek

• This is Service Design Thinking by Marc Stickdorn and Jakob Schneider

• Applied Imagination: Principles and Procedures of Creative ProblemSolving by Alex F. Osborn

• The Back of the Napkin by Dan Roam

• The Designful Company by Marty Neumeier

• Unstuck: A Tool for Yourself, Your Team, and Your World by Keith Yamashita and Sandra Spataro

• Wicked Problems in Design Thinking by Richard Buchanan

• Designing for Service: Creating an Experience Advantage by Hugh Dubberly and Shelley Evenson

Recommended Links:

http://dschool.stanford.edu/dgift/ http://dschool.stanford.edu/redesigningtheater/the-design-thinking-process/ http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/engineering-systems-division/esd-051j-engineering-innovation-and- design-fall-2012/this-course-at-mit/teaching-design-thinking/

Additional references:

Design Thinking Curriculum from SAP University Alliances

http://dschool.stanford.edu/dgift/

http://dschool.stanford.edu/redesigningtheater/the-design-thinking-process/

http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/engineering-systems-division/esd-051j-engineering-innovation-and-design-fall-2012/this-course-at-mit/teaching-design-thinking/

http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/engineering-systems-division/esd-051j-engineering-innovation-and-design-fall-2012/this-course-at-mit/teaching-design-thinking/

142


Marketing Specialization Course Name: Digital Marketing

Course Code: T2139 Number of Credits: 2 Course Code – MM P 027 Course Range –700-899 Level – 5 Learning Objective(s): After the completion of this course the students shall be able to:

1. Assess and analyse Internet marketing and further utilize it for marketing communication

options.

2. Compare and contrast different tools and techniques available for Digital marketing and

suggest in final marketing strategy .

3. Evaluate and prepare digital marketing strategies using latest trends.

Pedagogy:

• Case Studies.


• Assignments.

• Projects.

• Workshops.

Pre-learning: None Course Outline

S.No Topic Hours

1 An Introduction Of Marketing On The Internet:

Environment Of Web-Based Marketing, Fundamentals

Of Internet: Understanding Of Its Operations,

Management, The Web-Based System And The

Wireless System, Concept Of Users, Linking

Marketing To The Web.

Web-Based Marketing Mix/Internet Marketing Mix:

Product, Price, Place And Promotion.

4

2 Digital Marketing Communication Tools

Interactive online advertising

4

143

• Using online ads to drive site traffic and build

brands

• Overview of the ad formats available and how

best to use them creatively

• Buying online media for interactive advertising

and the different buying models

• To understand and appraise online media

schedules

3 Search engine marketing

• Search engine marketing and its importance to

online success.

• Understanding the differences between search

engines, directories and pay per click

advertising

• Key strategies and tactics to maximize search

engine effectiveness

• Introduction to pay per click advertising

• Google Adwords

• Strategies and tactics to maximize search engine

effectiveness

4

4 Mobile marketing

• Overview of the different mobile access

technologies

• Consumer and corporate applications of mobile

marketing

• Buying mobile marketing services and

customer data

• Key factors in designing and managing mobile

marketing campaigns

4

144

• Essential mobile campaign metrics

5 Social Media Marketing

• Use of Facebook as marketing tool

• Facebook Ads

• Use of Linkedin for Business

• Linkedin Ads

• Twitter for promoting business.

4

6 Microsite Marketing

• Microsite marketing

• Microsite as a e-campaigning essential

• Microsite as a Brand positioning tool

Blogging

• Exploring blogging as an marketing tool

• Blogging as a effective digital marketing

element

• Blogging as a interactive internet marketing

tool

Email and viral marketing

• Permission marketing

• Acquiring names and email lists

• Testing email for continuous improvement

• E-newsletters and other email formats

• Steps to create a successful viral campaign

• Broadcast and delivery considerations

4

145

7 Creating the ideal online campaign plan

• Best practice approaches to online campaign

planning

• Determine the appropriate level of spend, mix

and sequence of e-marketing tools

• Campaign, offer and messaging strategy

• Campaign timing and integration issues

• Supplier selection for the different digital

marketing campaign element

4

8 Ethics of Internet Marketing

• Dos and Don’ts in internet marketing

• Some ethical practices used globally

2

Books Recommended 1. Internet Marketing: Foundations and Applications; Siegel, Carolyn; 2nd edition;

Houghton Mifflin; 2006; ISBN 0-618-51999-8;

2. Ward Hanson: Principles of Internet Marketing, 1st edition and 2nd edition, Thomson

3. E-Marketing: 2nd edition, Judy Strauss, Raymond Frost

4. The Internet Marketing Plan: A Practical Handbook for Creating, Implementing and

Assessing Your Online Presence , Kim M. Bayne Suggested Evaluation Methods:

• Hands on assignments.


S.No Name of the course Institute where it was

offered.

1 Digital Marketing SCMHRD

2 Digital Marketing SIBM-B

3 Internet marketing SIMS

Name of

members

Olive

Nerurkar

Surya

Rashmi

Rawat

Sujata

Joshi

Tarun

Khuswa

Vaishali

Mahajan

Richa

Arora

Designation Associate

Professor

Assistant

professor

Assistant

professor

Associate

Professor

Associate

Professor

Assistant

professor Org/Inst. SCMS-P SLS PUne SITM SIBM-P SCMHRD SCMS-P

Signature

146



Course : FP37

Course Name: Direct Taxation

Course Code: T2037

Number of Credits:2

Level : 4

Learning Objective(s): the student will be able to:

1. Tabulate the tax liability under various heads.

2. Explain and apply the concepts in tax planning and Mgt.

Pedagogy:

49. Lectures and PPTs 50. Use of technology in Tax reporting and planning

Pre-learning: Basic knowledge of financial accounting is advisable.

147

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Basic Concepts: Tax systems in India, Assessment Year, Previous Year, Person and Assessee, Gross Total Income and Total Income, Residential Status , Scheme of exemptions and deductions, Overview, and basic definitions under the Income Tax act, 1961. Residential status and its effect on total income.

4

2 Income Exempt from Tax: Various incomes exempt from tax and its effect on total income

2

3

Computation of Income under different Heads of Income: Overview of computation, computation and tax planning of salary income, house property, Business income: important deductions, disallowances and exemptions , Capital gains, Capital gains , Income from Other Sources.

10

4 Clubbing of Income, Deductions, Set off and Carry forward of losses: Provision of clubbing of income and various deductions under Income Tax Act, Set Off and Carry forward of losses

4

5

Computation of total income and Tax liability CBDT, CBEC collection accounts – Advance tax, Self-Assessment tax, TDS, OLTAS (Online Tax Accounting System)

2

6

Corporate tax planning & Management: Ownership structure and impact due to taxation : Tax Planning regarding Dividends Policy and share transfers , relating to Amalgamation and Merger of Companies ,in respect of specific managerial decision like Make Or Buy,Own Or Lease, close Or Continue, Managerial Remuneration, Foreign Collaborations and Joint Ventures , implications of Avoidance of Double Taxation Agreements.

7

7 Recent Changes in Direct Tax Laws. 1

30

Course Outline

Books Recommended 1. Systematic Approach to Income Tax. Ahuja, G K & Gupta, Ravi, Allahabad, Bharat Law House,

1999. 2. Law of Income TaxIyengar, A C. Sampat. ALLAHABAD, Bharat Law House.1981. 3. Income Tax.Kanga, J B and Palkhivala, N A, Bombay, Vol.1-3, N.M. Tripathi. 4. Corporate Taxation: A Handbook. 2nd ed., Ranina, H P. ,New Delhi, Oriental Law House,

1985. 5. Strategic Corporate Tax Planning -John E Kazayam, Charles W Swensoor,Joseph W Neff. 6. Corporate Tax Planning.Kausal Kumar Agarwal.

Suggested Evaluation Methods: 1. Class test 2. Assignment based on real world situation

148


1

2

3

Name of Member

Mr. Prasanna Kulkarni

Mr. Abhijit Chirputkar


Assistant Professor

Org. / Inst. SITM SITM

Signature


Signature:

Date:17 August 2013

149


Course Name: Dissertation

(UG/PG): UG


Level: 3


Students will form a group and will select a topic of research for study as a part of dissertation.

Topic selected should be related to their area of specialization and not covered in the

curriculum. The group of students will Elaborate, extract, and evaluate the methods/tools/

techniques used in the specialized topic. At the end of the semester, they are expected to

present their findings/ leaning outcomes of their work.

Pedagogy: Group Mentoring

Pre-learning: Basic knowledge of IT

Course Outline:

Sr. No. Topics No. of

Hrs

1 Introduction

Provides the background and setting needed to put the problem

in proper context and justifies the need for the study.

5

2 Review of Literature

• Presents the results of previous research related to your study topic, organized by the key variables in your study.

• A conceptual model showing the relationships among

variables related to your research problem can also be

included.

10

150

• For survey research or other quantitative study, indicates the theory upon which the study is based.

• Qualitative studies usually build theory rather than

apply or test theory. Provide the rationale for

hypotheses (if stated).

3 Procedures or Methodology (development

methodology) • Describes in detail the step-by-step procedures used in

collecting and analyzing data.

• Iinclude research design, subject selection,

instrumentation, data collection, data analysis, chapter

summary and others. • Talk with your Mentor about adjustments in this

chapter if you are undertaking a qualitative study.

8

4 Findings/ development of software 4

5 Summary and Conclusion

Briefly summarizes intent, procedures, and findings of study.

2

6 Appendices

Includes copies of all correspondence, instrumentation, and

other written communication used in carrying out the research.

1

Total 30

Books Recommended:


🟃 Presentations

🟃 Viva


S.No .

Name of the course Institute where it was offered

Name of

Member

Shubhashri

Waghmare

Priti Kulkarni

Designation Asst. Professor Asst. Professor

Org. / Inst. SICSR SICSR

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

151



Specialization

Course Name: Emotional Intelligence at Workplace HR P21

Course Code: T2299

(UG/PG): P.G

Number of Credits:_1 (Internal Course)

Level:4


34. To understand the theoretical aspects of Emotional intelligence

35. To understand and handle one’s own emotions and also know others in a better way.

36. To enhance emotional and social competencies required for handling interpersonal

relationships

37. To apply emotional intelligence strategies to workplace challenges.

Pedagogy: Seminar Course

The course could be in the form of a Three Day Workshop (experiential learning) with a

duration of 5 hrs each day which could include

152

51. Lecture

52. Discussion

53. Group Exercises/Role plays

54. Audio Video presentations

Pre-learning: Nil

153

S.No. Topic Hours

1. Nature of Emotional Intelligence-Definition, physiology of 2

2.

Self Awareness -Understanding Emotions: Positive and Negative (in

terms of frequency, intensity and duration)

2

3. Managing Emotions : Anger Management ,Anxiety and Stress

Management 4

4 Understanding Others at Work place : Empathy, Effective

communication 3

5. Handling Interpersonal relationships: Assertiveness training, Effective

Conflict Resolution skills 4

Course Outline

Books Recommended

1. Goleman, D. (1995). Emotional Intelligence. NY: Bantam.

2. Goleman, D. (1998). Working with Emotional Intelligence. NY: Bantam

Selected Readings

1. Borg, S., & Johnston, W. J. (2013). The IPS-EQ Model: Interpersonal Skills and Emotional

Intelligence in a Sales Process. Journal Of Personal Selling & Sales Management, 33(1),

39-52.

2. Brackett, M. A., Rivers, S. E., & Salovey, P. (2011). Emotional Intelligence: Implications

for Personal, Social, Academic, and Workplace Success. Social & Personality Psychology

Compass, 5(1), 88-103. doi:10.1111/j.1751-9004.2010.00334.x

3. Dumbravă, G. (2011). Workplace relations and emotional intelligence. Annals Of The

University Of Petrosani Economics, 11(3), 85-92.

4. Gondal, U., & Husain, T. (2013). A Comparative Study of Intelligence Quotient and

Emotional Intelligence: Effect on Employees' Performance. Asian Journal Of Business

Management, 5(1), 153-162.

5. Lam, L. T., & Kirby, S. L. (2002). Is emotional intelligence an advantage? An exploration

of the impact of emotional intelligence and general intelligence on individual performance.

Journal of Social Psychology. 142, 133-145


Written Assignment, Quiz, Presentations



1. Emotional Intelligence and leadership

for team building

Symbiosis Centre for Management Studies,

Pune

2. Emotional Intelligence in the

Workplace

Rutgers School of Management and labor

Relations

154

3 Emotional Intelligence and Human Relations Laboratory

Vancouver School of Theology

4. Emotional Intelligence: Optimizing

Human Performance at the Work Place

Short term course by IIT Kharagpur

5 Emotional Inteligence Executive Education, IIM Calcutta

Name of

Member

Dr Deepa

Tanksale

Designation Associate

Professor

Org. / Inst. SCMS,Pune

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

Other members










155




Course Name: Employment Related Laws

Course Code: T2574

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 3


To enable the students to understand various aspects of legal provisions related to employment of labour in the

organizations. To help the students to familiarize with legal and regulatory aspects of employing labour.

Pedagogy:

55. Case Study

56. Group Discussion

57. Lecture with PPT

58. Role Play

59. Group Discussion

Pre-learning:

Basic Concepts of Human Resource Management

156

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Relating to Wages & Remuneration

Payment of Wages Act

Minimum Wages Act

Payment of Bonus Act

6

2.

Relating to Social Welfare

The Provident Funds Act

The Employees State Insurance Act

The Workmens’ Compensation Act

The Payment of Gratuity Act

8

3

Relating to Premises

The Factories Act

The Bombay Shops & Establishments Act

4

4

Protection of Women & Children

The Maternity Benefit Act

The Child Labour (Prohibition& Regulation) Act

4

5

Relating to Disputes

The Industrial Disputes Act

The Trade Union Act

MRTU and PULP

6

6 Contract Labour Act 2

Course Outline

Books Recommended

1. Industrial Law – P L Malik 2. Labour Problems and Remedies – H L Kumar

3. Labour Laws Everybody should know – H L Kumar

4. Bare Acts of all the laws in the course


Case Study, Class Test, Quiz, Project

157

Sub Committee for Curriculum Development Course Name: Enterprise Resource Planning Course Code: T2959 (UG/PG): PG Number of Credits: 2 Level: 3

Learning Objective(s): The Core Learning objective of ERP is a commonly used software package for enhancing the operational efficiency of business resources. It is a composition of software modules assisting company owners to achieve their goals at a faster rate. Pedagogy:

• Lectures

• Presentation

• Projects

• Practical

Pre-requisites:

• Suggested reading as per session plan and other resources such as films, documentary, as provided by the course instructor

Course Outline:

Sr. No. Topic Hours

1 Introduction to ERP 2

2 Functional Modules of construction ERP 2

3 Process cycles of ERP 3

4 Implementation of ERP 3

5 Quotation module 4

6 Project module 4

7 Planning Module 4

8 Purchase Module 4

9 Stock Module 4

Total 30

158

Books Recommended

• ERP - Enterprise Resource Planning 3rd Edition (English, Alexis Leon)



External Written Exam: 40Marks Internal Evaluations: (Assignments/Presentation / Mid term exam) 60Marks Total Marks: 100 Marks


Name of Member

Abhay Kumar Pushkar Baldota


Visiting Professor

Org. / Inst. SIMS, Pune

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date: 10th August 2018

159


Entrepreneurship

Specialization


Course Name: Entrepreneurship Course No. ENTRE P 1

Course Code: T2353

(UG/PG): PG (Ideal positioning would be in Sem II and latest in Sem III)


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): After finishing the course ,the students will be able

• To develop an entrepreneurial mindset

• To appraise the entrepreneurial process starting with pre-venture stage

• To relate to practical aspects of starting a company

• To select models for venture creation

Pedagogy: 60. Lectures 61. Case Studies 62. Workshops 63. Entrepreneur Interactions and visits 64. Live projects

160

Pre-learning: Typical Sem I subjects of any MBA programme

161

Course Outline

Unit Contents Hours

I Basic Concepts in Entrepreneurship

1. Concept of Entrepreneurship

2. Concept of Intrapreneurship

3. Entrepreneurial Lifecycle/Process

3

II

Ideation

1. Scouting for Business Ideas- Various sources

2. Generation Business Ideas- Various tools

3. Idea Vs Opportunity

3

III Opportunity Evaluation

1. Importance of Opportunity Evaluation

2. Different parameters for Opportunity Evaluation

3. Mullins 7-Domain Framework

4. Other frameworks for Opportunity Evaluation

6

IV Business Modelling

1. Meaning, Need and Nature of Business Modelling

2. Relationship between Business Model & Business Plan

3. Market Research

4. Sources of Funding

6

V Business Planning

1. Feasibility Study

2. Elements of Business Plan

3. Preparing an elementary Business Plan

6

162

VI Venture Preparation & Resource Mobilisation

1. Building entrepreneurial team

2. Raising Funds (including Angel Funding)

3. Regulatory Issues

3

VII Growth Issues

1. Entrepreneur Vs Manager

2. Professionalising the venture

3. Raising funds for scaling (including Venture Funding)

3

Books Recommended:

c) Entrepreneurship: Robert D Hirsch, Michael P Peters, Dean A Shepherd. McGraw Hill

d) Entrepreneurship: Theory, Process and Practice. Donald F Kurtako

e) New Business Road Test: Prof. John Mullins

f) How to write a great Business Plan: William Sahlman

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Assignments, Projects, Written tests, Case Analysis


Name of Member

Prof. Deepak Roy

Designation Associate Prof.


1. Entrepreneurship SIBM Pune

2. Entrepreneurship & New Venture Initiation

SCMHRD

3. Entrepreneurship SIBM Bangalore 4. SICSR

5. Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship

SIMS

6. Entrepreneurship Development

SIHS

163

Org. / Inst. SCMHRD

Signature

Name of the Expert: Prof. Vinod Shastri

Signature:

Date: 1/08/2013

164


Sustainability Studies and Infrastructure Management

Course Code :SSP5 Course Name: Environment Management Systems

Course Code: T2405 (UG/PG): PG Number of Credits: 2 Level: 3 Learning Objective(s): By the end of the course the student should be able to :

1. Apply the various elements of Environment management systems for business relevance.

2. Choose appropriate terminologies required for EMS based frameworks 3. Choose various methods and standards related to environment assessments 4. Prepare EMS based plans for auditing environmental impacts of business activity to natural resources

Pedagogy:

Class room coaching Sector specific case studies Field visit

Pre-learning:

165

Course Outline:

SR NO. TOPICS NO. OF HOURS

1 Concept of Environmental Management System 2

2 Terminologies 2

3 Design and Implementation of ISO 14001 EMS 2

4 ISO 50000 and ISO 14001 (Series) 3 5 Principle components of EMS & Deming’s Model 2

6 EMS auditing procedure 3

7 Measurement systems in Environmental Management 3

8 Quantification and effects of environmental pollution 2

9 System Reliability and Risk Assessment for Environmental Protection. 2

10 Monitoring Process Parameter values to minimize pollution risk. 2

11 Case study on EMS 3

12 Environmental Audit (EA) cases 4 Total Hours 30

Books Recommended 1. Environmental Management by NK Uberoi, Excel Books (2003) 2. Environmental audit by Mhaskar AK 3. ISO 14000 Environmental Management Standards – Engineering and Financial Aspects by Alan Morris,

John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., England (2004) 4. A Systems Approach to the Environmental Analysis of Pollution Minimization. Edited by Sven Erik

Jorgensen, Lewis Publishers, Washington DC (2000) 5. Environmental Auditing by Central Pollution Control Board 6. Auditing by Central Pollution Control Board 7. Environmental and Quality Systems Integration by WillianCulley, Lewis Publishers (1998) 8. Environmental Management by Vijay Kulkarni and TV Ramachandra, Commonwealth of Learning,

Canada, CES & KERF, India (2009) 9. Environment Audit by AK Shrivastava, APH Publisher, New Delhi (2003). Suggested Evaluation Methods: Written test, Presentations,Reports Parallel/Similar courses the existing curriculum:


Name of Member

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Name of the Expert: Dr.PrakashRao Signature: Date:

166


Retail Management

Course Name: e – Retailing

Course Code: T2333 Course code: RM P 7

UG/PG: PG Credits- 2

Level: 5

Learning Objective(s): The students will be able to

• Critically analyses the importance e- retailing in retailing business • Compare and contrast the benefits of e- retailing over normal retailing • Explore the objectives of e- retailing under given situation for given products • Planning and preparation needed to drive e- retail activity

•

Leaning outcomes The students will be able to

• Apply the operational processes to business problems Retail Store Operation Management

• Develop operational strategy for resource optimization in Retail Store Operations

• Create new approaches based upon emerging and identified market opportunity

• Create, develop and change teams within e- retailing businesses to explore business opportunity

• Developing an e- retailing strategy

Pedagogy:

Cases

Research articles

Projects

Pre-learning:


167

2. Sales and Distribution Management

S.No. Topic Hours

1.

The world of e-retailing Process of E-Retailing Uses and Growth

2

2.

Advantages of E-Retailing

Disadvantages of E-Retailing

E-Retailing in India and other countries

e-retailing in practice

3

3. Integration of e retailing in to an organization 3

4. Information search on the Web 2

5. e-store design: navigability ,interactivity , web atmospherics 3

6.

Online merchandising

Interaction between online merchandising and offline buying and merchandising

Placing online merchandising within the promotional framework ROI models for online merchandising

3

7. e-service

3

8. Branding on the web

2

9. e-Malls

2

10. e-retailing models

3

11. M-Shopping

2

12. Multi-channel successes and the future of e-retailing

2

Total 30

3. Retail Management

Course outline

168

Books Recommended

1. E-Retailing by Charles Dennis , Tino Fenech and Bill Merrilees

2. e- Retailing Principles and Practice By Prof D P Sharma

3. Success with Online Retailing: For Small Businesses by Patrick Tan

Suggested Cases and Research articles:

Articles:

1. A services-marketing perspective on e-retailing: implications for e-retailers and directions

for further research by Mark B. Kolesar, (Mark B. Kolesar is Director of Regulatory Policy at

TELUS and is also at the University of Alberta and the University of Calgary, Calgary, Alberta,

Canada.), R. Wayne Galbraith, (R. Wayne Galbraith is Vice President of Service Development

with Impulses in The Hague, The Netherlands.) Measuring

2. Service Quality in E-Retailing by Joel E. Collier1 and Carol C. Bienstock2 3. Online Retailing Fast Fashion Industry International

Journal of e-Education, e-Business, e-Management and e-Learning, Vol. 1, 3,August 2011

Case studies:-

1. E-Retail: Gold Rush or Fool's Gold?

Kenneth T. Rosen, Amanda L. Howard

Publication Date: Apr 01, 2000 Product number: CMR173-PDF-ENG

2. Blinds To Go: Evaluating the Blindstogo.com Retail E-Commerce Venture

Michael R. Pearce, Ken Mark

Publication Date: Jan 23, 2001 Product number: 901M05-PDF-ENG


Case studies, assignments and projects Parallel/Similar courses the existing curriculum:


1. NIL Nil

Name of

Member

Dr. Londhe Ms. Adya Sharma Ms.Yashomandira

Kharde

Designation Professor Adjunct Faculty Assistant Professor

Org. / Inst.

Symbiosis Institute of

Management Studies


International Business


Operations Management

Signature

http://cb.hbsp.harvard.edu/cb/web/product_detail.seam?E=64450&R=CMR173-PDF-ENG&conversationId=75345

http://cb.hbsp.harvard.edu/cb/web/search_results.seam?conversationId=75345&N=4294956812


http://cb.hbsp.harvard.edu/cb/web/product_detail.seam?E=56194&R=901M05-PDF-ENG&conversationId=75390



169

Name of the Expert: Dr. B R Londhe

Signature:

Date:

Benchmarking Syllabus:

• National – Not Available

• International - Manchester Metropolitan University

http://www2.mmu.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/taught/2013/10165/

- http://www.som.cranfield.ac.uk/som/p18573/Programmes-and-Executive-

Development/MSc/MSc-in-Retail-Management?gclid=CJqKk-

TL3rgCFVB34godo0QAxQ

- http://econsultancy.com

http://www2.mmu.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/taught/2013/10165/

http://www.som.cranfield.ac.uk/som/p18573/Programmes-and-Executive-Development/MSc/MSc-in-Retail-Management?gclid=CJqKk-TL3rgCFVB34godo0QAxQ



http://econsultancy.com/

170



Course Name: Essentials of Marketing Management Number of Credits: 2 Course Code – MM P 002 Course Code: T2114 Course Range – 500-599, Level - 4


1. Apply the fundamental concepts of marketing to the industry. 2. Examine Marketing perspectives essential for all managers today 3. Analyse the marketing strategies of companies. 4. Experiment with out of the box thinking which will help them to develop innovative marketing

strategies.

Pedagogy: 65. Lectures/ Interactive sessions/Visiting Faculty

66. Simulations

67. Case Studies.

68. Presentations

69. Industry / Field Visits.

70. Assignments.

71. Projects.

72. Workshops.

Pre-learning: None.

Course Outline

S.No Topic Hours

1 Understanding Fundamentals of Marketing : 4

171

Definition and evolution of marketing, Scope of marketing: Company orientations; Fundamental marketing concepts, needs, wants, demand, target market, value & satisfaction, relationships & networks, marketing mix, marketing channels, supply chain, competition, PESTEL factors.

2 Customer Value, Satisfaction and Loyalty. Concept of value, Customer value proposition, Total customer satisfaction, Monitoring satisfaction, product and service quality, customer profitability, measuring customer lifetime value, attracting and retaining customers, Loyalty.

3

3 Marketing Process- Steps in marketing process Goal setting Criterion for planning the process Analysis of current situation

1

4 Analyzing Consumer Markets; Cultural, Social, Personal factors; Psychological processes: Motivation, Perception, Learning and Memory; Five Stage Buying Decision Process Model; decision making based on level of involvement and brand differentiation; Methods of profiling buying decision process Analyzing Business Markets; Organisational buying, business buying process, stages in buying process, B to B customer relations

4

5 Adapting marketing to changing scenario:

• How business practices are changing.

• Pure click versus brick and click companies.

• Digitalization & connectivity.

• Disintermediation and reinter mediation.

• Customization and customerisation.

• Concept of value.

• Websites, online ads and promotion, internet domains, CRM

4

6 Market segmentation, Targeting and Positioning.

• Market Segmentation, Segmenting the Market, Benefits / Purpose and Limitations of Market Segmentations, Market Segmentation Procedure, Basis for Consumer/Industrial Market Segmentation.

• Market Targeting – Introduction, Procedure

• Product Positioning - Introduction, Objectives, Usefulness, Differentiating the Product, Product Positioning Strategy

4

172

7 Marketing - Mix Decisions (Product, Promotions and distribution)

• Product-Mix, Branding and Packaging Decisions, Product Life cycle - Stages and Strategies for Different Stages of PLC.

• Promotion: Promotion-mix, Advertising, Sales Promotion, Personal Selling, Publicity and Public Relations.

• Channels of Distribution for Consumer/ Industrial Products, Factors Affecting Channel Distribution

4

8 Marketing - Mix Decisions (Pricing )

• Pricing Decisions, Pricing Objectives, Policies Methods of Setting Price, Pricing Strategies

4

9 Contemporary issues in Marketing:

Select any one topic from the ones recommended: i). Green Marketing ii).Hospital & Health care Marketing (Why healthcare marketing, Role of marketing in the Healthcare sector Collaborative approach to patient care.) iii). Digital Marketing iv). E-marketing v) CSR and Rural Marketing

2

Books Recommended

1. Kotler / Koshy / Keller / Jha [ 2009 ] – Marketing Management – A South Asian Perspective, 13th Ed. – Pearson Education ( Reference Book)

2. Kotler Philip [ 2005 ] – Marketing Management – Analysis Planning and Implementation and Control , 11th Ed. – Pearson Education

3. Kotler Philip / Armstrong Gray [ 2006 ] – Principles of Marketing - 11th Ed. – Pearson Education . 4. CZINKOTA/Kotabe/Mercer [1997] – Marketing management Blackwell Busines. 5. Boyd/Walker/Larreche [1995] – Marketing management -2nd Ed.- Irwin Pub.

6. Etzel/Walker/Stanton [2004] – Marketing – 13th Ed.-TMH 7. Fundamentals Of Marketing (Mc Graw Hill) , Stanton William J 8. Marketing Management: Planning, Implementation And Control, Ramaswamy V.S. And Namakumari S 9. Strategic Marketing Management Text And Cases;Rangan,V.K Icfai Press 2007 2 Ed. 10. Marketing Research By Day Kumar Wiley Publication 2007 7th Ed


• Class test.

• Group project/ Industry project.

• Presentations.

173

• Assignments.

• Class Participation.



1 Marketing Management ( SIIB-IB)

2 Marketing Management ( SIIB-AB)

3 Essentials of Marketing ( SITM)

4 Marketing Management - SITM

5 Marketing Management 1 SIBM-B

6 Marketing Management SCMHRD

7 Marketing Management 1 SIMS

8 Marketing Management 2 SIMS

9 Marketing Management SCMS-P

10 Marketing Management 2 SIBM-B

11 Marketing Management- SIOM

12 Marketing Management 1 SIBM-P

13 Marketing Management- Symbiosis Law school

14 Marketing Management SIHS

Name of members

Olive Nerurkar Surya Rashmi Rawat

Sujata Joshi Tarun Khuswa Vaishali Mahajan

Richa Arora


Assistant professor

Assistant professor

Associate Professor

Associate Professor

Assistant professor

Org/Inst. SCMS-P SLS PUne SITM SIBM-P SCMHRD SCMS-P

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

Benchmarking:

174



Course Name: Export Import Management

Course Code: T2385

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 3


1. Apply knowledge of exports and imports in formulating strategies in international

business

2. Demonstrate knowledge of export-import procedures and documentation

3. Solve practical problems related to import export management by observing sites such as:

ports, DGFT, ECGC, EPCs etc.

Pedagogy: 4. Class Room Sessions

5. Practical -Export Import related Assignments & Visit to JNPT Port, Dynamic

Logistics and invitees for guest lectures on sharing practical aspects from DGFT,

ECGC, EPCs, EPCGs, Banks etc.

Pre-learning:

NA

175

Course Outline:

S. No Topic Hrs

1 Introduction to International Business : Key conceptual

understanding of “Exports”, “Imports”, Types of Exporters, IE Code,

Export Houses, DGFT, EPCs etc.

3

2 Parties & Processes involved in International Trade: International

Trade Cycle and parties involved in the same. Major parties are

Exporter & Importer and other parties are shipping lines, freight

forwarders, banks, logistics & supply chain management, NVOCCs

etc.

3

3 Export Procedures: Steps and formalities needed to complete the

chain of export activity, and this is categorically divided into 3 stages namely Preliminary Stage, Pre-Shipment and Post-Shipment Stage

4

4 Export Documents-Various documents required in exports like the

Bill of Lading, Shipping Bill, Certificate of Origin, Mate’s Receipt,

Marine Insurance, Letter of Credit etc. are explained and showed to

the students as 3samples

4

5 Import Documents- Steps and formalities needed to complete the

import activity, and this is divided into two parts namely, one before

ETA (Expected time of Arrival of the vessel) and one post-eta

activities

4

6 INCOTERMS- Concept, Evolution and Background reason for

International Commercial Terms (INCOTERMS), ICC etc. And all

13 Incoterms as per Incoterms 2000, up to the recent amendments to 11 Incoterms as per Incoterms 2010.

3

7 Export Finance- Conceptual Understanding of the concept, need and

importance of “Export Finance”

3

8 Pre-Shipment Export Finance-Meaning, contents under pre-shipment

stage and various methods of availing export finance under pre-

shipment stage like packing credit, credit in foreign currencies etc.

3

9 Post-Shipment Export Finance- Meaning, contents under post-

shipment stage and various methods of availing export finance under

post-shipment stage like line of credit, buyer’s credit, advance

against retention etc.

3

Total Hours 30

Books Recommended

1) Export Import Procedures-Documentation and Logistics by C.Ramagopal

2) Foreign Trade (Policies, Procedures & Documentation) by M I Mahajan

3) Export-What, where and How? by Paras Ram

4) Export Documentation & Procedures by Nabhi Publications

5) Export Management by D.C.Kapoor

176

Suggested Evaluation Methods: 1. Class tests 2. Practical Assignments 3. Case Studies 4. Presentations


1.

Name of Member

Mrs. SmitaSantoki

Mr. Deepak Havaldar

Mrs. Ishita Dutt

Dr. P. A. Ratna Dr. AnithaPathak


Faculty


Signature

Name of the Expert: Dr. AnithaRamannaPathak

Signature:

Date: 02-08-2013

177

Course: FP1



Post Graduate

Course Title: Financial Accounting

Course Code: T2003

Level: 4


1. To develop an insight to concepts, principles and techniques of accounting; 2. To relate financial and accounting information for planning, decision making and control; 3. To appraise accounting information for evaluation & interpretation.


Pre-Requisite Knowledge: Base level course, no pre-requisites required.

Course Outline

Sr. No. Topic No. of hrs.

1

Introduction to Accounting: Introduction, Meaning & Scope of Financial Accounting, meaning and nature of business transactions, introduction to basic elements of financial accounting

2

2

Accounting concepts and conventions: Accounting concepts, principles, conventions and assumptions, disclosure, Generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) & IFRS

2

178

3

Accounting Mechanics: Accounting Process: Principles of double entry, Accounting Equation, Accounting Process (Journal entries, Trial balance). Systems of accounting and its effect on financial statements

6

179

4 Depreciation - Estimating the useful life, determination of cost, methods for calculating depreciation(SLM & WDV) 2

5 Inventory – Valuation of Inventory, different conventions on Inventory Valuation 2

6 Preparation of Financial Statements: Balance Sheet, Profit and Loss Account. Schedule VI of Companies Act. 8

7 Cash flow Statements: Understanding Cash flow statements

2

8

Understanding Corporate Financial Statements - Including Notes to Accounts, off Balance Sheet Items, Auditors’ & Directors’ Report, Corporate Governance Reports, Standalone and Consolidated Statements.

4

9 Financial Reporting Standards and Regulations – Indian AS, IFRS, US GAAP 2

Total 30

Recommended Pedagogy: 73. Lectures and PPTs 74. Use of Excel tools for preparation of final accounts 75. Case Study in the form of Annual Reports of companies.

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Quiz + Assignment in reading Annual Report of listed firms.

Level of evaluation:4

Books Recommended: 1. Narayanaswamy R., (2008) Financial Accounting – A Managerial Perspective, Edition, 3.

PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

2. Dr. S. N. Maheshwari, Dr. S. K. Maheshwari, Sharad K. Maheshwari, (2012), Accounting

for Management , Vikas Publishing House

Reference Books:

Robert Libby, Patricia Libby, Daniel Short. (2011), Financial Accounting Seventh (6th) Edition, Tata McGraw - Hill Education.



1 Financial Accounting SIBM – B 2 Business Accounting SIBM-B

3 Cost & Financial Accounting SIMS

4 Advanced Accounting SIMS

5 Financial & Cost Accounting SIOM

6 Financial Accounting SCMHRD

7 Business Accounting SITM

180

Name Mrs. Dipali Krishnakumar




Associate Professor

Assistant Professor

Org. / Inst. SCMHRD SITM SITM

Signature


Signature:

Date:17 August 2013

181

Course : FP 34



Post Graduate

Course Name: Financial Management_(PG 1st year, preferably second semester)

Course Code: T2034


Level: 5

Learning Objective(s) The students will be able to:

4. Develop an analytical/practical approach to corporate fin decision making

5. Apply & analyse the concepts in real life situations. 6. Evaluate various theories related to different concepts.

Pedagogy:

1. Classroom sessions 2. Lectures 3. Cases 4. Newspaper clippings, articles, research papers 5. Excel modeling

Pre-learning:

Financial Management I course is the first part of this course. It is recommended that this course be chosen after FM I

182

Course Outline

Session Topic Hours 1 Investment Decisions – Review

a. Risk and Return (Definition of risk, return, measurement of risk and return, CAPM)

4

b. Cost of Capital (WACC) and its implications 4

c. Basics of valuation using Discounted Cash Flow 4

2 Financing Decisions

Long term financing 3

Capital Structure Decision a. Modigliani-Millar propositions b. Capital structure theories c. Interface with cost of capital

2

Short term Financing 1 Financing and Valuation 1

3 Working Capital Management (estimation of working capital requirement, cash management, inventory management, receivables management)

4

4 Dividend Decisions 3

5 Other Suggested Topics : 4 Financial Distress

Mergers and Acquisitions

International Financial Management

Leverage

30

Books Recommended • Stephen A. Ross, Randolph W. Westerfield, Jeffrey Jaffe (2010), Corporate Finance, McGraw-Hill • Stephen A. Ross, Randolph W.Westerfield, Jeffrey Jaffe & Ram kumar Kakani, (2009) Corporate

Finance, McGraw-Hill

• Aswath Damodaran, Corporate Finance: Theory and Practice, John Wiley and Sons

• Richard A. Brealey, Stewart C. Myers, Franklin Allen, Principles of Corporate Finance, 11/e McGraw-Hill, Latest Edition

• Richard Brealey, Stewart Myers, Franklin Allen, Pitabas Mohanty, (2012) Principles of Corporate Finance, Mc Graw-Hill

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Quiz Class Test Case Analysis Assignments

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref%3Dntt_athr_dp_sr_1?_encoding=UTF8&field-author=Stephen%20A.%20Ross&search-alias=books&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref%3Dntt_athr_dp_sr_2?_encoding=UTF8&field-author=Randolph%20W.%20Westerfield&search-alias=books&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref%3Dntt_athr_dp_sr_3?_encoding=UTF8&field-author=Jeffrey%20Jaffe&search-alias=books&sort=relevancerank

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Richard%2BBrealey

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Stewart%2BMyers

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Franklin%2BAllen

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Pitabas%2BMohanty

183

Problem sets Project Exam


Financial Management II SIBM-B Financial Management II SCMHRD Financial Management II SIIB

Name of Member

Dr Madhvi Sethi


Org. / Inst. SIBM-B

Signature

Name of the Expert:V.Ravi Kumar

Signature:

Date:17 August 2013

184



Course : FP51

Course Name: Financial Modelling


Level:4


1. Build models, appraise projects and create optimal portfolio using EXCEL.

Pedagogy: 1. Lab sessions

Pre-learning:

1. Financial & Cost Accountancy 2. Management Accountancy

3. Financial management 4. Basic understanding of MS Excel

Benchmarked:

1. The University of Texas at Dallas. 2. XLRI.

Course Outline

185

Books Recommended

1. Financial Modeling by Simon Benninga 2. Principles of Finance with Excel by Simon Benninga

3. Financial Analysis and Modeling Using Excel and VBA (Wiley Finance) By Chandan Sengupta

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Understanding the Basic Features of Excel: Introduction to Financial analysis and modeling .Introduction to Excel

3

2

Understanding Advanced Features of Excel: Database Functions in Excel, Creating Charts, Using Forms and Control Toolbox, Understanding

Finance Functions present in Excel, Creating Dynamic Models.

3

3

Sensitivity& Scenario Analysis using Excel: What if Analysis-data tables, Scenario Manager, goal seeking.

3

4

Simulation using Crystal ball 2000, Excel add in: Monte Carlo Simulation, Different Statistical Distributions used in Simulation,

Generating Random Numbers that follow a particular distribution, Building Models in Finance using Simulation

3

5

Excel in Accounting: Forecasting Financial Statements using Excel, Financial Ratio analysis using Excel. Creating Fixed Asset & Debt Schedule

on Excel.

6

6

Excel in Project Appraisal: Determining Project Viability, Risk Analysis in Project appraisal, Simulation in Project Appraisal

3

7

Excel in Valuation: Determination of Value Drivers, DCF Valuation, Risk Analysis in Valuation

3

8

Excel in Portfolio Theory: Determining Efficient Portfolio, Creating Dynamic Portfolios, Application of solvers and Crystal ball 2000 in

portfolio optimization.

6


1. Exams using Spreadsheet

http://www.amazon.com/Principles-Finance-Excel-Simon-Benninga/dp/0199755477/ref%3Dpd_bxgy_b_text_y

http://www.amazon.com/Chandan-Sengupta/e/B001HCU6UY/ref%3Dntt_athr_dp_pel_1

186

Sub Committee for Curriculum Development Banking & Finance Specialization

Course : FP 56

Course Name: Financial Risk Management Number of Credits: 2

Level:5


1. Compare and contrast the various types of risk.

2. Appraise the impact of different risks on the operations and performance of a firm.

Pedagogy: 1. Conceptual and analytical inputs through problem solving

2. Case studies

Pre-learning: 1. Statistics

2. Financial management. 3. Security analysis and Portfolio Management

4. Quantitative techniques.

Benchmarked: 1. Princeton University 2. NUS Business School

3. XLRI 4. IIMB.

187

Course Outline

Books Recommended 1. Financial Risk Management : Frank J Fabozzi.

2. Financial Risk Management: A Practitioner’s Guide to Managing Market and Credit Risk By

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Financial Risk: An Overview, Evolution, and the Environment

2

2 Risks definition (market, credit, liquidity, operational), more specifically on the identification of different forms of risk (currency, interest rate, equity,

commodity)

3

3 Market Data Analysis, Introduction to Probability and distributions of asset

prices, measuring return and risk. 1

4 Measuring risk using Value-at-Risk, concept and computation of VaR using

Different approach, Calculating portfolio risk of more than one Assets.

3

5 Multifactor VaR, marginal and relative VaR, Stress testing and back-testing

VaR, treasury applications. 3

6 Conditional VaR and its relevance, Comparison between VaR and cVaR. 3

7 Relaxing the Normal distribution assumption, the Cornish-Fisher VaR and the

Cornish- Fisher cVaR. 3

8 Extreme Value Theory : Basic Principles, and application in Risk management

2

9 VIX –Theory and Application, 2

10 Operational Risk: Operational risk, Legal Risk, Accounting risk, Liquidity risk,

Enterprise Risk 3

11

Credit Risk: Probability of Default, Loss Given default, Amount owed at Default, Portfolio Credit risks, Credit ratings & Transition Matrix Analysis, Contingent claim approach and the KMV Model, Credit Risk Management.

Copula models in Credit Risk Management.

3

12 Indian environment in VaR applications (NSE, BSE, NCDEX, CCIL), RBI

guidelines for credit & market risk management, VaR based margining. 3

Steve L. Allen 3. Advanced Financial Risk Management: Tools and Techniques for Integrated Credit Risk and

Interest Rate Risk Management (Wiley Finance) by Donald R. Van Deventer , Kenji Imai & Mark Mesler

Suggested Evaluation Methods: 1. Case studies

2. Exams 3. Risk calculation and analysis using historical stock price data (suggested)

4. Project works.

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref%3Dntt_athr_dp_sr_1?_encoding=UTF8&field-author=Donald%20R.%20Van%20Deventer&search-alias=books&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref%3Dntt_athr_dp_sr_2?_encoding=UTF8&field-author=Kenji%20Imai&search-alias=books&sort=relevancerank

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref%3Dntt_athr_dp_sr_3?_encoding=UTF8&field-author=Mark%20Mesler&search-alias=books&sort=relevancerank

188



Post Graduate

Course : FP17

Course Name: Financial Services

Course Code: T2017


Level:4


38. Describe the nature of different financial services and their features.

39. Compare and contrast services extended by banks and NBFCs.

40. Critically analyse the nature and role of each service

Pedagogy: 76. Theory 77. Problem solving 78. Case Studies 79. Presentations

Pre-learning:

Financial Markets

189

Course Outline

190

Financial Services

2 Credits


1 Introduction 3

a. Introduction to the concept of Financial Products and Services

b. The basis of distinction between financial products and services

c. Features of financial services

d. Financial Services Market - Players

2 A) Banking Products 6

Deposit accounts as products

i. Savings, Current, Recurring and Fixed deposit account – Regular features and new look given to it by banks – Accounts for the residents and the non-residents.

ii. Loans – Cash credit, Overdraft, Home loans, Personal loans, Loans for cars, two wheelers and other consumer durables – Loans against real assets such as Gold, Land and Financial assets such as Shares, Life insurance policies and Fixed deposit receipts – Credit card advances- Bill discounting – CIBIL: Need and its Functions and working.

B) Banking Services

i. Safe Deposit vaults

ii. Remittances of funds through- Cheques, Bankers’ cheques, Demand drafts, Mail and Telegraphic transfers, Electronic modes of transfer, Tele\mobile and net banking

iii. ATM

iv. Services as paying and collecting banker – process of clearing a cheque.

v. Currency exchange

vi. Guarantee and Letter of Credit

C) RBI guidelines over customer service in banks – Institutional framework – Constitution of various committees for customer service- Financial inclusion- Opening and operation of deposit accounts – Service charges – Remittances – Collection of instruments- Dishonour of cheques – Complaints and its redressal- Safe Deposit Locker – Nomination facility – all other related guidelines

3 Non-Banking Products 6

i. Mutual Fund – Introduction - Brief history - Terms in Mutual fund - Organisation, Sponsor, Trusts, AMCs, - Types of Schemes: Different classifications such as Functional, Portfolio, Investment, and Geographical, - SEBI guidelines – Methodology of Investment in a Mutual fund – AMFI – Growth and performance of Mutual Fund Industry in India

191

ii. Insurance –

a. Life insurance: Introduction- Brief History – Life Insurance Products such as Endowment, Money back, Whole life and Term Insurance plans, ULIP – Group Insurance

b. Non-life insurance – Introduction – Brief History – Products such as Motor, Marine, Fire and Health Insurance

c. Reinsurance – Introduction – Types

d. Bancassurance

4 Non-Banking Services 6

i. Hire Purchase – Concept – Parties – Essentials – Legal and Taxation Aspects

ii. Lease financing – Concept – Parties – Types – Advantages and Disadvantages of different types of leases – Legal and Taxation aspects of Lease finance – Differences between Hire Purchase and Lease finance

iii. Factoring – Origin – Types- Mechanism – Advantages – Legal aspects – International Factoring – Factoring in India

iv. Forfaiting – Origin – Features – Advantages – Mechanism – Forfaiting in India – Difference between factoring and Forfaiting

Other Services

5 i. Securitization 5

ii. Investment Banking - Introduction – Functions – Types – Investment banking services such as fund raising and advisory

iii. Merchant Banking – Introduction – Pre and Post Issue Management – SEBI Regulation for the Merchant Bankers

iv. Depository and Custodial Services – Need – Benefits – Paper based versus paperless trading – Trading and settlement of Demat Securities – Depositories in India – NSDL and CDSL

6 Credit Rating Services 4

i. Importance – Origin – Rating methodology – Symbols – Credit Rating Agencies in India with reference to CRISIL, ICRA, CARE, Fitch and Brickwork Ratings.

Books Recommended 1. M Y Khan (2007), "Financial Services" Tata McGraw-Hill 2. The Indian Financial System – Markets, Institutions and Services (3rd edition –

Pearson) by Bharati V. Pathak 3. RBI’s ‘Master Circular on Customer Service in Banks’, dated July 02, 2012 (Ref No.

DBOD No.Leg.BC. 21 /09.07.006/2012-13) 4. www.allbankingsolutions.com 5. www.amfiindia.com


http://www.allbankingsolutions.com/

http://www.amfiindia.com/

192

Class Tests, Assignment,Quiz and End of Course Examination



Name of Member



Org. / Inst. SIMC

Signature

Name of the Expert:V.Ravi Kumar

Signature:

Date:17 August 2013

193



Post Graduate

Course: FP3

Course Title: Financial Statement Analysis

Course Code: T2498


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): 1. To study , appraise and compare financial statements of various industries; 2. To estimate and evaluate the financial health of a firm; 3. To interpret the results of the company for managerial decision making.

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Overview to Financial Statements Analysis and latest trends in financial statement analysis

2

2 Methodology for Analysis of Annual Reports & Valuation 2

3 Balance Sheet Analysis

4

4 Income Statement Analysis Revenue Recognition & Gross Margin Analysis

4

5 Cash Flow Statements Analysis 4

6 Changes in Accounting rules, methods or assumptions and their impact on Financial Statements and Ratios.

4

7

Case Studies (suggested topics) Intangible Assets Inventory Valuation Leasing & Financing Financial Reporting Strategy

8

8 Financial Reporting Standards and Regulations, Indian AS, IFRS, US GAAP 2

30

Pre-Requisite Knowledge: Financial Accounting

194

Course Outline:

Pedagogy: Case study based course

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Case Study based

Books Recommended

1. ICAI Compilation - A Comparative Study of Accounting Standards: Indian GAAP, IAS & US GAAP.

2. Gerald I. White, Ashinpaul C. Sondhi, Dov Fried ( 2006) The Analysis And Use Of Financial Statements (With CD) 3rd Edition , Wiley India Pvt Ltd

3. Frank J. Fabozzi , Pamela P. Peterson (1994) Analysis of Financial Statements McGraw-Hill Education

4. Charles Gibson (2012)Financial Statement Analysis 12th Edition , Cengage Learning India Pvt.ltd

5. T.P. Ghosh (2011), Accounting Standards and Corporate Accounting Practices Vol I, Taxmann.

6. T.P. Ghosh (2011), Accounting Standards and Corporate Accounting Practices Vol II, Taxmann.

Name of Member

Prof Arti Chandani Prof: .Zora Sabunwala

Designation Assistant Professor Assistant Professor


Signature

Date: 18 April 2014

http://www.flipkart.com/author/ashinpaul-c-sondhi

http://www.flipkart.com/author/dov-fried

http://www.flipkart.com/analysis-use-financial-statements-with-cd-3rd/p/itmdytmvxqazm54v?pid=9788126510221&otracker=from-search&srno=t_1&query=3.%09The%2BAnalysis%2Band%2BUse%2Bof%2BFinancial%2BStatements%2B%2Bby%2BWhite%2C%2BSondhi%2C%2BFried%2B&ref=863e1ee3-50ac-4dde-94c7-30776dd9a045

http://www.flipkart.com/analysis-use-financial-statements-with-cd-3rd/p/itmdytmvxqazm54v?pid=9788126510221&otracker=from-search&srno=t_1&query=3.%09The%2BAnalysis%2Band%2BUse%2Bof%2BFinancial%2BStatements%2B%2Bby%2BWhite%2C%2BSondhi%2C%2BFried%2B&ref=863e1ee3-50ac-4dde-94c7-30776dd9a045

195



Post Graduate

Course : FP19

Course Name: Fixed Income Markets

Course Code: T2019


Level:4


1. Analyse and interpret the valuation process of fixed income securities 2. Construct a bond index.

Pedagogy:

80. Classroom session 81. Case Studies 82. Presentation, Simulation etc

Pre-learning:

- Basic understanding of Financial Markets - Basic understanding of Macro Economics

196

Course Outline

S.no.

Topic

Description No. of

Hours

1 Fixed Income Markets Basic Concepts

4

Yield to Maturity, Current Yield, Holding period yield

Day Count Conventions

Bonds and Money Market instruments

Risks

Credit Rating

2 Bond Valuation Valuation of other Bonds

4

Floating Rate securities

Valuation of convertibles

Index bonds,

Illiquid bonds ETC

3 Risk Identification in Bonds Duration

4

Convexity

Immunization

4

Risk measurement in fixed income securities

Value at Risk

3

5 Bond Structuring STRIPS

3

Zero Coupon Bonds, Deep Discount Bonds

Securitization etc

Financial engineering

Theories of Term Structure of Interest Rates 2 5 Yield Curve Analysis Term structure and the economy

6 Treasury Securities Auction Government securities auction & Bidding

2

Winners curse analysis

Bidding behavior

7 Bond Indexing Methodology for constructing a bond index 2 Index return comparison

197

8

Bond Strategies

Portfolio construction & Setting portfolio objectives

4

Interpreting portfolio parameters

Passive vs Active portfolio management strategies,

Bullet vs Barbell, other strategies

9

Global Bond Markets

Fixed Income Derivative Markets including Credit Default Swaps

2 Interest Rate futures

Books Recommended

1. Fixed Income Securities by Frank J Fabozzi

2. Fixed Income Securities : Valuation, Risk and Risk Management by Pietro Veronesi

3. Fixed Income Securities by Sundaresan 4. Financial Derivatives and Swap Markets: Satyajit Das


Group written assignment Group presentation of case analysis Written quizzes End of Term Examination



1 Fixed Income Securities SIIB, Pune

2 Fixed Income Securities SCMHRD, Pune

Name of Member

Mr. Shridhar Potdar





Adjunct Faculty


Signature


Signature:

Date:17 August 2013

198

Sub Committee for Curriculum Development International Business Specialization

Course Name: Foreign Trade Policy

Course Code: T2386

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4


1. Describe India’s export import, conceptual understanding of the concepts like globalization, international trade, foreign trade policies

2. Explain WTO’s role and relationship of India and WTO

3. Identify factors affecting foreign trade policies, especially with focus on the current scenario

Pedagogy:

6. Class Room Sessions 7. Case Studies based on Trade Policies-From practical understanding point of view, live

case studies on globalization, foreign trade policies, India’s EXIM etc will be covered under this unit

Pre-learning:

NA

199

Course Outline: Sr No Topic Hrs

1. Globalization and Global Trade-Conceptual understanding of trade, globalization and analysis of global trade

5

2. Impact of globalization on Indian Trade Policy- A detailed study of effect of globalization in framing foreign trade policies

5

3. Analysis of India’s Exports & Imports- Background, current scenario and future prospects of India’s EXIM and it’s scope in the international scenario. Here, exports and imports of all major products and services from India will be covered

5

4. Balance of Trade (BOT) & Balance of Payment (BOP)-Conceptual understanding of India’s BOP, it’s summary, contents and reference with Foreign Trade Policies

5

5. Foreign Trade Policy 2009-2014- Background of earlier foreign trade policies, synopsis of earlier policies outcomes and detail coverage of 2009-2014 foreign trade policies. It’s relevance and importance for IB students

5

6. India and WTO-What is WTO, it’s significance and the relationship of WTO with India

5

Total 30

Books Recommended

1) Foreign Exchange Management – By C.Jeevnandam



5. Class tests 6. Assignments 7. Case Studies 8. Presentations

200


2.

Name of Member

Mrs. SmitaSantoki

Mr. Deepak Havaldar

Mrs. Ishita Dutt

Dr. P. A. Ratna

Dr. AnithaPathak


faculty

Org. / Inst. SIIB SCMS SCMS SIOM SIOM

Signature


Signature:

Date: 02-08-2013

201

Sub Committee for Curriculum Development: Strategy Course Name: Game Theory for Strategic Thinking (SP 2) Course Code: T2254 (No. should be between 600 and 899) (UG/PG): PG Ideal positioning will be in Sem III Number of Credits: 2


1. To enable the students to analyze the real world issues in a strategic way through game theory.

2. To enable the students to apply the Game Theory solutions and interpret business and real

world problems.

Expected Outcome (s):

1. Students will be able to interpret strategic issues using game theory

Pedagogy: 83. Lectures 84. In class games

Pre-learning: -

202

S.No. Topic Hours

1. A case of synchronized attack-Understanding perfect information

2

2. Rationality and what it means

1

3. How to save world by building Nuke arsenal-Understanding Nash Equilibrium

2

4. Matching pennies-Best Reaction Curve and Mixed Strategy equilibrium

4

5. My win your loss, your win my loss - Zero Sum Games

2

6. Looking ahead and reasoning backwards-Backward Induction

4

7. How to split the pie- Bargaining and negotiations

3

8.

Prepare a face to meet the faces that you meet -Interpreting and Manipulating Information

3

9. Whom to elect -Strategic voting

2

10. The king Lear Problem -Competition and Coordination

3

11. What and when to Bid –Auctions

2

12. Guest lectures by industry experts 2

Course Outline

Books /Articles Recommended 1) Thinking Strategically: The Competitive Edge in Business, Politics, and Everyday Life by Avinash

K. Dixit and Barry J. Nalebuff . 2) The Art of Strategy: A Game Theorist's Guide to Success in Business and Life by Avinash K. Dixit

and Barry J. Nalebuff. 3) Games of Strategy (Third Edition) by Avinash K. Dixit, David H. Reiley Jr. and Susan Skeath.


• Assignments

• In class and take home strategy games



1 Games in Business and Economics

SCMHRD

http://www.amazon.com/Thinking-Strategically-Competitive-Business-Politics/dp/0393310353/ref%3Dsr_1_3?s=books&ie=UTF8&qid=1375352842&sr=1-3&keywords=avinash%2Bdixit

http://www.amazon.com/Avinash-K.-Dixit/e/B000APQGTE/ref%3Dsr_ntt_srch_lnk_3?qid=1375352842&sr=1-3


http://www.amazon.com/Barry-J.-Nalebuff/e/B000AQ1F26/ref%3Dsr_ntt_srch_lnk_3?qid=1375352842&sr=1-3

http://www.amazon.com/Art-Strategy-Theorists-Success-Business/dp/0393337170/ref%3Dsr_1_1?s=books&ie=UTF8&qid=1375352842&sr=1-1&keywords=avinash%2Bdixit


http://www.amazon.com/Barry-J.-Nalebuff/e/B000AQ1F26/ref%3Dsr_ntt_srch_lnk_1?qid=1375352842&sr=1-1

http://www.amazon.com/Games-Strategy-Third-Edition-Avinash/dp/0393931129/ref%3Dsr_1_2?ie=UTF8&qid=1375434077&sr=8-2&keywords=avinash%2Bdixit


203

Name of Member

Prof. Brig. Rajiv Divekar

Dr. Kaushik Mukerjee

Dr. Kiran Karande

Prof. Smit Gade

Designation Director Professor Associate


Org. / Inst. SIMS SIBM SCMHRD SCMHRD

Signature

Name of the Expert: Prof. Brigadier Rajiv Divekar

Signature:

Date:

204



Course Name:Global Business Environment

Course Code: T2387

(UG/PG): PG

Number of Credits:2

Level: 4


1. Analyze the basic macroeconomic relationships as they affect the behavior of firm in the

international context

2. Compare and contrast how businesses and managers match decisions for creating

competitive advantage in the global environment.

3. Interpret international issues for designing corporate strategies in a fast changing global

environment.

Pedagogy:

8. Lectures

9. Case Studies

10. Discussion on assigned readings

11. In-class activities

Pre-learning:

Micro economics, macro-economics, business environment

205

Course Outline:

SR. NO. TOPICS NO. OF

HOURS

1 Introduction to International Business

a. International business environment b. International Trade Theories

3

2 Globalization& MNCs

a. Globalization – Meaning, drivers and implications

b. Entry Strategies of firms

c. Institutional efforts towards globalization –WTO, Future of WTO.

d. Meaning, organizational models, importance and dominance of

MNCs

3

3 International Trade

a. Trade Policy – Comparison between developed and developing

nations such as BRICS, MENA

b. BoP

c. Trade Agreements, Trade Barriers

5

4 Country Risk Analysis

a. Political

b. Economic

c. Socio-Cultural

d. Technology

e. Legal

4

5 Economic and Regional Integration

a. Trading Blocs – ASEAN, NAFTA, SAARC, CARICOM, APEC,

EU, MERCOSUR, ECOWAS

b. Arguments for and against trading blocs

2

6 International Organisations&Multi-lateral agencies a. IMF, WB, UNCTAD, UNIDO, WTO etc.

2

7 International Financial Flows& Monetary System

a. Recent Changes in the International finance b. Resource Flows to Developing Countries –FII &FDI.

3

8 Financial Crisis a. Crisis such as Asian, Sub-prime, Euro

1

9 Emerging Economies - Opportunities and Challenges 2

10 Global Operations

a. International Marketing

b. International Strategy

c. International Financial Management

d. International Human Resource Management Strategy

5

Total 30

Books Recommended

1. Charles W.L. Hill and Francis Cherunilam, International Business, Tata McGraw Hill

206

2. Charles Hill and Jain, International Business, Tata McGraw Hill

3. Debra Johnson and Colin Turner, International Business: Themes and Issues in the Modern

Global Economy,Routledge

4. OdedShenkar and YadongLuo, International Business, Sage

5. Alan M Rungman, Simon Collinson, Richard M Hodgetts, International Business, Prentice

Hall.

6. Donald A Ball and Wendell H Mc. Collouch, International Business: The challenge of

Global Competition, McGraw Hill.

7. Justin Paul, International Business, Prentice Hall.

8. Czinkota, Ronkainen, Moffet, International Business, John Wiley

9. Ashok Som, International Management, Tata McGraw Hill

10. SubbaRao P, International Business, Himalaya Publishing House

Additional Reading - Books

1. Thomas L. Friedman (2006), World is Flat – A Brief History of the Twenty-first Century,

Farrar, Straus and Giroux

2. PankajGhemawat, World 3.0 – Global Prosperity and How to Achieve IT, HBR Press

3. RaghuramRajan- How Hidden Fractures Still Threaten the World Economy, Fault lines,

Princeton University Press

4. Charlene E. Solomon, Michael S. Schell, Managing Across Cultures – The Seven Keys to

Doing Business with a Global Mindset,McGraw Hill

5. Dan Ikenson (2007), Thriving in a Global Economy – The Truth about U.S. Manufacturing

and Trade, Cato

6. Chaney L. and Martin J. Intercultural Business Communication, Pearson,5thed.

7. David A. Ricks,Blunders in International Business, Wiley Blackwell, 4th ed.

Suggested Reading – Articles

1. Jeanne M. Brett and Michele J. Gelfand, (2005), Lessons from abroad: When culture affects

negotiating style, Negotiation, HBS Publishing, January, 1-5

2. Frederic S. Mishkin (2009), Globalization, macroeconomic performance and monetary

policy, Journal of Money, Credit and Banking, Supplement to Vol. 41 (1), 187- 196

207

3. Jon D.Haveman,Usha Nair– Reichert and Jerry G. Thursby (2003), How effective are trade

barriers? An empirical analysis of trade reduction diversion and compression, Review of

Economics and Statistics, 85(2), May, 480-485

4. Marceau, Gabrielle and Joel P. Trachtman (2002), The technical barriers to trade agreement,

the sanitary and phytosanitary measures and agreement and the general agreement on tariffs

and trade, Journal of World Trade: Law, Economics, Public Policy, October, 36(5), 811-

882

5. ValentinZahrnt (2011), Transparency of complex regulation: how should WTO trade policy

reviews deal with sanitary and phytosanitary policies? World trade review : economics, law,

international institutions,10(2), 217-247

6. ZahrntValentin (2005), How regionalization can be a pillar of a more effective world trade

organization, World trade review : economics, law, international institutions, 39(4), 671-

699

7. JagdishBhagwati (2008), Regionalism and multilateralism: an overview, International

Political Economy, 2, 321-346

Reports

1. World Investment Report (2011), UNCTAD

2. Pankaj G. and Steven, A.A. (2012), DHL Global Connectedness Index – Analyzing global

flows and their power to increase prosperity

3. World Economic Outlook (2013), International Monetary Fund

Websites Recommended

1. http://dgft.gov.in

2. http://www.intracen.org/

3. http://www.ifad.org/

4. http://www.oecd.org/

5. http://www.wto.org/

6. http://unctad.org/en/pages/home.aspx

7. http://www.worldbank.org/


1. Class tests

2. Assignments

http://dgft.gov.in/

http://www.intracen.org/

http://www.ifad.org/

http://www.oecd.org/

http://www.wto.org/

http://unctad.org/en/pages/home.aspx

http://www.worldbank.org/

208

3. Case Study Analysis

4. Presentations

209



3. International Business SIBM, Bangalore

4. Global Business Environment SIOM, Nashik

Name of

Member

Mrs.

SmitaSantoki

Mr. Deepak

Havaldar

Mrs. IshitaDutt Dr. P. A. Ratna Dr.

AnithaPathak


Faculty


Signature


Signature:

Date: 02-08-2013

210


For B.Sc. Medical Technology (Cardiac Care) Name of the Course Global Immersion Program (GIP)

Name of the Programme B.Sc. Medical Technology – Cardiac Care

(Batch 2014 -17)

UG/PG UG

Credit Value 12 Credits

Level: 3

Evaluation Scheme Parameters Marks Total

Marks

Description and Rational :

Students of the UG program of Symbiosis International University are offering Global

Immersion Program (GIP) / Floating Credits equivalent to 12 credits as integral part of the

program structure. These are unique, creative & socially oriented.

To facilitate learning in foreign university & develop global citizen, a course of the Global

Immersion Program has developed. A student can opt for courses from SIU approved

foreign university & spend specified duration at that university.

Course Objectives :

To facilitate learning in foreign university & develop global citizens.

Prerequisites / Pre learning (if any) :

-

Learning Outcomes :

Develop ability to understand the world better & become sensitive towards global issues.

Will develop ability to contribute to the world meaningfully.

Teaching Pedagogy:

A student can opt for courses from SIU approved foreign university & spend specified

duration at that university. The teaching & evaluation would be course specific.

211

Internal

Assessment As per university & course specific. 300

External

Assessment - -

Practical

Examination - -

Total Marks

300

Syllabus, Teach Plan & Session Plan

Sr. No Title Details Hrs allotted

1.

GIP

Global Immersion Program (GIP) / Service Learning, Liberal

Arts & Inter Institute Credit transfer programme – Students

of UG programmes of SIU are offered Global Immersion

Program (GIP) of 12 credits OR The students can opt for

Service Learning, Liberal Arts & Inter Institute Credit

Transfer equivalent to 12 credits in the 4th semester.

GIP – Student can opt any related program with foreign

university equivalent to 12 credits.

180 Hrs

Total Hrs 180 Hrs

Recommended Text Book

Reference books or related websites:

Additional Readings:


Parallel / Similar Course the existing curriculum:

Sr.No. Name Of The Course Institute Where it was offered

Name Of

Member

Designation

Org/Inst

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:Date:

212



Course Name: Global Strategic Management

Course Code: T2390

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): 1. Analyze the competitive advantage in international environment 2. Discuss strategic choices facing business in relation to international factors 3. Interpret the business environment in order to implement strategic control systems

Pedagogy:

12. Class Room Sessions

13. Case Studies

Pre-learning:

NA

213

Course Outline:

Sr. No Topic

No of Hours

1. Strategic Management and its Overview 6

2. Situational Analysis a. External environment : Assessing competitive b. Internal environment assessing a firms competence & competitive advantage.

6

3. Strategic Choice : a. Business Level Strategy. b. Corporate Level Strategy. c. International Level Strategy gaining advantage through global expansion. d. Functional Level Strategy.

6

4. Strategic Implementation: a. Implementing Strategy, Organizing tasks & allocating resources.

6

5. Evaluation & Control : a. Designing & Implementing strategic control systems.

6

Total 30

Books Recommended

1. Raghavan Parthasarthy [2008] Fundamentals of strategic Management by Biztantra Publisher. 2. Abbass F.Alkhafaji Strategic Management by Jaico Publishing house. 3. Hitt , Ireland & Hoskisson’s Strategic Management Competitiveness by south western Thomson learning

publisher.

Suggested Evaluation Methods: 1. Class test 2. Presentations



5.

Name of Member

Mrs. Smita Santoki

Mr. Deepak Havaldar

Mrs. Ishita Dutt

Dr. P. A. Ratna

Dr. Anitha Pathak


Faculty


Signature

Name of the Expert: Dr. Anitha Ramanna Pathak Signature Date: 02-08-2013

214


Course Name: Goods and Service Tax Law

Course Code: T1324

(UG/PG):UG


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): The Constitution (One Hundred and First) Amendment Act, 2016 has enabled the introduction of the new Goods and Service Tax Law and is going to impact each and every business entity. There will be transition from the existing taxation system to the new model of tax governance. The aim of this course is to provide basic knowledge as well as practical knowledge regarding the operation of GST Law.

Pedagogy: • Lectures

• Presentation

• Projects

• Practical

Pre-requisites:

• To pursue UG Law programme in any recognized centre of SIU.


Course Outline:

Sr. No. Topic Hours

1 Constitutional aspects of Goods and Service Tax

02

215

• Constitutional provisions

for tax on goods and services before the 2016 constitutional Amendment

• Constitutional amendments for GST

2 Introduction • Scope of GST Law • Definitions

01

3 Administration of GST • Appointment of Officers • Powers of Officers

01

4 Levy of, and Exemption from, Tax • Levy and Collection

• Composition levy

• Taxable person

• Power to grant exemption • Remission of Tax

03

5 Time and value of Supply 01

6 Input Tax Credit 01

7 Registration 02

8 Tax invoice, credit and debit notes 02

9 Returns and Payment of Tax 02

10 Transfer of Input Tax Credit, Refunds, Accounts and Records, Job Work

03

11 Electronic Commerce 02

12 Assessment, Audit, Demands and Recovery 02

13 Inspection, Search, Seizure and Arrest 02

14 Offences and Penalties, Prosecution and Compounding of Offences

02

15 Appeals and Revision, Advance Ruling, Settlement of cases, presumption as to documents

02

16 Liability to pay in certain cases, Miscellaneous Provisions And Implementation of GST

02

Total 30

Books Recommended

• Goods and Service Tax Act, 2016

216

• Taxmann Publications on GST Act, 2016



External Written Exam: 30 Marks Internal Evaluations: (Case Analysis/Presentation / Simulation / Assignment / Field visit) 20 Marks Total Marks: 50 Marks

217


Human Resources Management Specialization

Course Name: HR Analytics HR P22

Course Code: T2300

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 5


1. To identify appropriate data and metrics for HR problem solving and decision making.

2. To apply statistical analysis to HR questions and problems to improve decision making

3. To evaluate metrics for Human capital management processes

4. To develop a business case for Human capital management and demonstrate human capital value

Pedagogy:

85. Lectures

86. Case Study

87. Presentations

Pre-learning:

Human Resource Management, Business Statistics, Operations Research

218

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Analytics in the context of HRM : Introduction and context setting,

Importance of Metrics and decision sciences 4

2 Types of Analytics models 4

3 LAMP framework for metrics 2

4 Mapping Analytics capabilities to business strategies 2

4 Assessment of Human Capital Management strategies 4

5 Analytics specific to HCM sub systems (Recruitment, Training and

Development, Compensation, Reward and Recognition etc.) 4

6 Models for measuring Human Capital 4

7 Introduction to Human Capital Accounting 4

8 The HC practitioner : Roles & Competencies of the Future HC Leader 2

Total 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended

1. The New HR Analytics – Jac Fitz-enz,(New York:AMACON,2010)

2. The Workforce Scorecard: Managing Human Capital to Execute Strategy(Boston: Harvard

Business School Press,2005) 3. Business Statistics: A First Course, David M. Levine; Timothy C Krehbiel; Mark L Berenson.

4. Armstrong Michael & Baron Angela, 2007, Human Capital Management, Kogan Page

5. Cascio F Wayne, 1999, Costing Human Resources, 4th Edition, South Western College

Publishing

6. Boudreau, Cascio, 2009, Investing in People : Financial Impact of Human Resource Initiatives,

FT Press

7. Fitz-enz Jack Dr., 2009, The ROI of Human Capital : Measuring Economic Value of Employee

Performance, 2nd Edition, AMACOM

8. Fleming John & Asplund Jim, 2007, Human Sigma : Managing the Employee – Customer

Encounter, 1st Edition, Gallup Press


4. Test


6. Assignments



1 HR Analytics SIBM Bangalore

219

Name of

Member

Priya D Gupta Dr. Ajith

Designation Associate Prof. Dy. Director

Org. / Inst. SCMHRD SIBM, Bangalore

Signature


Signature:

Date:

Other members










220


HR Specialization

Course Name: HR Challenges in Mergers and Acquisitions HR P23

Course Code: T2301

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 5


1. To understand and interpret the process of Mergers & Acquisitions 2. To discuss and analyze competencies to manage people and culture related issues during a Mergers

& Acquisitions process 3. To recommend strategies in handling Human Resource in Mergers & Acquisitions

Pedagogy: 1. Case Studies 2. Lectures 3. Student Presentations 4. Role Plays

Pre-learning:

Knowledge of Human Resource Management (Course Code), Talent Management (Course Code),

Performance Management System (Course Course), and Learning& Development (Course Code)

required

221

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Conceptual framework: Concepts of Merger and Acquisition, Difference between Merger and Acquisition, Reasons for Merger and Acquisition, Organizational Growth through Merger and Acquisition, The Indian Scenario of Merger and Acquisition, Overview of HR contributions towards Merger and Acquisition

6

2

Phases of Merger and Acquisition– Pre-acquisition review, Search & Screen Targets, Investigate and Value the Target, Acquire through Negotiation, Post merger integration, Understanding the Strategic dynamics of Merger and Acquisition, Developing and implementing Integration Models

6

3 Legal and Regulatory considerations 2

4

Human Resource Challenges in Mergers and Acquisition– Understanding New Organizational Vision and Mission, Developmental structures and systems, Human Resources policies, Managing Ambiguity, Attracting and retaining high performers, Utilizing and managing excess manpower, Establishing of continuity and integration of culture, Managing insecurity and stress, Organizational Renewal

6

5

Change Management & Culture Integration – Human Resource in Change Management, Managing critical issues like Lay-offs, Post Merger and Acquisition roles Sociocultural Integration in Mergers and Acquisitions People and Cultural Aspects of Mergers and Acquisitions

3

6

Psychological Communication Interventions in Mergers and Acquisitions, Developing a Framework for Cultural Due Diligence in Mergers and Acquisitions, Creating a New Identity and High- Performance Culture

3

7 Employee Engagement- Monetary and non-monetary incentives 2

8 HR competencies in managing Mergers and Acquisitions 2

Total 30

Course OutlineBooks Recommended:

1. Global Mergers and Acquisitions – The Human Resource Challenge by Andrae Charman, Institute

for International Human Resources, Society for Human Resource Management 2. Mergers and Acquisitions – Managing Culture and Human Resources by Edited Günter K. Stahl,

Mark E. Mendenhall, Stanford University Press 3. Advances in Mergers and Acquisitions Edited by Sydney Finkelstrein and Cary Cooper, Emerald

Suggested Evaluation Methods:Quiz, Presentation, Group Assignments, Role Plays

222


HR Specialization

Course Name: HRD Audit and Scorecard HR P19

Course Code: T2297

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4 and 5


41. The objective of this course is to provide valuable insight about the meaning and need for HRD audit and scorecard.

42. The course intends to provide comprehensive evaluation of HR functions in an effort to align it with business goals and strategies.

Learning Outcome:

1. The course will help students to be able to analyze and evaluate different dimensions for HRD scorecard.

2. Students will be able to prepare HRD scorecard for the organization.

Pedagogy: 88. Lecture, 89. Field projects, 90. Assignments, 91. Case studies

Pre-learning:

Students are expected to study Human Resource Management and Organizational Behavior courses before taking up this course.

223

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Introduction of HRD Audit and scorecard, Missionary role of HRD 5

2 HRD systems and strategies 4

3 HRD competencies 4

4 HRD culture and values 4

5 HRD impact and alignment with the business of the organization 4

6 The HR Scorecard - Linking People, strategy and performance HR as a strategic partner - the measurement challenge

3

7 Creating an HR scorecard 3

8 Guidelines for implementing an HR scorecard 3

Total 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended 1. Rao, T. V. (1999). HRD audit: Evaluating the human resource function for business improvement. Response

Books. 2. Becker, B. E., Ulrich, D., Huselid, M. A., &Huselid, M. (2001). The HR scorecard. Harvard Business Press. 3. Rao, T. V. (2008). HRD Score Card 2500: Based on HRD Audit. SAGE India. 4. Rao, T. V., &Rothwell, W. J. (2005). Using the HRD Audit to Build Convergence Between Human Resource

Management and Organization Development. About This Book, 106. 5. Phillips, J. J., Stone, R., & Phillips, P. (2012). The human resources scorecard. Routledge. 6. Rampersad, H. K. (2003). Total Performance Scorecard: redefining management to achieve performance

with integrity. Routledge. 7. The HRD Missionary, T.V. Rao, TV Rao Learning Systems Pvt. Ltd Publication 8. Assessing Management Skills, Dale and Lles, Jaico Books

Other Reading Material:

1. Rao, T. V., Rao, R., &Yadav, T. (2001). A study of HRD concepts, structure of HRD departments, and HRD practices in India. Vikalpa, 26(1), 49-64.

2. Rao, T. V., & Varghese, S. (2009). Trends and challenges of developing human capital in India. Human Resource Development International, 12(1), 15-34.

3. Srimannarayana, M. (2010). Status of HR Measurement in India. Vision: The Journal of Business Perspective, 14(4), 295-307.

4. Hassan, A. (2007). Human resource development and organizational values. Journal of European Industrial Training, 31(6), 435-448.

5. Ulrich, D. (1997). Measuring human resources: an overview of practice and a prescription for results. Human Resource Management, 36(3), 303-320.

6. Rampersad, H. K. (2005). Total performance scorecard: the way to personal integrity and organizational effectiveness. Measuring Business Excellence, 9(3), 21-35.


224

Written Tests, Assignments, Field Project,Quiz, Presentations

Parallel/Similar courses the existing curriculum: S.No. Name of the

course Institute where it was offered

HR Audit IIT Kharagpur. Link: http://erp.iitkgp.ernet.in/ERPWebServices/curricula/CurriculaSyllabus.jsp?st uType=PG&subno=BM61190

HRD Audit and Scorecard

SIBM Pune. Link: http://www.sibm.edu/Programmes/HRAuditandScorecard.html

Name of Member

Dr. Shubhasheesh Bhattacharya

Designation

Professor & Head of the Department - HR

Org. / Inst. SIIB, Pune

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date Other members










http://erp.iitkgp.ernet.in/ERPWebServices/curricula/CurriculaSyllabus.jsp?stuType=PG&subno=BM61190

http://erp.iitkgp.ernet.in/ERPWebServices/curricula/CurriculaSyllabus.jsp?stuType=PG&subno=BM61190

http://www.sibm.edu/Programmes/HRAuditandScorecard.html

225



Course Name: HRD Instruments HR P14

Course Code: T2577

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 3


1. To developan understanding of the theoretical underpinnings of relevant psychological

concepts in the organizational context.

2. To analyze and apply various theoretical models in development of metrics for

organizations

3. To evaluate contributions and limitations of psychometric testing in organizations

Pedagogy:

92. Experiential learning of theoretical concepts through exploration of group dynamics

93. Observation and evaluation of behavior of people in the environment through structured

paradigms introduced in the classroom.

94. Participating in the relevant psychometric tests followed by detailed analysis of the test

items and outputs.

Pre-learning:

Organizational Behavior and Human Resource Management

226

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Introduction to Psychometric Testing:

Application of Psychological concepts in business at Individual, team

and organizational levels

Different steps in development a psychometric test.

Different uses of psychometric tests in organizations.

Pros and cons of Psychometric testing in organizations

4

2

Personal efficacy- understanding internal motives through exploring

self from Johari window.

3

3 Mc. Clelland’s Motives 2

4 ASUFA (Attribution of Success and Failure) 2

5 Emotional Intelligence 4

6 Transactional Analysis 4

7 MBTI (Personal Style Inventory) 4

8 Big Five 2

9 Kolb’s Learning Styles 3

10 OCTAPACE 2

Total ` 30

Books Recommended:

1. Training Instruments in HRD and OD – UdaiPareek – Tata McGraw - Hill

2. Bringing Out the Best In Yourself at Work: How to Use the Enneagram System for

Success (McGraw-Hill, 2004), Ginger Lapid-Bogda, Ph.D.

3. www.TheEnneagramInBusiness.com

4. http://www.enneagraminstitute.com/Business.asp

5. Working Together: Organizational Transactional Analysis and Business Performance

Anita Mountain and Chris Davidson.

6. Transactional analysis in organizations Kerri Phillip

7. Mark Neath, (1995) "Evaluating transactional analysis as a change strategy for

organizations", Leadership & Organization Development Journal, Vol. 16, 1, pp. 13 – 16

8. http://www.myersbriggs.org/more-about-personality-type/mbti-organizations/

9. Emotional Intelligence Daniel Goleman

10. Experiential Learning: David Kolb


Individual and team assignments

Explaining communications like advertisements and speeches from Transactional Analysis

perspective Critiquing characters Empirical Research Study

http://www.theenneagraminbusiness.com/

http://www.enneagraminstitute.com/Business.asp

http://www.myersbriggs.org/more-about-personality-type/mbti-organizations/

https://www.google.com/search?safe=active&sa=G&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor%3A%22Daniel%2BGoleman%22&ei=9blYU4mkGJDKrAfAxIGoDA&ved=0CDcQ9AgwAA

http://books.google.com/books?id=TyKYkQEACAAJ&dq=learning%2Bstyles%2Bkolb&hl=en&sa=X&ei=KLpYU9HGGoOQrQfT64CQDg&ved=0CDgQ6AEwAw

227



Course Name: Human Resource Management HR P2

Course Code: T2572

(UG/PG):PG

Number of Credits:2

Level:3


1. Define the basic concepts, functions, scope & techniques used in HRM.

2. Analyze the various contemporary issues in current scenario.

3. Apply & demonstrate the HR skills of manager towards employees.

4. Interpret various HR policies.

Pedagogy:

1. Lectures

2. Case Study

3. Presentations

4. Role Play

5. Group Activities

Course Outline

228

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Introduction Human Resource Management

Introduction and importance

Evolution of HRM

Difference between Personnel Management & HRM

Role of HR Manager

2

2

Manpower Planning

Labour Markets Forecasting Demand and Supply, Work Scheduling,

Attrition Analysis

Careers

Career Planning

Succession Planning

4

3

Job Analysis, Job Evaluation & Job Design

Job description & Job specification

Job Evaluation- Meaning, Methods Job Design- Job Enlargement, Job Enrichment, Job Rotation

2

4

Recruitment

Recruitment – Assessing Internal and External Conditions; setting up

Recruitment Processes; Strategic Choices in Recruitment.

2

5

Selection

Selection – Objectives and Methods, Elements of Selection Processes.

Relating outcomes/objectives to Methods

2

6

Induction

Introduction to Induction

Concept of Psychological Contract and consequences thereof

2

7

Training & Development

Objective of Training

Training Need Analysis

Methods of Training Training Evaluation

4

8

Performance Appraisal

Definition and importance of performance and potential appraisal

Methods of Performance Appraisal

Barriers to effective performance appraisal Various bias factors affecting performance appraisal

4

9

Compensation Management

Definition and importance

Components of Compensation – wages, salaries, incentives, fringe benefits,

perquisites etc. Approaches to designing compensation plans. Motivation

and Compensation

2

229

10

Employee relations

Concept of employee relations

Role of Trade Unions in Organizations. Factors impacting employer-

employee relations. Changing nature of industrial relations.

Sexual harassment at Workplace

6

Books Recommended

1. Human Resource Management, Aswathappa, K, Tata McGraw Hill

2. Fundamentals of HRM , Stephen Robbins ,Prentice Hall

3. Human resources Management, Dessler, Gary,Prentice Hall, India

4. Human Resource Management,Uday Kumar Haldar, JuthikaSarkar, Oxford

5. Human resource Management, VSP Rao, Excel Books

6. HRM ,Snell Bohlander Vohra, Cengage Publicaiton


7. Test

8. Presentations


10. Projects

Old credit 3 Level 5 New Credit 2 Level 3

Name of

Member

Dr. Asha Nagendra Dr. Suruchi Pandey

Designation Professor Associate Professor


Signature

230



Course : FP38

Course Name: Indirect Taxation

Course Code: T2038

Number of Credits:2

Level:4


1. Develop an understanding of the concepts and provisions of the Income tax Act.


3. Apply the concepts in tax planning and Mgt.

4. Analyse the implications of various taxes on the functioning of the business

Pedagogy: 95. Lectures and PPTs 96. Use of technology in Tax reporting and planning

Pre-learning:

Basic knowledge of financial accounting is advisable.

231

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Basic Concepts: Basic Concepts in Indirect tax, distinction between direct and indirect taxes, basic definitions under indirect tax laws: Excise, Customs, Service tax and VAT

4

2

Excise & Customs Laws: Central Excise Act, 1944 - Basic Concepts and Definition, Procedural Parts in Excise, classification and valuation of goods, transaction value Central Excise Rules and Cenvat Customs Law Act , Rules , Exemptions

8

3

Service Tax Laws: Service Tax - Basic Concepts and Definition, Procedural Parts in Service Tax and VAT, recent changes and case studies, valuation rules, incentives and exemption, inter sectoral credit

10

4 Introduction to VAT & CST Introduction to GST. VAT / CST - Impact & Incidence Goods and Services Taxes

4

5

Tax Planning and Management under indirect tax laws

4

30

Course Outline

Books Recommended 1. Indirect Tax by V.S. Datey

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Written Test



Name of Member




Assistant Professor

Org. / Inst. SITM SITM

Signature

Name of the Expert: V.Ravi KumarSignature: Date:17 August 2013

232



Course Name: Industrial Relations HR P8

Course Code: T2286

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4


43. The objective of this course is to examine in detail the interaction pattern among labour management and the state.

44. To have an insight into the evolution of Trade Unions in India. 45. This course will also impart basic knowledge of the Indian Industrial Relations Systems. 46. To promote understanding of the concept of collective bargaining and the requisite institutional

framework for collective bargaining.

47. To understand the concepts of Employee Empowerment and Participative in Management.

Pedagogy: 97. Case Study 98. Role Play 99. Lecture with PPT

Pre-learning: Basic Concepts of Organizational Behaviour and Human Resource Management

Course Outline

233

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Concept of Industrial Relations, Role of IR Manager, Industrial Disputes,

Industrial Peace, Industrial democracy 3

2. Models of IR –The Systems model, the pluralist approach , Gandhian Approach 2

3 History of Industrial Relations in India & The ID Act 1947 3

4 Industrial Relations and Globalizations 2

5 Trade Unions –Objectives , Functions and Trade Union movement in India 3

6. Changing Role of Trade Unions , Problems of Trade Unions & The Trade

Union Act 1926 2

7 Employers Associations –Objectives , Structure and activities 1

8. Concept of Collective Bargaining , Critical Issues in Collective Bargaining ,

Negotiating a contract, Collective Bargaining in India 5

9. Workers Participation in Management – Various Schemes 5

10 Changing role of the State & Industrial Relations in the developed, newly

developed and developing economies 4

Books Recommended 1. Managing Human Resources: Industrial Relations In Indian Enterprises by – R.S Dwivedi.

To Be Read Along With Industrial Law Vol I & II By P.L.Malik

2. Industrial Relations In India And Worker’s Involvement In Management by – V.P. Michael

(Himalaya Publishing House)

3. Industrial Relations by Arun Monappa ( Tata Mc Graw Hill)

4. Dynamics Of IR – C.B. Mamoria

5. Industrial Relations –Emerging Paradigms by B D Singh

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Case Study, Class Test, Quiz, Project



1 Employment Relations Law SIBM-Bengaluru

2 Labor Law& Industrial Relations -1 SCMHRD

3 Employee Relations & Labour Laws SIIB

4 Industrial Relations & Trade Unionism SIIB

5 Industrial Relations SCMS Noida

6 Labour Laws and Industrial Relations SCMS Pune

7 Labour Economics SIMS

Name of Member Dr. V.V. Ajith Kumar Dr. Asha Nagendra Prof. Lavina Sharma

Designation Deputy Director Professor Assistant Professor

Org. / Inst. SIBM-Bengaluru SIMS SIBM-Pune

234

Name of the Expert: Dr. V.V. Ajith Kumar Signature: Date:

Other members










235


LLM Semester II

INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY & INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

Course Name: Information Technology & Intellectual Property

Course Code: T1253 UG/PG: PG


Level: 5

Learning Objective(s): • To provide a theoretical overview of the intellectual property system and identify how

technology may influence it

• To be able to properly balance legitimate commercial interests against the interests of the general public and the common good.

Pedagogy: 100. Seminar 101. Lecture 102. Discussion 103. Self -Study

Pre-requisites:

• LLB degree

• To pursue One year LLM programme in any recognized centre of SIU.


Course Outline

Sr. No. Topic Hours

236

1 Cyberspace and Digital Media: Introductory Issues

1.1. Introduction 1.2. Jurisdiction issues in Cyberspace 1.3. Threat of IT to IPR

05

2 Information Technology Act 2000

2.1. Objectives and Applicability of the of Information Technology Act 2.2. Authentication of Electronic Documents 2.3. Digital Signatures 2.4. Offences and Penalties – Unauthorized Access, Hacking, Tampering. 2.5. Liability of Network Service Provider 2.6. Cyber Appellate Tribunal 2.7. Recent amendments to Information Technology Act

10

3 Information Technology and Intellectual Property Law

3.1. Introduction 3.2. Copyright in the Electronic Environment 3.2.1. Computer Programs 3.2.2. Downloading 3.2.3. Open Source Software and Copylefting 3.2.4. Data Protection and Copyrights 3.2.5. Linking and Deep Linking 3.3. Patents and Design Rights in the Electronic Environment 3.4. Trademarks and the Electronic Environment

3.4.1. Digital Technology and Trademarks 3.4.2. Trademarks and Domain Names 3.4.3. Domain Name & Commercial Use:

a) Metatags b) Hyperlinks c) Framing

3.4.5. Domain Name Disputes Resolution

10

4 Exploitation and Enforcement of IP in Digital World

4.1. Enforcement of Intellectual Property Rights:

4.1.1. Civil Remedies 4.1.2. Criminal Remedies

05

237

Total 30

Books Recommended

• Anderman, Steven D., The Interface between Intellectual Property Rights and Competition Policy, Cambridge University Press (2007)

• Arena, Christopher. M. Carrearas, Eduardo M., The Business of Intellectual Property, Oxford University Press (2008)

• Bainbridge, David, Intellectual Property Law, 6th Edition, Pearson Longman Publication (2006)

• Bentley & Sherman, Intellectual Property Law, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press (2004)

• Cees, J. Hamelink, The Ethics of Cyberspace, 1st Edition, Sage Publications (2001)

• Cornish & Llewellyn, Intellectual Property: Patents, Copyright, Trade Marks and Allied Rights, 5th Edition. Sweet & Maxwell (2003)

• DesForges, Charles, The Commercial Exploitation of Intellectual Property Rights by Licensing, Thorogood Publishing (2005)

• Hart &Fazzini, Intellectual Property Law, 3rd Edition, Palgrave Macmillan (2003) • Lamoureux, Edward, Lee, Baron, Steven, L. and Stewart, Claire, Intellectual Property Law and

Interactive Media: Free for a Fee (Digital Formations), 1st Edition, Peter Lang Publishing (2009)

• Merges, Robert, Menell, Peter, &Leley, Mark, Intellectual Property in the New Technological Age, Aspen Publishers Inc. (2008)

• Poltorak, Alexander and Lerner, Paul J., Essentials of Licensing Intellectual Property, Wiley Publication (2003)

• Rodney D. Ryder, Intellectual Property and the Internet, Lexis NexisButterworthswadhwa, Nagpur (2004)

• Rosen, Lawrence, Open Source Licensing: Software Freedom and Intellectual Property Law, Prentice Hall PTR (2004)

• Sharma Vakul, Information Technology: Law and Practice (Law & Emerging Technology, Cyber Law & E-Commerce), 3rd Ed., Universal Law Publishing, New Delhi (2011)

• Torremans, Paul. Holyoak and Torremans, Intellectual Property Law, 5th Edition, Oxford University Press (2008)

• Yatindra Singh, Cyber Law, Universal Law Publishing, New Delhi (2010)

Research Papers/Articles recommended for reading: updated and latest papers/ articles to be supplied by the instructor.

Suggested Evaluation Methods All external courses will have 60% internal component and 40% external component [University] examination. Methodology of Internal Assessment will be at least 4 components from the following list of assessment methods:

• Seminar Presentations

238

• One written test

• Viva Voce

• Essays

• Project, Group projects and Dissertations

• Cases and open problems

• Work based Assessment

• Multiple choice Questions

• Problems

• Short Answer Questions

• Learning logs/ diaries

• Computer based Assessment

• Single Essay Examination

• Reflective practice Assignments

• Modified Essay Questions

• Simulation

• Objective Structured Clinical Examinations

Parallel/Similar courses in the existing curriculum S.No. Name of the course Institute where it was offered

Name of Member

Dr. Shashikala Gurpur

Prof. Swapnil Bangali

Dr. Rupal Rautdesai

Prof. Amol Sapatnekar

Designation Director Asst. Professor

Asst. Professor & In-charge – Technology & Innovation Law

Teaching Associate & Dy. In-charge – Technology & Innovation Law

Org. / Inst. SLS, Pune SLS, Pune SLS, Pune SLS, Pune

Signature

Name of the Expert: Adv. Marzia Dalal, Patent Attorney, Pune Dr. Nilima Chandiramani, Principal, N G Law College, Thane Adv. R. Muralidharan, Krishna & Saurastri Associates, Bangalore Dr. Aravind Chinchure, Asst. Vice President – Innovations, Reliance Innovation Leadership Centre Dr. V. N. Paranjape, Chief Legal Officer, Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

Signature: Date

239



Post Graduate

Course : FP21

Course Name: Insurance Management

Course Code: T2021


Level:4


1. Compare and contrast different insurance products. 2. Describe the roles of different parties involved in Insurance 3. Appraise the regulatory framework related to insurance.

Pedagogy: 104. Basic Concepts to be covered through Theory 105. Case Studies of different companies to be included 106. Presentations by students on current insurance products

Pre-learning:

Economics Financial Management

240

Course Outline

241

Insurance Management

2 Credits


1

Overview and Analysis of Indian Insurance Sector

Understanding Insurance Business

a) Life Insurance

b) Non-Life Insurance c) Health Insurance

3

2

Segment-wise Products and Actuarial Design & Pricing

a) Products in life insurance b) Products in non-life insurance

c) Factors considered by actuary in pricing

4.5

3

Unit Linked Insurance Plans (ULIPs)

Detailed Analysis & Financial Modeling of ULIPs

Constructing & analyzing ULIPs unit pricing & return models

a) Type I ULIP & return model b) Type II ULIP & return model

c) Model for NAV calculation for all funds

4.5

4

Fundamental & Financial Analysis and Risk Management

Detailed Analysis of Insurance companies including risk management

Profitability & Solvency for Insurance Companies

a) Mathematical Reserves & Actuarial Valuation b) Solvency Margin & Capital Requirements

1.5

5

Risks Faced by Insurers & Reinsurance

a) Contingency Risks b) Investment Risks c) Reinsurance as external source of capital

3

Treasury, Investments & ALM

a) Bond Yields & Fair value change b) Spread Compression & Expansion

c) Effect of Interest rate changes on Investments

3

Understanding Pension Plans

a) Types of Pension Plans b) Annuity Options c) Opportunities & Challenges in pension sector

3

Analyzing Annual Reports & Financial Performance

a) Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) b) Revenue Account Analysis c) ULIP Break-up Annexure Revenue Account d) Participating Line of Business Analysis e) Profit & Loss Analysis

4.5

242

f) Balance Sheet Analysis

Understanding different distribution channels

a) Tied Agency

b) Banc assurance

c) Brokers

1.5

Regulations & Guidelines

Understanding financial implications of IRDA Regulations & Guidelines

a) IRDA ULIP guidelines b) IRDA Preparation of Financial Statements regulations

c) IRDA Investment regulations

1.5

30

Books Recommended 9. Uma Narang (2013), "Insurance Industry in India Features, Reforms and Outlook "

Jain Books 10. M.J. Mathew, “Insurance Principles and Practice” RBSA Publishers, Jaipur 11. Anand Ganguly, “Insurance Management” New Age International Publishers 12. R. Haridas, “Life Insurance in India” New Century Publications, New Delhi 13. Websites of Insurance Companies 14. Research reports by FICCI, BCG and CII 15. Annual Reports of Insurance Companies 16. IRDA ULIP Guidelines 17.


Exams Presentations


Name of Member



Designation Assitant Professor

Teaching Associate


243

Signature

Time


SignatureDate:17 August 2013 INTEGRATED DISASTER MANAGEMENT PROGRAMME at

Symbiosis Institute of Management Studies (SIMS) MBA 2020-22 on Microsoft Teams (Group 1) (Div A, B & C)

6th July 2021 7th July 2021

Tue Wed

Environmen Disasters & Management of disaster Through 3Phases & Assessment Introduction to First Aid, & Assessme

9.30am- Prof. Nitin Dixit Handling of Medical Emergencies,

11.30am Handling of Injury Emergencies Prof. Shashi

Dr. Monesh

Emergency methods for carrying of casualty-lecture

Practical Training

Accident Pr

Rescue operation in different types of Emergencies CPR, AED machine – Registration

Demonstration Dr.Monesh Prof. Shashi

11.30am-

1.30pm Fire –Home Safety, Workplace Safety & Assessment

Prof. Shailesh Naik

1.30pm-

2.30pm

Lunch break

Lunch Break

Lunch Brea

2.30pm –

4.30pm Role of Community & Assessment

Prof.Nitin Dixit

Exam of 30 marks Exam of 70

Note: Attending all the online classes is mandatory to appear for online examination.

244

Sub Committee for Curriculum Development Marketing Specialization

Course Name: Integrated Marketing Communication Number of Credits: 2


Level: 5

Learning Objective(s): After the completion of this course, a student shall be able to : • Identify and explain different approaches to Marketing communication & also how to analyse and apply

specific communication tools.

• Leverage various media options for building brand value and communication strategies.

• Compare and choose between the different tools taught under Integrated Marketing

Communication.

• Examine scenarios and able to select proper budgeting methods for IMC purposes.

• Compose the strategic and tactical aspects of IMC enabling comprehensive IMC

decisions.

Pedagogy: 107.Lecture

108.Case Study 109.Projects

110.Group Presentation

Pre-learning:


Course Outline

Sr. No.

Topic Hours

4. Understanding Marketing Communications a. Drivers to IMC

b. Communication process c. Redefining the scope of IMC

3

245

d. Barriers to IMC

5. Models of Marketing Communication ( evolution) a. AIDA

b. Black box c. DAGMAR

d. HAM e. FCB

3

6. Marketing Communication Mix ATL Vs. BTL

Traditional Media ( Print/ Broadcast/ Electronic) Advertising, Personal selling, Sales Promotion, PR, Direct Marketing

Sponsorships, Exhibitions, Packaging, POP, digital, Word of Mouth, Corporate Identity.

Factors affecting MCM.

4

7. Creating the IMC Plan a. Situation Analysis

b. Marcom Objectives c. Budget planning

d. Developing a Marketing Communications program e. Evaluation and Control of Marketing Communication Program

4

8. Creative & Media Strategy a. Designing an effective message

b. Creative options and formats c. Promotion appeals

d. Creative stages

5

9. Media strategy & Marketing Communication Delivery ( integrating multiple channels) a. Evaluating Media options

b. Merging media and creative strategy c. Analysing brand context

d. Determining relevance of Brand context e. Appreciation of customer insight

4

10. Marketing Communication budget planning

a. Budgeting Methods

b. Allocation of budget

c. The budgeting process

2

11. Ethics and Legal issues in IMC 2

12. Cases and contemporary issues in IMC : Best campaigns, current Strategies etc. 3

Total Hours 30

Textbooks and Reference Material:

246

1. IMC The next Generation by Don Schultz. Tata Mc Graw Hill

2. Integrated Marketing Communications: strategic Planning perspectives 3/e Keith. J Tuckwell. Pearson’s

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Evaluation: 2 credits – 100 marks Internal – 60 marks

e. Assignments ( model application) - 20 marks (Individual)

f. 2 Projects ( strategy design) / (Communication analysis)- 30 marks (Group)

g. Case Study/ Project presentation - 20

h. Class Test –- 20 marks

ii) External- 40 marks

247


Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Format to submit syllabus

Course Name: Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) (semester III – IB elective)

Course Code: T1237

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 3


The objective of this course is to create awareness amongst future managers in the

Corporate World of the importance of Intellectual Property as understood in the

context of TRIPS and WTO

Pedagogy:

• Simulation Exercise

• Colloquium, debate

• Project

• Empirical analysis survey

• Statistical analysis of efficacy of Law on economics

• Critical research activity (groups)

• Opinion on articles

• Encourage group task duly regarding individual performance

• Films & other Audio-video aid

• Lecture Method

• Case study

• Case Laws

• Self Learning

• Field Trips

• Moot Court

• Student Presentation

• Dramatization of the famous business trials

• Book Review

• Participatory Learning Method

248

Pre-requisites: Legal Aspects of Business

Course Outline

S. No. Topic Hours

1. Introduction to Legal concepts 2

2 Patent Law: National & International scenario. 9

3 Trademarks and Designs 6

4 Copyrights 9

5 Trade Secrets, Geographical Indication 4

Total 30

Books Recommended

1. Intellectual Property Rights & the Law by Dr GB Reddy (Gogia Law Agency)

2. Intellectual Property Rights by DE Bouchoux (Cengage Learning India Edition)

3. Law relating to Patents, Trademarks, Copyrights, Designs & Geographical Indications

by BL Wadhera (Universal Law)

4. Intellectual Property & Competitive Strategies in the 21st century by Shahid Ali Khan

& Raghunath Mashelkar.


\


Case Study, Group Discussion, Test



1 Intellectual Property Rights SIMS (UG)

Name of

Member

Dr.

Shashikal

a Gurpur

Dr.

Bindu

Ronald

Prof.

Surya

Rashmi

Rawat

Prof.

Swapnil

Bangali

Prof.

Deepak

Roy

Dr.

Mita

Mehta

Prof.Shridhar

Potdar

Designatio

n

Director Associat

e

Professo

r

Asst.

Professo

r

Asst.

Professo

r

Associate

Professor

Associa

te

Profess

or

Adjunct

Professor

Org. / Inst. SLS, Pune

SLS, Pune

SLS, Pune

SLS, Pune

SCMHR

D

SIMS SSBM

Signature

Name of the Expert: Dr. Shashikala Gurpur, Director SLS, Pune, Dean Faculty of Law

Signature:Date: 13/8/13

249



Post Graduate

Course : FP 23

Course Name: International Banking

Course Code: T2023


Level:4


48. Analyse banking operations in international context 49. Analyse the methods of cross border banking and finance

Pedagogy: 111. Interactive classroom session 112. Case study 113. Group assignment/presentation

Pre-learning: Macro Economics

250

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Global trends and recent development in International banking

2

2 Overview of International financial system

2

3 Balance of trade and balance of payments

2

4 Globalization

2

5 Foreign exchange and exchange markets

2

6 Exchange Rates

2

7 Financing international trade

4

8 Correspondent banking

2

9 Operations of foreign branches of Indian banks

2

10 International financial institutions

2

11 Off shore banking

2

12 Resource raising in international Capital markets

2

13 International settlements, SWIFT etc

2

14 Structured Finance Products

2

30

Course Outline

Books Recommended

1. Multinational Business Finance, Eitmen, Stonehill, 12th Edition, Pearson Education 2. International Finance by Madura J., TMH 3. International Finance by Apte P G, TMH

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Periodical written test/quiz Group assignment End term written test



1 International Banking SSBM Pune

251

Name of Member

Mr. Shridhar Potdar





Adjunct Faculty


Signature


Signature:

Date:17 August 2013

252



Course Name: International Business and Global Strategy

Course Code: T2397

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4


50. Analyse the economic, political and social factors affecting International Business in various markets of the world

51. Construct specialized knowledge of business in one geographical region of the world 52. Compare and contrast business strategies in different contexts

Pedagogy:

1. Self study and research 2. Interviews with expertise in different regions 3. One-on-one guidance (between Faculty and student)

Pre-learning:

Foundation courses in International Business

253

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Introduction: Area Studies and International Business 2

2 State-Market Relations in Various Countries 4

3 Presentations on Selected Countries/Regions 6

4 Guest lectures by business leaders/experts on selected regions 4

5 Topic/case study by each student focusing on selected region 4

6 One-on-one interaction with Faculty 6

7 Presentation on India and the selected region: prospects and challenges

for business 4

Total 30

Course Outline

Books/Articles Recommended

Gilpin, R. (2001), Global Political Economy: Understanding the International Economic Order,

Princeton: Princeton University Press

Rugman, A.M. (ed., 2008), The Oxford Handbook of International Business, New York: Oxford

University Press

Goldsmith, Arthur A. Business, Government, Society: The Global Political Economy, Richard D. Irwin, 1996.

Sylvia Maxfield and Ben Ross Schneider, Business and the State in Developing Countries

(1997)


Presentations


254

Name of Member

Dr.AnithaRamanna- Pathak

Dr. Ratna P. A

Prof SmitaSantoki

Prof .Ishita Dutt

Prof. Deepak Havaldar

Designation Adjunct Faculty Assistant


Assistant Professor

Assistant Professor

Org. / Inst. SIIB SIOM SIIB SCMS SCMS

Signature

Name of the Expert: Dr. Anitha Ramanna-Pathak

Signature:

Date:

255

Course : FP73



Course Name: International Finance

Course Code: T2073


Level: 5


1. Describe the functioning of International markets 2. Evaluate the nature of Forex markets, International risk management and hedging

instruments. 3. Compare and contrast different instruments used in the forex markets.

Pedagogy: 114. Lecture 115. Case Study 116. Newspaper clipping 117. Website 118. Research papers

Pre-learning:

• Sources of Finance

• International Business

• Financial Markets • Risk

256

S.No. Topic Hours

1. Overview of Financial Management in International context, Country & Political risk:-

a) Exchange rate risk b) Interest rates c) Inflation rates

2

2. Foreign Exchange Markets:- a) Spot and Forwards Exchange Rates b) Eurocurrency and Domestic Interest Rates

2

3. International Monetary System 1

4. The Foreign exchange market a) Types of transactions b) Exchange rate quotations and Arbitrage

2

5. Parity conditions in International Finance a) Purchasing Power Parity b) Covered Interest Parity c) Real Interest Parity d) Parity Conditions and Managerial Implications

2

6. Forecasting Exchange Rates determination and forecasting

a) Structural model of exchange rate determination b) Time Series Forecasting Models

2

7.

Foreign Exchange Risk Management Exposure Management- Operating, Transaction and Translation Hedging & speculation Managing exposure to exchange rate fluctuation

2

8. Management of Interest rate Exposure FRA (forward rate agreements), Interest rate caps and floors

2

9.

International Capital Market a) International capital and money markets b) International Bond Market c) International Equity Market

2

10.

International Sources of funds a) Bond Financing (Fixed and Floating Rate Notes) b) Loan Financing (Syndicated Loans) c) Securitised Financing (Euronote) d) Equity Financing (GDR and ADR) e) Loan Agreements

1

11. International Financing Decision

a) Issues in Overseas Funding Choices b) Economic Circumstances and overall Funding Choices c) Funding and Risk Management Aspects

2

12. International Capital Budgeting, Cost of Capital of a Foreign Investment 2

13.

Financial swaps and currency derivatives a) Currency Forwards b) Currency Options c) Currency Futures d) Currency Swaps e) Interest Rate Risk Management

2

14. Accounting Implications of Forex Transactions 1

257

15.

Global Asset Management:- a) Current Asset Management b) International Portfolio Investment c) Foreign direct investment strategy d) Multinational capital expenditure analysis e) Political risk Management

2

15.

Global Reporting and Controlling a) Multinational accounting b) International Taxation c) International transfer pricing

1

16 Case Studies 2

Course Outline

Books Recommended

1. Multinational Financial Management: Allen Shapiro 2. Multinational Business Finance: Eitman Stonehill, Pearson 3. International Corporate Finance :Madura Jeff, Thompson Learning, New Delhi 4. Options, Futures and other Derivatives :John C Hull, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi 5. International Finance: Apte P.G, Tata McGraw- Hill, New Delhi.

258

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Examinations


1. International Financial Management SIIB 2. International Financial Management SIBM-P

3. International Finance SIBM-B

4. International Finance SCMHRD

5. International Finance SIOM

Name of Member

Prof. Arti Chandani

Designation Asst. Prof.

Org. / Inst. SIMS

Signature


Signature:

Date:17 August 2013

259


Human Resource Management Course Name: International Human Resource Management HR P13

(UG/PG): PG Number of Credits: 2


53. The objective of this course is to enable students to be more sensitive to cross-cultural issues and understanding of international approaches to dealing with people in organizations.

54. The course seeks to look at HRM in a broader, comparative and international perspective to deal with complex issues and manifold risks.

Pedagogy: 119. Case Study

120. Group Discussion 121. Lecture with PPT

122. Role Play 123. Group Discussion

Pre-learning: 1. Basic concepts of Human Resource Management

260

Course Outline

Books Recommended

S.No. Topics Hours

1 Human Resource in a comparative perspective 2

2. Internationalization of HR Activities 2

3 Cultural Foundations of International Human Resour ce Management 3

4 Global Staffing & Global workforce Training and Development 3

5 Developing International Staff and Multi Cultural Teams 3

6. Cultural Factors/ Issues in Performance Management 3

7 Approaches to International Compensation 3

8. Repatriation 3

9. Managing Global Diverse Work Force & Multiculturalism 3

10 Industrial Relations in a comparative Perspective 3

11 HR/IR issues in MNC’s and Corporate Social Responsibility 2

1. International Human Resource Management, 2/E, © 2004 Anne-Wil Harzing and Joris Van Ruysseveldt (eds.), SAGE Publications Ltd., London, 499 pp. ISBN 0-7619-4039-1 and ISBN 0-

7619-4040-5 2. International Human Resource Management, Peter J. Dowling (Author), Denice E. Welch

3. International Human Resource Management (Global HRM) by Dennis R. Briscoe and Randall S. Schuler (Aug 7, 2004)

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Case Study, Class Test, Quiz, Project

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref%3Dntt_athr_dp_sr_1?_encoding=UTF8&sort=relevancerank&search-alias=books&field-author=Peter%20J.%20Dowling

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref%3Dntt_athr_dp_sr_2?_encoding=UTF8&sort=relevancerank&search-alias=books&field-author=Denice%20E.%20Welch

http://www.amazon.com/International-Human-Resource-Management-Global/dp/0415338344/ref%3Dsr_1_1?s=books&ie=UTF8&qid=1318928034&sr=1-1

http://www.amazon.com/Dennis-R.-Briscoe/e/B001IQZEHO/ref%3Dsr_ntt_srch_lnk_1?qid=1318928034&sr=1-1

http://www.amazon.com/Randall-S.-Schuler/e/B001H6PPYW/ref%3Dsr_ntt_srch_lnk_1?qid=1318928034&sr=1-1

http://www.amazon.com/Randall-S.-Schuler/e/B001H6PPYW/ref%3Dsr_ntt_srch_lnk_1?qid=1318928034&sr=1-1

261



Course Name: International Logistics

Course Code: T2593

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4


1. Analyze the basic operation of each of the components of a logistics system

2. Compare and contrast the systems nature of the logistics process

2. To prioritize opportunities for comprehensive analysis and discussion of key contemporary problems in transportation

Pedagogy:

14. Lectures

15. Case Studies

16. International Business Simulations

17. Team Activities

Pre-learning:

262

Basics of International Business, Geography and Trade Routes

Course Outline:


HOURS

1 International Logistics: Meaning, Scope & Importance of logistics

in international business

2

2 Different Types of Cargo: Packing requirement & types of vessels

for exports

2

3 Types of Shipping Services: Liner & Tramp Services 2

4 Containerization: Types of Container sizes, FCL, LCL Containers 2

5 Inland Container Depot: Concept of Dry Ports, ICDs, Import

Export Warehoses, Container Freight Station (CFS) and Container

Yards (CY)

2

6 Storage & Warehousing in International Logistics chain 2

7 International Physical distribution of manufacturing locations &

target markets surveyed as part of the supply chain & as an

essential component of the global strategy

2

8 Differences between domestic & international physical

transportation, infrastructure and the availability of modes (Multi

modal)

2

9 Global Supply Chain-Brief introduction and related concepts 2

10 International logistics cost 3

11 Documentation for shipping 3

12 International air Freighting 3

13 Role of CHA Freight Forwarder 3

Total 30

263

Books Recommended

6) Global Supply Chain Management and International Logistics by Alan E.

Branch

7) International Logistics by Donald F. Wood, Anthony P. Barone, Paul R.

Murphy, Daniel L. Wardlow

8) Logistics in International Business by Rajiv Aserkar

9) International Logistics by Pierre David


11) International Logistics by Pierre David

Additional Reading:

International Logistics by Pierre David, Biztantra Publications New

Delhi

Websites Recommended:

www.fieo.org

www.dgft.gov.in

www.exim.net

www.worldshipping.org


5. Class tests

6. Assignments


8. Presentations

Name of

Member

Prof

M.K.Gandhi


Faculty

Org. / Inst. SIMS

Signature

http://www.fieo.org/

http://www.dgft.gov.in/

http://www.exim.net/

http://www.worldshipping.org/

264



Course Name: International Marketing



Level- 4/5

Learning Objective(s): After the completion of this course the student should be able to:

1. Develop an understanding of current context and competitive nature of International marketing environment.

2. Apply the knowledge and skills to devise and implement appropriate marketing strategy. 3. Appraise themselves with various current marketing tools and practices for successful

strategies to enter, conquer & sustain in the foreign markets & eventually earn a global presence required for an industry ready marketing professional

Pedagogy:

124. Lecture 125. Case Study

126. Projects

Pre-learning:


265

S. No. Topic Hours

13. Need for international trade, international trade theories, globalization 2

14.

Difference between domestic and international trade, why companies goes global, EPRG concept, country analysis, environment in international market

(SWOT, PESTEL, Porter five forces), organizations associated with international trade (WTO,UNCTAD, IMF, World Bank etc.)

2

15.

Entry and expansion strategies for international market (Export, joint ventures, strategic alliances, merger and acquisitions, franchising etc.),

international marketing research

6

16. Cross cultural issue in international marketing (negotiation, communication),

segmentation, targeting, and positioning 4

17.

Marketing mix in international marketing Product adaptation,

Pricing, Distribution, Promotion,

Logistics Issues in internal marketing

12

18. Managing global brands including IMC, packaging and labeling, use of

technology in international marketing 4

Course Outline

Books Recommended

1. Cateora, Graham, and Salwan, International Marketing 2. Keegan Warren, Global Marketing Management

3. Craig C. Samuel, Global Marketing Strategy


3. Projects 4. Research article review and presentation

266



Format to submit syllabus Course Name : Introduction to Business Intelligence

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): • Business Intelligence is a top priority among many companies today. Various

companies are planning to increase Business Intelligence investments, making BI their top technology priority.

• To provide greater business insight for all levels of the corporation, from executive staff to line of business managers and other staff.

Pedagogy:

1) Conceptual Inputs 2) Lab/classroom Practical’s

3) Group Assignments/Presentations

Pre-learning: Course Outline

267

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Data Warehousing Introduction, Data Warehouse, Multidimensional Data Model, Data

Warehouse Architecture, Implementation, Further Development

6

2

Data mining

• Data partitioning • Training, validation and holdout samples

• Open ended exploration as opposed to a strict view on inference • Over sampling rare events

• Danger of over fitting

6

3

Exploratory data analysis-Data pre-processing • Visualization

• Variable reduction, principal components • Curse of dimensionality

6

4

DATA PREPROCESSING, LANGUAGE, ARCHITECTURES, CONCEPT DESCRIPTION Why Preprocessing, Cleaning, Integration,

Transformation, Reduction, Discrimination, Concept Hierarchy Generation, Data Mining Primitives, Query Language, Graphical User Interfaces, Architectures, Concept Description, Data Generalization,

Characterizations, Class Comparisons, Descriptive Statistical Measures.

6

5

RECENT TRENDS Multidimensional Analysis and Descriptive Mining of Complex Data Objects, Spatial Databases, Multimedia Databases, Time Series and Sequence Data, Text Databases, World Wide Web, Applications and

Trends in Data Mining

6

Books Recommended 1 Adriaans, P. (1996), Data mining, Addison-Wesley Addison-Wesley

2 Margaret Dunham, Data Mining: Introductory and Advanced Topics, Prentice Hall

Prentice Hall

3 Jiawei Han and Micheline Kamber, Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers

Morgan Kaufmann Publishers

4 Weiss, Sholom M.. - Predictive data mining : a practical guide / Sholom M. Weiss, Nitin Indurkhy. - San Francisco, Calif. :



Suggested Evaluation Methods: 1. Written Test

2. Lab Practical’s 3. Group Assignments/Presentations

268


Entrepreneurship Specialization Format to submit syllabus

Course Name: Introduction to Entrepreneurship Course No. ENTRE U 1

Course Code: T2339 (UG/PG): UG Number of Credits: 2 Level: 2 Learning Objective(s): After finishing the course, the students will be able

🟃 To have an insight about the lives of different entrepreneurs

🟃 To outline qualities and comprehend the concept of entrepreneurship

🟃 To discuss various processes involved in entrepreneurial venture

Pedagogy: ICT, Interactive, Case Based, Experiential Pre-learning: NA

S.No. Topic Hours

1 The entrepreneurial Perspective: The Evolution and role of entrepreneurs in emerging economies, The entrepreneurial and

Intrapreneurial mindset, Qualities of entrepreneurs.

6

2

Creativity and Innovation

Importance of Creativity and Innovation, Myths about Innovation, Innovative thinking, Innovation Process, creative problem solving

Techniques

6

3

Idea-Opportunity, New Venture creation

Sources of business Ideas, Methods of generating new ideas,

Opportunity evaluation, 5 Q Model; John Mullins seven Domain

Model

6

4 Product/Service Development Life Cycle Product /service planning, Idea-Concept-Development-Test marketing-manage-grow-exit;

6

5 Business Plan: Content and Use of business plan,

6

269

Executive summary, Operations, Team, marketing, finance

30

Books Recommended

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Case Analysis Mini Projects Presentations



Business Entrepreneruship SCMS, Pune

Name of Member

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Name of the Expert: Prof. Vinod Shastri Signature: Date: 01.08.2013

270



Post Graduate

Course: FP15

Course Name: Introduction to Financial Markets and Institutions

Course Code: T2015


Level:5

Learning Objective(s) Students will be able to

1. Describe & Analyze the structure, functions and roles of financial markets and institutions

Pedagogy: 127. Problem solving 128. Case Studies 129. Presentations

Pre-learning:

Economics

271

Course Outline

272

S.No. Topic Hours

Section I – Financial Markets

2 credit

30 Hrs.

1 Introduction: 3

The Structure of the Indian Financial System – Financial Markets, Financial Institutions and Financial Instruments.

Role of Financial Intermediaries in Economic Development with reference to Financial Institutions

Financial Intermediation

2 Money Market 4

Functions

Participants

Sub markets/Instruments:

1. Interbank call/notice money market

2. Inter-Bank term deposit market

3. Bill market: The Treasury and Commercial bill

4. Participation Certificate

5. Commercial Paper

6. Certificate of Deposits

7. Money Market Mutual Fund

8. Repo – Reverse Repo Market

3 Capital Market 7

History of the Indian Capital Market

Primary market

1. Functions

2. Participants and Intermediaries – Merchant Banker, Banker to an Issue, Underwriter

3. Primary issues: Public issue, Rights, Private placement, Bonus, Preferential issue

4. Process of offering new issues to the public – Book building, Green shoe option, ASBA, Online IPOs and FPOs

Secondary Market

1. Role of a Stock Exchange

273

2. The Stock Exchanges of India: BSE, NSE, Inter connected Stock Exchange of India Ltd., MCX-SX, United Stock Exchange,

3. Organization, management and membership of stock exchanges – stock market indices for both NSE and BSE - Listing of securities - Trading and settlement: Rules and regulations, Circuit Breakers, trading arrangements and settlement.

4. Instruments in capital Market: Equity- Shares with or without differential voting rights, preference shares, Debt securities - Corporate bond, corporate debentures, PSU bonds, Dated G-Secs etc.

5. Market Infrastructure Institutions: Clearing corporations, Depositories, Depository participants, Custodians, Registrar and Transfer Agents.

Regulators: SEBI,IRDA,PFRDA

Their working and functions

Section II (Financial Institutions)

4 Classification of financial institutions: 1

Banks and Non-banks (NBFIs), Difference between banks and non-banks

5 Commercial banks and Cooperative banks: 5

Detailed classification of commercial banks(ownership based): Private and Public sector, Classification as scheduled and non-scheduled,

Public sector commercial Banks: Nationalized, State Bank Group and Special Public Sector Bank. Reasons behind nationalization of banks – Arguments for and against nationalization, Progress of banks post nationalization, Commercial banks and their functions

Private sector Banks: Foreign and Indian, Indian old and new private sector banks - Their progress since their inception

Cooperative credit in India:

An introduction to structure of short and long term cooperative credit - State Cooperative Banks, Central Cooperative Banks, Primary Agricultural Cooperative Credit Societies, State Cooperative Agricultural and Rural Development Banks, Primary State Cooperative Agricultural and Rural Development Banks: Their organization, functions, working and progress

Urban cooperative banks: Their organization, functions and progress

Non-Banking Institutions:

Insurance, Brokerages, Merchant Bankers, Mutual Funds and Exchange Traded Funds

Alternative Asset Classes : Private Equity,Hedge Funds and Real Estate Funds

Rating Agencies: Role and Functions

3

6 The Reserve Bank of India 3

Evolution

274

Organization and management

Functions as Currency authority, Banker to the Government, Bankers’ bank, Other promotional and regulatory functions

Its subsidiary and associate institutions

7 Debt Markets- Government and Corporate Bond Markets 2

8

Derivatives-Introductions to Forwards,Futures and Options

2

Books Recommended 18. Saunders, Cornett, (2011),” Financial Markets & Institutions” Tata Mc Graw Hill 19. L M Bhole & Jitendra Mahakud (2009), “ Financial Institutions ans Markets” Tata

McGraw-Hill Education 20. Frederic S. Mishkin:"Financial Markets and Institutions (7th Edition)" The Prentice

Hall Series in Finance 21. L.M.Bhole, “Financial Institutions and Markets: Structure, Growth and Innovations”

Tata McGraw-Hill Education 22. Suraj Bhan Gupta, “Monetary Economics” S. Chand Publications 23. Reserve Bank of India – Functions and Working (RBI publication) 24. All relevant and latest Master Circulars issued by the RBI



Name of Member




Teaching Associate


Signature


Signature:Date:17 August 2013

275




Course Name: Introduction to Operations Management

Course Code: T2184

(UG/PG): PG


Code: OMP23

Level: 4


4. To familiarize the basic concepts in Operations Management and its relevance in present business environment.

5. To discuss various issues related to location, layout, line balancing etc. 6. To analyze the different models of inventory management. 7. To study the basic concepts of quality management.

Pedagogy:

• Lectures supported by examples, case studies • Assignments on various Operations concept in Various organizations

Pre-learning: None

276

Sr. No. Topic Hours

1

Concept of manufacturing and operations management, engineering, productivity, efficiency, utilization, difference between product and service, interrelationship between productivity, profitability and materials

3.5

2 Locating production and service facilities: importance of location, factors affecting the decision of selecting a location

2.5

3

Layout planning: Layout concept, development of a process layout, product layout, factors affecting layout selection, new trends in manufacturing layouts, process selection and break-even analysis

3.5

4 Introduction to line balancing, cycle time, determination of work station efficiency, sensitivity analysis

3.5

5

Introduction to work study, method study and work measurement, techniques of establishing standard time for an operation, application of a standard time, concept of an average worker, allowance, rating factor in calculation of a standard time, machine/man hour calculation, Learning curve, value analysis, value engineering

4.0

6

Material Handling: As a necessary evil, indicators of poor material handling, principles of a good material handling system, material handling equipment

3.0

7 Purchase and Procurement activities, principles, procedures and practices: 5Rs of purchasing, price determination, price forecasting

2.5

8

Inventory Management – definition of inventory, purpose of inventory, types of inventory, inventory costs, Inventory Management, ABC Analysis

3.5

9

Concept of quality control, design quality vs. manufactured quality, SQC techniques, sampling techniques, sampling plans, Ishikawa diagram, SQC charts, chance and assignable causes, X-r charts, P charts, np charts, c-charts, sampling errors, Quality Management: ISO9000-2000, 14001,QS/TS9000, TQM

4

Total Hours 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended 1. Operations Management for Competitive Advantage by Chase, Jacobs & Aquilano, Tata McGraw Hill. 2. Operations Management by Roberta Russell & Bernard Taylor, Prentice Hall India, 4th Edition 3. Principles of Operations Management by Heizer Jay & Render Barry, Prentice Hall. 4. Operations Management Theory and Practice” B.Mahadevan, Pearson 5. Operations Management: Strategy and Analysis by Krajewski Lee J. & Ritzman Larry P, Pearson

Education Asia / 2002


• Class Assignments • Involvement in class activities • Examination

277



1 Operations Management SIBM-B

2 Operations Management – I SCMHRD


4 Operations Management SIIB

5 Production and Operations Management SIMS

Name of Member



Dr. Suresh Jakhar

Prof. Shirish Jeble

Designation


Assistant Professor

Assistant Professor


Signature


Signature:


278

Course : FP49



Course Name: Introduction to Trade Finance and FOREX

Course Code: T2049


Level :4


4. Describe the functioning of International markets 5. Evaluate the nature of Forex markets, International risk management and hedging

instruments. 6. Compare and contrast different instruments used in the forex markets.

Pedagogy:

130. Lecture/PPT 131. Case Study 132. Role Play 133. Simulation

Pre-learning:

• Sources of Finance

• International Business

• Financial Markets

• Risk

279

S.No. Topic Hours

1.

Evolution of foreign exchange Markets: Overview of international financial system, Exchange rate regimes, Convertibility on current & capital account, Indian markets & operating environment under FEMA

2

2. Foreign Exchange markets in India and International FOREX Markets:, Ready & Forward rates, Concept of covered interest parity,

2

3.

International Exchange System: Exchange controls governing use of forward contracts & other derivatives by corporates in India, How banks quote exchange rates, FOREX market as facilitators of international trade & services transactions & cross border flows of capital,

2

4. International financial market: LIBOR system Different equity & debt instruments used to raise funds in International markets,

2

5. Foreign Exchange market: Concept in managing Exchange rate risk: Risk and exposure, Types of Exposure, Hedging process, Hedging instruments,

2

6.

Risk Management Policy-framework, Identification, Measurement, Management, Some cases in exchange rate risk Management, Exchange Control requirement, Transit Risk Management, Risk: Interest rate, Exchange (transaction, translation and economic)

2

7. Balance of Payments 2

8. International Financial Institutions 2

9. Derivatives instruments: Futures & options 2

10. Short-Term, Medium Term and Long term trade finance, Bank Guarntees 2

11. Spot and Forward Exchange rates / Cross Rates 2

12. Interbank dealings 1

13. International Trade / LC Mechanism / UCPDC 1

14 Documentation In Foreign Trade 1

15. Project exports and investment abroad 1

16 EXIM Bank / ECGC 2

17 Case Studies 2

Books Recommended

7. International Finance: by Maurice D Levi 8. International Finance by Nagpal C. S & Mittal A. C 9. Foreign Exchange, international finance and Risk management by Rajwade A. V 10. An introduction to Western Financial markets by Valdez Stephen 11. How to manage foreign exchange risk by Raghu Palat 12. International financial management by P.G. Apte 13. Foreign Exchanges by Jeevanandam

280


• Assignment • Exam

• Quiz

• Presentation

• Live projects



1. International Financial Management SIIB 2. International Financial Management SIBM-P

Name of Member

Prof. Arti Chandani


Org. / Inst. SIMS

Signature


Signature:

Date:17 August 2013

281


Banking& Finance Specialization

Course : FP53

Course Name: Investment Banking


Level: 4


1. Explain Merchant Banking Business, for Capital Raising Activities. 2. Apply Valuation Methodologies used for Investment Proposals and

3. Evaluate past mergers & acquisition valuations 4. Explain the reasons of failure of investment banks during the financial crises

Pedagogy: 134. Case Studies

135. Lectures & PPT 136. Newspaper Articles, Actual Prospectus & Annual Reports, Articles from Journals &

Magazines

Pre-learning: Financial Management including DCF technique Course Outline

282

Books Recommended

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Financial markets Overview, Investment Banking norms & guidelines

in India 2

2 Investment Banking – Definition, key players, background, current

scenario 2

3 Functions & Services of Investment Banking: Fund Raising & Fee

Based Advisory Services 2

4

Issue Management: Underwriters & Lead Managers, book building, IPO, QIBs, ESOP, Private Placement, Public Issue, Bidding & Green

Shoe Option

6

5 Private Equity & Venture Capital: Role of PE & VC in developing

Economy, trends, deal cycle models & Case Studies 3

6

Mergers and Acquisitions: Current Scenario, types, deal cycle, analysis of Synergy, due diligence process, valuation & pricing strategies

negotiation, financing strategies (Leveraged Buyouts, MBO, Share Exchange etc.)

3

7 Structured Finance & Securitization 4

8 Hedge Funds & proprietary trading 2

9 Exits (Disinvestment, Spin Off, Sell Off, Demerger etc.) & other

strategies like spinning off, share buyback, stock splits etc. 3

10 Distressed Assets & business restructuring 1

11 Global Case Studies including the financial crises of 2008 2

30

1. Stowell David, “Investment Banking, Hedge Funds & Private Equity”, Elsevier, 2013 2. Thomas Liaw, “The business of investment banking”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 1999.

3. Giuliano Iannotta, “Investment Banking” 4. Joshua Rosenbaum & Joshua Pearl, “Investment Banking: Valuation, Leveraged Buyouts, and

Mergers and Acquisitions” 5. Damodaran Aswath, Valuation

6. Mergers & Acquisition by HBS Press 7. J F Weston & S C Weaver, Mergers & Acquisition: Tata McGraw Hill

8. Frederic Mishkin “The Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets” 9. Andrew Ross Sorkin, “Too Big to Fail”

10. Subramanian Pratap: Investment Banking (concepts, analyses and cases)

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Case Studies, Projects, Presentation & Test

283



Course Name: KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMT

Course Code: T3166

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): The aim of the course is to understand Organizational Knowledge and Knowledge Strategy to back the design and implementation of Business Strategy. Understanding KM as first mover advantage, and profiting by creating challenges and opportunities others have not even thought about.


Pre-learning:

284

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Introduction: Knowledge as strategic resource, context and relevance of KM. Knowledge driven strategic approach to business management.

4.5

2

Management of Knowledge, Knowledge Development and Management Cycle, SECI model -Knowledge Transformation and its dynamics. KMS lifecycle.

4.5

3

KM Development: Knowledge Strategy Framework, Validation of knowledge, Knowledge Creation and acquisition techniques, case study on KM development

4.5

4

KM Application Phase: Knowledge transfer, knowledge sharing as a process, Tools for sharing knowledge, Designing network structures for knowledge

structure, Skandia model for measuring intellectual capital.

4.5

5

Understanding Organization Learning and Learning organization: Five core components of learning organization, knowledge sources and documentation. HRM functions for KM.

4.5

6 KM Tools, Technologies and systems: ICT, UCT, WiMAX, OLAP, Groupware

technology, Knowledge portals and products 4.5

7

Knowledge audit and Best KM practices in organizations: case studies. 3

Course Outline

Books Recommended • The KM Toolkit: IT, Strategy & Knowledge Platforms, Amrit Tiwana, Pearson, PHI, 2nd Edition.

• Leading with Knowledge, Madanmohan Rao, Tata Mc-Graw Hill. • Knowledge Management- Text and Cases by Waman Jawadekar, McGraw Hill




285

Name of Member

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

286



Course Name: Leadership and Capacity Building HR P12

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 5

Learning Objectives: 1. Help individuals understand how to develop their leadership capabilities to influence various

facets of organizational life. 2. Analyze and evaluate different sources of power and influence to enhance one’s own growth

and growth of one’ team. 3. Evaluating the difference between a successful manager and an ethical leader.

Pedagogy:

1. Interactive lectures 2. Critique of movies

3. Case study based role plays 4. Movies like 12 angry men, Kung fupanda, Lagaan, Chak de India ,

Pre-learning:

Organizational Behavior and Human Resource Management

287

Course Outline

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Understanding the concept of position and disposition in leadership.

• Is it possible to be a leader in the absence of positional power?

Personal power of the leader –Where does it come from?

3

2 Emotional intelligence and leadership- Relationship between effective

influence and emotional intelligence. 3

3 Power, dependence and influence. An exploration based on one’s self-

awareness and follower’s readiness. 3

4

• Framing approach to leadership: What you frame in your viewfinder impacts what you find.

One size does not fit all-Overcoming personal prejudices in order to develop creative leadership approaches for different people and

situations.

3

5 • Developing strategic and critical thinking capabilities for formulating

leadership vision. • Overcoming patterned thinking of the brain.

3

6

• Information as power and politics of information.

Leadership challenges in channelizing optimum information for effective performance

• Ethics in leadership

3

7 • Transactional vs. transformational leadership approaches- Carrot and

stick leadership style vs. the empowering leader.

Empowerment of followers – Does this dilute the power of the leader?

3

8 Gender and leadership behavior 3

9 Leadership role in growth of followers. 3

10 • Political dynamics in organizational leadership roles

• Ethics in leadership 3

Total 30

288

Books Recommended:

1. High Performance Leadership: Creating, leading and living in a High Performance World. :

Graham Winter, Wiley (2003) 2. 7 habits of highly effective people –Stephen Covey

3. http://guides.wsj.com/management/developing-a-leadership-style/how-to-develop-a- leadership-style

4. “The Wall Street Journal Guide to Management” by Alan Murray, published by Harper Business. 5. Team of Rivals: The Political Genius of Abraham Lincoln by Doris Kearns Goodwin (2005)

6. The Art of War by Sun Tzu (5th century B.C.) 7. Questions of Character: Illuminating the Heart of Leadership Through Literature by Joseph L.

Badaracco Jr. (2006)


1. Individual and team assignments

2. Case study based analysis of leadership behaviors 3. Analyzing biographies of leaders from leadership behavior perspective 4. Critique of characters in movies and books from leadership perspective

http://guides.wsj.com/management/developing-a-leadership-style/how-to-develop-a-leadership-style

http://guides.wsj.com/management/developing-a-leadership-style/how-to-develop-a-leadership-style

289


Human Resource

Course Name: Learning and Development HR P6

Course Code: T2284

(UG/PG):PG


Level:


8. To describe the strategic importance of training and development 9. To understand training and development as a part of talent management and

organizational development process 10. To explain and apply the principles of instructional system design (ADDIE Model) in

designing and developing a training program 11. To learn how to apply different training methodology and critically analyze various

evaluation models.

Pedagogy: 137. Lectures 138. Case Studies 139. Class discussion and presentations

Pre-learning:

NIL

290

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Concepts of Learning and Development • Learning Disciplines • Learning Disabilities

4

2 Training and Strategy: training and organizational change, training budget, role of training manager, training post merger and acquisition

2

3 Training and Learning : learning principles, Learning styles, Bloom’s taxonomy of learning 2

4

Training Design: Consideration while designing a training Programme, Factors affecting Training Design Developing objectives Implication from conditioning and reinforcement (The environment)

4

5

Training Need Analysis: Organizational Analysis Requirement Analysis Task and Knowledge, Skill and ability analysis Person Analysis

4

6 Training Methods & Implementation

2

7 Evaluation of Training 4

8 Developing Training Manual 4

9 Use of Technology in Training 2

10 Choosing and Training the trainer 2

Course Outline

Books Recommended

1. The Fifth Discipline: The Art & Practice of The Learning Organization, Peter Seng

Crown Publishing Group, 2010

2. Training & Development: Raymond, A. Noe. Tata Mc. Graw Hill

3. Effective Training Systems, Strategies & Practices: P. Nick Blanchard & James, W.

Thacker. Pearson Prentice Hall.

4. Training Instruments in HRD & OD: Udai Pareek . Tata Mc.Graw Hill.

5. Using Activities in T &D: Leslie Rae. Kogan Page

6. Training and Development by B R Virmani (ISTD - Delhi)

7. Developing and Training HR in Organizations : Wexley and Latham

8. The ASTD Training & Development Handbook –Robert L Craig. McGraw Hill

Professional. 9. Effective Planning in Training & Development. – Leslie Rae .Kogan Page.

10. Managing Transitions: The HRD Response —Udai Pareek . Tata McGraw Hill

291

Suggested Evaluation Methods: • Quiz, • In class Presentation

• Assignments


S.No. Name Of The Course Institute Where It Was Offered

1 Learning & Development SIBM Pune

2 Training & Development SIBM Bangalore

3 Training & Development (2c) SCMHRD

4 Learning & Development SIIB

5 Learning & Development SIMS

6 Training & Development SCMS Pune

7 Training & Development SCMS Noida

Name of Member Priya D Gupta Laveena Sharma Netra Neelam

Designation Associate Prof

Assistant Prof. Assistant Prof.

Org. / Inst. SCMHRD SIBM SCMS, Pune

Signature

Name of the Expert: Dr. Asha Nagendra Signature: Date: Other members








292



293


Legal Aspects of Business Format to submit syllabus

Course Name: Legal Aspects of Business

Course Code: T1140 (UG/PG): PG


Level: 3


12. The aim of this course is to provide the management students adequate knowledge of the

legal aspects of doing business in India. Knowledge of law gives managers confidence

and credibility.

13. Managers and business leaders need to be aware of the legal implications of their day-to-

day decisions in their organizations.

Pedagogy

• Simulation Exercise

• Colloquium, debate

• Project

• Empirical analysis survey

• Statistical analysis of efficacy of Law on economics

• Critical research activity (groups)

• Opinion on articles

• Encourage group task duly regarding individual performance

• Films & other Audio-video aid

• Lecture Method

• Case study

• Case Laws

• Self Learning

• Field Trips

• Moot Court

• Student Presentation

• Dramatization of the famous business trials

• Book Review

294

• Participatory Learning Method

Pre-requisites: No Requisite

Course Outline

1 A. Introduction to Legal Systems & Concepts:

I. Legal Terms and Maxims from Law Dictionary

II. Meaning of Law and Justice

III. Overview of Constitution, Constitutional Governance

IV. Hierarchy of Courts: Supreme Court, High Courts, Business

Courts, Alternative Dispute Resolution and Tribunals

V. Sources of Law

VI. Law Making Process

VII. Role of Executive, Judiciary and Legislature

VIII. System of Law: Civil and Common Law, Procedural and

Substantive Law

B. Business and Human Rights Violation- Case studies, Labour Laws

6

2 The Indian Contract Act: Meaning and Formation of Contract, Essentials of

contract agreement, Performance of Contract, Discharge of Contract,

Remedies for breach, Laws of agency

Partnership including LLP

6

3 Sale of Goods Act: Definition of Contract of Sales, Essential conditions and

warranties, Transfer of the Title, Rights of buyers and unpaid sellers, Caveat

Emptor

1

4 Consumer Protection Act: Historical Background of Consumer Protection in

India, Definition of Consumer, Goods and Services, Defects and Deficiency

unfair trade practices, Right of a Consumer, Judicial Machinery.

1

5 Negotiable Instruments Act 1

6 MRTP/Competition Act: Monopolistic Trade Practices, Concentration of

Economic Power, Unfair trade practices, Offences and protection,

Cartelization

2

7 Corporate Laws: Introduction to corporate laws, Types of companies,

association not for profit, illegal association, Formation of company-

Promoters, their legal positions, pre-incorporation contract and provisional

contracts., Documents-Memorandum and Articles of Association,

Appointment & responsibilities of Directors, Lifting of the corporate veil,

Majority Rule and Minority Protection, Winding up procedures

6

295

8 IT and IPR : Laws relating to Trademark, Copyrights, Designs, Trade

Secrets & Patents, IPR Procedures & documentation, Non-

Disclosure/Confidentiality agreements, Trade Secrets Vs. Patents, IPR

protection & infringements and enforcements. Overview of IT Law,

Jurisdiction, Penalties and Offences

7

Books Recommended

• Bare Acts: Sale of Goods, Consumer Protection, Intellectual Property Rights, Information

Technology Act

• Business Law by P.C. Tulsian

• Company Law and Law Practice, by G. K. Kapoor and A. K. Majumdar, Taxman

Publication

• Merchantile Laws, N.D. Kapoor

• Company Law , Avtar Singh

• Information Technology Law and Practice, Vakul Sharma

• Law of Contract and Tenders, Venkatesa Iyer

• Law of Partnership by Avtar Singh

• Law of Contract by Avtar Singh

• Business Law for Management by K.R. Bulchandani

• Intellectual Property Law by P. Ganguly

Suggested Evaluation Methods

Students will be evaluated through a mix of presentations, Tests, Projects, regular assignments,

involvement in class activities and examinations.



1 Business Law SIMS (PG)

2 Legal Aspects of Business SCMHRD

3 Legal Aspects of Business SSBM (PG)

4 Business Laws SIOM

Name of

Member

Dr.

Shashikala

Gurpur

Dr.

Bindu

Ronald

Prof.

Surya

Rashmi

Rawat

Prof.

Swapnil

Bangali

Prof.

Deepak

Roy

Dr. Mita

Mehta

Prof.Shridhar

Potdar

Designatio

n

Director Associa

te

Profess

or

Asst.

Professo

r

Asst.

Professo

r

Associat

e

Professo

r

Associat

e

Professo

r

Adjunct

Professor

Org. / Inst. SLS, Pune SLS,

Pune SLS, Pune

SLS, Pune

SCMHR

D

SIMS SSBM

296

Signature

Name of the Expert : Dr. Shashikala Gurpur ,Director SLS, Pune, Dean Faculty of Law

Signature:

Date: 14-8-2013

297


Economics

COURSE NAME: Macroeconomics for Managers

(UG/PG) PG Course code – ECP037 Number of Credits: 2 Credits

Level: 3

Learning Objectives:

1. To help the students relate with macro concepts, issues and theories.

2. To illustrate a macro-perspective to the economic policies of the government and its working

3. To help students analyse and interpret the dynamic economic changes in the domestic and global

economies.

Pedagogy

Lectures, discussions, class presentations, assignments.

Pre-Learning: Basic Microeconomics/Managerial Economics

Sr No Topic Hours

1 Introductory, Definitions, nature, scope, issues 1

2 National Income: Circular flow, methods of measurement, forms, real-

nominal, limitations importance of savings, PPF

3

3 Inflation, price index, theories of inflation, causes and effects, Indexation 3

4 Phillip’s curve, Stagflation, Okun’s law, Sacrifice ratio, Misery index 3

5 Keynesian Overview, Multiplier, Accelerator, Leverage effect, consumption

function, investment funciton

3

6 Business Cycles, theories of business cycles, counter-cyclical policies 3

7 Fiscal Policy: the Social Loss Function, Automatic Fiscal Stabilizers,

Deficits, government debt, Debt trap, crowding-in and crowding – out effects

of deficits

3

8 Monetary Policy: definition, functions of money, M1, M2, M3, money-

demand, money-supply, money multiplier, market interest rates, policy rates;

Monetary policy instruments and their limitations, Liquidity trap

3

9 IS-LM curves, goods market and money market simultaneous equilibrium,

shifts in IS-LM, monetary accommodation of fiscal expansion

3

10 International Linkages: BoP, Exchange rates- fixed, flexible; REER, PPP,

factors affecting currency appreciation-depreciation, forex reserves; central

bank intervention in forex markets and its sterilization, Arbitrage and ‘Carry

trade’

3

298

11 Major global phenomena: US sub-prime crisis, European Debt crisis,

Japanese liquidity trap, the Great Depression, South East Asian currency

crisis, German unification, Birth of Euro etc.

2

Total no of Hours 30

Books Recommended

1. Mankiw: Macroeconomics

2. Abel and Bernake: Macroeconomics

3. Economics’ by Paul Samuelson

4. ‘Macroeconomics’ by Dornbusch Fischer

5. ‘Macroeconomics’ by Richard Froyen


As per SIU Exam Rule book: Page-20, Exam Rule 5:5.1(a)(III).

Parallel / Similar Courses the existing curriculum:

Sr. No Name of the Course Institute where it was offered

1 Macroeconomics SITM, SIBM-

B,SIMS,SCMHRD,SIIB

Name of

Member

Santanu Ray

Chaudhuri

Anusree

Paul

Dr.

Shubhada Sabade


Professor

Assistant

Professor

Associate

Professor, Org/ Inst. SSE SSE SIMS

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

299

Course: FU1



Under-Graduate

Course Name: Management Accounting

Course Code: T2510


Level: 3

Learning Objective(s): 1. To understand the concepts and fundamentals of cost accounting. 2. To apply the concepts in managerial decision making.

Pedagogy:

• Class Lectures • Problem Solving • Practical Applications

Pre-learning: Basic Mathematical Skills

Course Outline

Sr.No. Hours

1 Introduction to Management Accounting

Introduction to Financial Accounting

Meaning, Advantages, Disadvantages and Functions of Management

5

300

2 Financial Statement Analysis (Meaning, Technique and Ratios)

Comparative Analysis-Common Size and Trend Analysis

Ratio analysis-Meaning, Importance, Limitation and Classification of Ratios

5

301

Predictive power of Financial Ratios

2 Statement showing the changes in financial position

Funds Flow Statement Cash Flow Statement (as per AS 3)

5

3 Marginal Costing for decision making

Meaning and Behavior of Fixed Cost and Variable Cost, Break Even

Analysis, Marginal Cost Statement, Problems on Marginal Cost.

4

4 Concept: Budgeting: Cash and Flexible Budget, Zero Based Budget 3

5 Budgetary Control Systems 3

6 Introduction to Financial System in India : Markets, Institutions, Instruments & Regulators

5

Total 30

Books Recommended 1. Pardeshi P.C (2002) Management Accounting,1st Edition, Nirali Prakashan ,Pune 2. Rajendran C (2009) Management Accounting,1st Edition,Regal Publications,New Delhi 3. Pillai R.S.N & Bagavathi(1996), Management Accounting,8th Edition,S.Chand &co ltd, New Delhi 4. Pandey I. M,(2008),Management Accounting, 3rd Edition, Vikas Publicating House Pvt Ltd,

Noida 5. Rao . A .P (2006), Management Accounting, 7th Edition, Everest Publishing House , Pune Suggested Evaluation Methods:

1. Class Test 2. Assignment 3. Group Activity


S.No. Name of the course Institute where it was offered 1. Management Accounting SCMS-P

2. Management Accounting SCMS-N

Name of Member

Dr. Bharti Wadhwa

Prof. Archana Singh

Prof. Shwetha Shetty


Assistant Professor

Assistant Professor

Org. / Inst. SCMS, NOIDA SCMS, PUNE SCMS, PUNE

Signature

Name of the Expert: V.Ravi Kumar SignatureDate 17 August 2013

302


Course Name: Management Consulting Course No.

Course Code: T2628

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): After finishing the course ,the students will be able

• To develop a Consulting mindset

• To understand the qualities required to be a Consultant

• To develop skills required to be a Consultant

Pedagogy: 140. Lectures 141. Case Studies 142. Workshops 143. Interactions with Consultants 144. Live projects

Pre-learning: Strategic Management

303

Course Outline:

Topics No. of hours

1. Qualities of a Management Consultant 3

2. Analytical Tools for Consulting 3

3. Making effective use of data 3

4. Diagnosing the correct problem/issue in a business situation 3

5. Developing alternative solutions to a business situation 3

6. Building a professional networking 3

7. Ethical issues in Consulting 3

8. Updating knowledge to remain ahead of the industry 3

9. Do’s and Don’ts of Consulting 3

10. Building a Consulting organization 3

Total 30

Books Recommended:

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Assignments, Projects, Case Analysis

304


IT Management Specialization


Course Name: Management Information Systems

Course Code: T3088

Course Code: T3088

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): Information is an integral component of all business activities happening in the physical world. Being an intangible asset, organization needs to develop capabilities for capturing, recording, organizing and disseminating the information for taking operational, tactical and strategic decisions. Although, it is one of the categories of organizational information systems, Management Information Systems (MIS) represents the whole set of information systems that have different purposes. Integration of these information systems plays an important role for organizations in network economy. This course aims to make learners capable to evaluate the need and potential of different information systems in an organization and recommend the suitable solutions.

Pedagogy:Discussion based sessions for learning from business cases.

Pre-learning: Principles of Business Management, Marketing Management, Accounting and Finance

305

S.No. Topic Hours

1.

Information Systems – meaning and four components; Information Systems in Organizational Context, Organizational change using IS, IS and Culture

1.5

2.

Robert Anthony’s Management Hierarchy, Simon’s Categorization of Decisions and phases of decision making, Gorry and Scott-Morton Framework of MIS, Categorization of Organizational Information Systems – hierarchical, process and functional perspective

3

3.

Transaction Processing (TPS) versus Management Information System (MIS), Goals of MIS, Inputs and Outputs of MIS, functional and technical perspectives

1.5

4. MIS Approach - Design, Implementation and Monitoring aspects of MIS Systems

3

5.

Management Information Value Chain - Decision Support Systems, Decision Making System, Expert System, Executive Information Systems, Relationship and role of MIS in network economy, IS Cycle

4.5

6. Dimensions of IS Integration, Enterprise Systems 1.5

7. Supply Chain Management, Customer Relationship Management 3

8. Knowledge Management, Business Intelligence 3

9. Enterprise Application Integration and Flexibility with Service Oriented Architecture

3

10. Network Economics, the Economics of Information, Disruptive Technology

1.5

11. Electronic Commerce – Internet Services, e-Commerce and e-Business, Implications

3

12. Challenges, Opportunities, Trends and Best Practices of MIS 1.5

Course Outline

Books Recommended Essentials of Information Systems for Managers: Text Only [Paperback] Gabe Piccoli Wiley; 1 edition (January 24, 2012) Essentials of Management Information Systems (10th Edition) [Paperback] Kenneth Laudon, Jane Laudon Prentice Hall; 10 edition (January 18, 2012)

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Regular Written Test, Case Analysis, Individual/Group Project Course Project Reports, Presentations, Term Paper.

306

Parallel/Similar courses the existing curriculum:None S.No. Name of the course Institute where it was offered

Name of Member Dr. UrvashiRathod

Designation Professor

Org. / Inst.

Symbiosis Centre for Information Technology (SCIT)

Signature

Name of the Expert: Prof. Biswajit Mohapatra

Signature:

Date:3/8/2013

307




Course Name: Management of Operations

Course Code: T2528

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP42


Level: 4


14. To introduce operations management and their linkages with other business functions 15. To understand the strategic importance of operations management across various sectors 16. To understand value creation & conversion processes towards customer satisfaction & how

to make it more effective

Pedagogy: 145. Lectures supported by examples, case studies 146. Assignments on various Operations concept in Various organizations

Pre-learning:

None

308

Sr. No. Topic Hours

1 Introduction: History of Operations Management, Operations Organization.

2

2 Operations Strategy: Introduction, competitive dimensions, methodology, productivity measurement.

2

3

Processes & Technology: Process selection types, flow structures, Break-even analysis, process re-engineering, product process matrix and virtual factory, Technology decisions, Process technology in service and non-manufacturing operations - distribution and transport, warehousing

3

4

Products & Services Design: New product development: strategies and processes, design process, Cross functional product design, designing for manufacture and assembly, designing for customer, considerations in service design.

2

5 Locating production and service facilities: importance of location, factors affecting the decision of selecting a location

2

6

Facilities: facility location analysis , Layout planning: Layout concept, development of a process layout, product layout, factors affecting layout selection, new trends in manufacturing layouts, material handling systems.

3

7 Job Design & Work Measurement 2

8 Purchase and Procurement activities, principles, procedures and practices: 5Rs of purchasing, price determination, price forecasting, basics of strategic sourcing

3

9

Concept of quality control, design quality vs. manufactured quality, SQC techniques, sampling techniques, sampling plans, Ishikawa diagram, SQC charts, chance and assignable causes, X-r charts, P charts, np charts, c-charts, sampling errors, Quality Management: ISO9000-2000, 14001,QS/TS9000, TQM

4

10 JIT and Lean Manufacturing, Agile Manufacturing 2

13 Maintenance: why Maintenance, types of maintenance, Introduction to TPM

2

14 Service Operations Management 3

Total Hours 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended 1. “Operations Management for Competitive Advantage” by Chase, Jacobs & Aquilano, Tata McGraw Hill. 2. Operations Management by Roberta Russell & Bernard Taylor, Prentice Hall India, 4th Edition 3. “Principles of Operations Management” by Heizer Jay & Render Barry, Prentice Hall. 4. Toyota Production System – Taaichi Ohno 5. “Operations Management: Strategy and Analysis” by Krajewski Lee J. & Ritzman Larry P, Pearson

Education Asia / 2002 6. “Service Management Operations, Strategy, Information Technology” by James A.Fitzsimmons & Mona

J.Fitzsimmons. 7. Purchasing & Supply Management by Donald Dobler & David Bust.

309

8. Operations Management by Normon Gaiter, Greg Frazier Cengage learning 9. Production & Operations Management, Marlin K. Starr Cengage learning


• Class Assignments

• Case studies



1 Business Modeling in Operations management SCMHRD

2 Operations Management – II SCMHRD


4 Cases in Operations Management SIMS

Name of Member

Dr Dubey Prof Manisha Ketkar

Dr Vandana

Designation

Org. / Inst. SIOM SIIB SIOM

Signature

Name of the Expert:


Signature:

Date: 8thd August 2014


Economics

COURSE NAME: Managerial Economics

(UG/PG) PG Course code –

ECP038 Number of Credits: 2 Credits

Level: 3

Learning Objectives:

1. Will enable the student to apply economic principles in managerial decision problems using

economic reasoning.

2. It will help students to discover how firms attempt to reach optimal managerial decisions in the

face of constraints.

3. Will enable the student to understand and interpret business situations and environment, using a

quantitative and analytical approach.

Pedagogy:

The topics would be discussed by the instructor theoretically using examples. Learning by doing would be encouraged in the investigation of problems, wherein students would be working on simple, practical assignments that try to corroborate the classroom discussions.

Pre learning: Basic algebra, calculus, co-ordinate geometry and basic statistics (pre-induction module)

Sl.No. Topic Hours

1 Introduction to Managerial Economics:

Economics of Effective management – identify goals and contraints – nature and importance of

profits- economic vs accounting profits- The Role of Profits- The Five Forces Framework and Industry Profitability

2

2 Demand-Supply Analysis:

Demand-Demand Shifters-Income -Prices of Related Goods -Advertising and Consumer Tastes-

Consumer Expectations-Other Factors-The Demand Function -Consumer Surplus Elasticity of demand: price, cross, income

Supply-Supply Shifters-Input Prices -Number of The Supply Function -Producer Surplus

Market Equilibrium: Price Restrictions and Market Equilibrium-Price Ceilings-Price Floors Changes in Demand-Changes in Supply-Simultaneous Shifts in Supply and Demand

6

3 Consumer Behaviour:

The preference ordering -- The feasible set -- The consumption decision -- Indifference curve

analysis- consumers’ equilibrium- Comparative Statics-Price Changes and Consumer Behavior- Income Changes and Consumer Behavior-Substitution and Income Effects

6

4 The Production Process and Cost and Revenue: The Production Function: Short-Run versus Long-Run Decisions

8

308

Measures of Productivity: Total Product-Average Product-Marginal Product -The Role of the

Manager in the Production Process-Produce on the Production Function-Use the Right Level of

Inputs-Isoquants-Isocosts

Cost Minimization-Optimal Input Substitution-The Cost Function-Short-Run Costs -Average and

Marginal Costs-Relations among Costs-Fixed and Sunk Costs- -Long-Run Costs-Economies of

Scale

Economic Costs versus Accounting Costs-Economies of Scope

Concepts of TR, AR and MR

5 Market Behaviour:

Types of Markets- perfect competition, monopoly, monopolistic competition, oligopoly

Organisation of firm: Methods of Procuring Inputs,Transaction Costs, Optimal Input Procurement-Spot Exchange-Contracts-Vertical Integration

Managerial Compensation and the principal–agent Problem -Forces that discipline Managers-

Incentive Contracts-External Incentives-Reputation-Takeovers

The Manager–Worker Principal–Agent Problem-Solutions to the Manager–Worker Principal–

Agent Problem, Profit Sharing-Revenue Sharing- Piece Rate,Time Clocks and Spot Checks

Nature of Industry: Market Structure-Firm Size-Industry Concentration-Measures of Industry

Concentration-Limitations of Concentration Measures Potential for Entry-Conduct-Pricing Behavior

Integration and Merger Activity-Vertical Integration-Horizontal Integration-Conglomerate

Mergers (concepts)

Research and Development, Advertising

Performance-Profits The Structure–Conduct–Performance Paradigm

Pricing strategies for firms with market powers: Market Power and its sources, conjectural

variations, Basic Pricing Strategies

8

Books Recommended

1. D. Salvatore: Managerial Economics

2. G. Mankiw: Principles of Economics

3. Karl E. Case, Ray C Fair & Sharon Oster: Principles of Economics

4. Baye M.R, Managerial Economics and Business Strategy


As per SIU Exam Rule book: Page-20, Exam Rule 5:5.1(a)(III).

Parallel / Similar Courses the existing curriculum:

Sr. No Name of the Course Institute where it was offered

1 Managerial Economics SCMHRD, SIMS, SITM, SIOM, SIMC,

SSBM,SCIT

2 Business Economics SIIB

309

310

Name of Member

Santanu Ray Chaudhuri

Anusree Paul


Professor

Assistant

Professor

Org/ Inst. SSE SSE

Signature

Name expert:

Signature:

Date:

311


Marketing Specialization Course Name: Marketing In Emerging Economies


Learning Objective(s): After the completion of this course, the student shall be able to : 1. To develop the knowledge about emerging markets. 2. To develop the required skills to deal in emerging market situation. 3. To analyse the various market strategies in emerging economies.

Pedagogy: 147. Lecture 148. Case Study 149. Projects

Pre-learning: 5. Marketing Management

312

S. No. Topic Hours

1.

History and unique characteristics of Emerging markets (Eastern Europe, Latin America, the Asian Tigers, BRIC), potential emerging countries, market analysis of emerging markets, cross-cultural issues in emerging market, emerging market opportunity

4

2. Risk involved in emerging markets, Market entry strategies and

experiences of multinational working 4

3. Marketing research in emerging markets, innovations in emerging markets 4

4. Segmenting Targeting and Positioning 3

5. Product and pricing decisions 6

6. Existing distribution structure and distribution strategy 4

7. Promotion strategies 4

8. Ethical issues in emerging markets 1

Total 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended

1. Russell R. Miller, “Selling to Newly Emerging Markets” 2. Tarun Khanna, Krishna G. Palepu, “Winning in Emerging Markets: A Road Map for Strategy

and Execution” 3. Hemant Merchant , “Competing in Emerging Markets: Cases and Readings”, Routledge 4. Vijay Mahajan and Kamini Banga , “The 86% Solution: How to succeed in the Biggest Market

Opportunity of the 21st Century”, Wharton school Publishing. 5. C.K Prahalad, “Fortune At The Bottom Of The Pyramid: Eradicating Poverty Through

Profits’, Wharton School Publishing. 6. Bill Emmott , “Rivals: How the Power Struggle Between China, India and Japan Will Shape

Our Next Decade”, Harcourt Publishing. 7. Antoine van Agtmael, “The Emerging Markets Century: How a New Breed of World-Class

Companies is Overtaking the World”, Simon & Schuster.

Suggested Evaluation Methods: 1. Projects 2. Research paper review and presentation.


1. Marketing in emerging economies

SIIB

313

Name of Member

Ardhendu Shekhar Singh

Dr. B.R. Londhe


Professor

Org. / Inst. SSBM SIMS

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

Benchmarking:

Wharton http://spike.wharton.upenn.edu/mbaprogram/curriculum/mktg_india_spr13.pdf

Cornell University

http://emergingmarkets.dyson.cornell.edu/pdf/AEM442.pdf

kogod School of Business http://aladinrc.wrlc.org/bitstream/handle/1961/7212/IBUS%20746%20The%20Global%20Eme rging%20Market_Robert%20V%20Sicina(7).pdf?sequence=1

Articles:

1. KE Meyer, YT Thu Tran (2006), “Market penetration and acquisition strategies for emerging economies”, Long Range Planning, Volume 39, Issue 2, Pages 177–197.

2. Jaqueline Pelsa & Roderick J. Brodieb (2004), “Profiling Marketing Practice in an Emerging

Economy: The Argentine Case”, Journal of Global Marketing, Volume 17, Issue 1, pages 67- 91.

3. Leonidas C. Leonidou, Dayananda Palihawadana, Michael A. Talias, (2007) "British

consumers' evaluations of US versus Chinese goods: A multi-level and multi-cue comparison", European Journal of Marketing, Vol. 41 Iss: 7/8, pp.786 - 820

http://spike.wharton.upenn.edu/mbaprogram/curriculum/mktg_india_spr13.pdf

http://emergingmarkets.dyson.cornell.edu/pdf/AEM442.pdf

http://aladinrc.wrlc.org/bitstream/handle/1961/7212/IBUS%20746%20The%20Global%20Emerging%20Market_Robert%20V%20Sicina(7).pdf?sequence=1

http://aladinrc.wrlc.org/bitstream/handle/1961/7212/IBUS%20746%20The%20Global%20Emerging%20Market_Robert%20V%20Sicina(7).pdf?sequence=1

314

4. Naresh Malhotra and Satyabhusan Dash, (2013), “Future of research in marketing in emerging economies”, Marketing Intelligence & Planning, Vol. 31 Iss: 2 Editorial.

5. Harper W. Boyd, Jr., Ronald E. Frank, William F. Massy and Mostafa Zoheir (1964), “On the Use

of Marketing Research in the Emerging Economies”, Journal of Marketing Research, Vol. 1, No. 4, pp. 20-23.

6. Klaus E. Meyer, Saul Estrin, Sumon Kumar Bhaumik, and Mike W. Peng (2009), “Institutions, resources, and entry strategies in emerging economies”, Strategic Management Journal, Volume 30, Issue 1, pp. 61–80.

7. Niraj N. Dawar, and Amitava Chattopadhyay (2002), “Rethinking Marketing Programs for

Emerging Markets”, Long Range Planning, Volume 35, Issue 5, Pp. 457–474.

315


Entrepreneurship

Specialization


Course Name: Marketing Strategies For Entrepreneurs Course No. ENTRE U 6

Course Code: T2344

(UG/PG):____UG__________

Number of Credits:_3___________________

Level:2


After completing the course the students will be able to

• Comprehend the issues in marketing of products and services of entrepreneurs.

• They will also be able to identify and reproduce the strategies in practical

application.

. Pedagogy:

150.

_Lectures__( AV

)_____________________________________________________________________________________ 151. Case Studies_,

Workshops_____________________________________________________________________________________ 152. Industry Interactions and

visits_____________________________________________________________________________________

Pre-learning:

316

ENTRE U2, ENTRE U 3, ENTRE U 4, ENTRE U 5

317

Course Outline

Unit Contents Hours

I Introduction

Marketing for Entrepreneurs

Unique Organisations, Unique Customers

Entrepreneurial Marketing – Then and Now (an overview on transition of marketing strategy)

10

II Market Identification

Market Research

Market Segmentation

Finding a Niche/Need gap

New Product and Product Life cycle

Strategic Marketing and the barriers to entry

10

III Promotion & Distribution Functions

Channel and distribution Management

Gaining channel Acceptance

Promotion Mix

Advertising and Public Relations

Sales Promotion Building Brand Equity

15

IV Pricing Function

Determination of pricing policy

Journey from break-even to profitability

Types of Pricing and Strategies of Pricing

10

Recommended Books:

Morgan Adam, ‘Eating the Big Fish – how challenger brands can compete against brand

leaders’, John Wiley & Sons, 2009

Koehn Nancy H, ‘Brand New: How Entrepreneurs Earned Consumers' Trust from Wedgewood

to Dell’, Harvard Business School Press. 2001

Jurgen Wolff, ‘Marketing for Entrepreneurs’, Pearson Education Canada, 2009

Alex Blyth, ‘How to grow your business: For Entrepreneurs’, Prentice Hall, 2009

Suggested Evaluation Methods:Assignments, Projects, Written tests, MCQs , Case Analysis

Parallel/Similar courses the existing curriculum: NA S.No. Name of the course Institute where it was offered

318

Name of Member

Sabiha Fazalbhoy

Sruti Mitra

Designation Faculty Member Asst.

Professor

Org. / Inst. SCMS ( Pune ) SCMS ( Pune )

Signature


319


Marketing Specialization Course Name: Marketing Strategy

Course Code: T2125 Number of Credits: 2 Course Code – MM P 013 Course Range – 700-899 Level - 4


17. Develop an understanding of competitive nature of marketing environment and it’s

implication on strategy. 18. Apply their knowledge and skills to devise and implement appropriate marketing strategy. 19. Appraise themselves with various current marketing tools and practices required for an

industry ready marketing professional.


Pre-learning: 6. Marketing Management 7. Quantitative techniques/ Business mathematics 8. Strategic management/business strategy

320

S. No. Topic Hours

1. Imperative for alignment of marketing strategy to corporate and

business strategy. 2

2. Understanding and forecasting external environment, and target

market 2

3. Finding growth and profit opportunity through identifying unmet

needs, changing competition. 3

4.

Internal analysis to identify the strength and weakness of organization as a reality check for selecting appropriate marketing

strategy

3

5. Generic marketing strategy for new market entry, growth market, 3

6. Generic marketing strategy for matures market, declining markets,

and digital economy. 3

7. Creating competitive advantage through market-driving strategy. 3

8. Challenging competitive advantage through market-driven strategy. 3

9. Deriving marketing plan and appropriate marketing mix, 2

10. Resource planning and allocation methods for marketing plan. 1

11. Identifying strategic alliances and relationships along with

appropriate marketing mix. 3

12. Emerging marketing strategies in changing dynamic environment. 2

Books Recommended 1. Boyd Larreche Walker Mullins, Marketing Strategy A Decision-Focused Approach 2. David mercer , Marketing strategy: the challenges of external environment 3. Ferrell and Hartline, Marketing Strategy: text and cases


1. Case analysis 2. Projects (Create a marketing budget, Utilize technology to research and

collect data, Analyze primary and secondary data to make recommendations for action)

3. Research paper review and presentation 4. MARKSTAT



1. Strategic marketing SIBM,P AND B

2. Strategic marketing SCMHRD

3. Strategic marketing SIIB

4. Strategic marketing SIMS

Name of Member

Dr. B.R. Londhe Prof. Chandan Chatterjee

Ardhendu Shekhar Singh

Designation Professor Director Assistant

Professor

321

Org. / Inst. SIMS SIMC SSBM

Signature

Name of the Expert: Signature: Date: Benchmarking:

1. College of redwoods http://inside.redwoods.edu/Syllabi/Business/2012-2013/Fall/2012F- BUS35-E2304-Gaines.pdf

2. MIT Open courseware http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/sloan-school-of-management/15-834- marketing-strategy-spring-2003/calendar/

3. Rollins University http://r-net.rollins.edu/mba/student-services-advising/syllabi/mkt- 606-marshall.pdf

Articles: 1. Rajan Varadarajan (2010), “Strategic marketing and marketing strategy: domain, definition,

fundamental issues and foundational premises”, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, Volume 38, Issue 2, pp. 119-140.

2. Nigel F. Piercy (1998), “Marketing implementation: The implications of marketing paradigm weakness for the strategy execution process”, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, Volume 26, Issue 3, pp. 222-236.

3. Shelby D. Hunt, Caroline Derozier, (2004) "The normative imperatives of business and marketing strategy: grounding strategy in resource-advantage theory", Journal of Business & Industrial Marketing, Vol. 19 Iss: 1, pp.5 – 22.

4. Shelby D. Hunt, C. Jay Lambe ( 2000), “Marketing’s contribution to business strategy: market orientation, relationship marketing and resource-advantage theory”, International Journal of Management Reviews, Volume 2, Issue 1, pages 17–43.

5. George M. Zinkhan, and Arun Pereira(1994), “Review: An overview of marketing strategy and planning”, International Journal of Research in Marketing, Volume 11, Issue 3, Pages 185–218.

6. P. Rajan Varadarajan, Manjit S. Yadav (2002), “Marketing strategy and the internet: An organizing framework”, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, Volume 30, Issue 4, pp. 296-312.

http://inside.redwoods.edu/Syllabi/Business/2012-2013/Fall/2012F-BUS35-E2304-Gaines.pdf


http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/sloan-school-of-management/15-834-marketing-strategy-spring-2003/calendar/


http://r-net.rollins.edu/mba/student-services-advising/syllabi/mkt-606-marshall.pdf


322



Course Name: Marketing Strategy & Implementation

Course Code: T2512 Number of Credits: 2 Course Code – MM P 014 Course Range – 700-899 Level - 4


20. Develop an understanding of competitive nature of marketing environment and it’s implication on strategy.

21. Apply their knowledge and skills to devise and implement appropriate marketing strategy. 22. Appraise themselves with various current marketing tools and practices required for an

industry ready marketing professional.


Pre-learning: 9. Marketing Management 10. Quantitative techniques/ Business mathematics 11. Strategic management/business strategy

323

S. No. Topic Hours

13. Imperative for alignment of marketing strategy to corporate and

business strategy. 1

14. Understanding and forecasting external environment, and target

market 2

15. Finding growth and profit opportunity through identifying unmet

needs, changing competition. 2

16.

Internal analysis to identify the strength and weakness of organization as a reality check for selecting appropriate marketing

strategy

3

17. Generic marketing strategy for new market entry, growth market, 3

18. Generic marketing strategy for matures market, declining markets,

and digital economy. 3

19. Challenging competitive advantage through market-driven strategy. 3

20. Deriving marketing plan and appropriate marketing mix, 3

21. Resource planning and allocation methods for marketing plan. 3

22. Identifying strategic alliances and relationships along with

appropriate marketing mix. 3

23. Marketing auditing and tools for reviewing the performance of

marketing strategy and plan. 2

24. Overview of simulation 2

Books Recommended 4. Boyd Larreche Walker Mullins, Marketing Strategy A Decision-Focused Approach 5. David mercer , Marketing strategy: the challenges of external environment 6. Ferrell and Hartline, Marketing Strategy: text and cases


5. Case analysis 6. Projects (Create a marketing budget, Utilize technology to research and

collect data, Analyze primary and secondary data to make recommendations for action)

7. Research paper review and presentation 8. MARKSTAT

Name of Member

Dr Mita Mehta

324


Org. / Inst. SIMS

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

Benchmarking:

4. College of redwoods http://inside.redwoods.edu/Syllabi/Business/2012-2013/Fall/2012F- BUS35-E2304-Gaines.pdf

5. MIT Open courseware http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/sloan-school-of-management/15-834-

marketing-strategy-spring-2003/calendar/

6. Rollins University http://r-net.rollins.edu/mba/student-services-advising/syllabi/mkt- 606-marshall.pdf

Articles:

7. Rajan Varadarajan (2010), “Strategic marketing and marketing strategy: domain, definition, fundamental issues and foundational premises”, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, Volume 38, Issue 2, pp. 119-140.

8. Nigel F. Piercy (1998), “Marketing implementation: The implications of marketing paradigm weakness for the strategy execution process”, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, Volume 26, Issue 3, pp. 222-236.

9. Shelby D. Hunt, Caroline Derozier, (2004) "The normative imperatives of business and marketing strategy: grounding strategy in resource-advantage theory", Journal of Business & Industrial Marketing, Vol. 19 Iss: 1, pp.5 – 22.

10. Shelby D. Hunt, C. Jay Lambe ( 2000), “Marketing’s contribution to business strategy: market orientation, relationship marketing and resource-advantage theory”, International Journal of Management Reviews, Volume 2, Issue 1, pages 17–43.

11. George M. Zinkhan, and Arun Pereira(1994), “Review: An overview of marketing strategy and planning”, International Journal of Research in Marketing, Volume 11, Issue 3, Pages 185–218.

12. P. Rajan Varadarajan, Manjit S. Yadav (2002), “Marketing strategy and the internet: An organizing framework”, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, Volume 30, Issue 4, pp. 296-312.







325




Course Name: Materials Management

Course Code: T2174

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP13


Level: 4


1. To review concepts of Materials management and its relevance in supply chains 2. To explain different models in Demand Management & Demand Forecasting 3. To evaluate vendor performance in materials management 4. To develop strategy of inventory analysis and replenishment models

Pedagogy:

159. Lectures supported by case studies 160. Projects /Assignments on Design and Evaluate the Warehouse Operations

Pre-learning: Nil

326

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Materials Management – Importance in Supply Chain 2

2 Materials in various production systems 2

3 Materials Planning System – Sales, Inventory and Operations Planning with the financial perspective – MRP- JIT- JIS

4

4 Demand Management & Forecasting Models 3

5 Make or Buy Decisions – Project Buying – Capacity management of Material Suppliers – Production Control

3

6 Purchasing fundamentals - Order Quantities - Contracts Management 3

7 Vendor Development and Performance Analysis 2

8 Service Levels – Uncertainties in supply chains - Product Availability 2

9 Physical Inventory and Warehouse Management System 3

10 Inventory Analysis and Replenishment Models 2

11 Material Codification system - ABC analysis –VED, GOLF, FSN - HML 2

12 MRO - Value Analysis 2

Total 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended

1. Arnold, T., Chapman, S. and Clive M. Lloud, (2009), “ Materials Management”, 6th Ed, Pearson Education, NewDelhi

2. Chopra S., Meindl P., and Kalra V.D, (2010), Supply Chain Management – 4th Ed. - Pearson Education

3. Dutta, A.K. (2000), Materials Management, Second Edition, Prentice Hall India 4. Kaushal, H. (2003), Cases in Materials Management, McMillan Presss 5. APICS Study Materials 6. Case studies and Industry Magazines


• Quizzes

• Case Analysis


1. Procurement and Materials Management SIBM- B

2 Materials Management SIMS

3 Materials Management SIBM 4 SCM-1 SIOM

5 Materials Management SIIB

327

Name of Member

Prof Manisha Prof Venkatesh

Designation

Dy Director

Asst Professor

Org. / Inst. SIIB SIOM

Signature

Name of the Expert: Mrs. Manisha Ketkar

Signature:

Date:3rd August 2013

328


Marketing &


Post Graduate

Course : FP47

Course Name: Mergers and Acquisitions (PG 2nd Year)


Level:4


1. Analyse the process and procedures related to Mergers and acquisitions. 2. Explain the legalities involved in any merger or acquisition.

Pedagogy: 1. Classroom sessions

2. Lectures 3. Cases

4. Newspaper clippings, articles, research papers 5. Excel Modeling

Pre-learning:

Basic concepts of finance, a course on financial management.

329

Course Outline

Session Topic Hours 1 Corporate Strategy and Value creation 2

2 Introduction to Mergers and Acquisitions - Types of mergers 2

3 Reasons for Mergers and Acquisitions 2

4 Mergers and Acquisitions process 2

5 Regulatory considerations for mergers and acquisitions 2

6 Defining and Selecting a target 3

7 Creating value with Mergers and Acquisitions (Synergy, valuation assumptions, valuation methods)

4

8 Financial Modeling for M&A 4

9 Deal structuring and financing strategies a. Financing transactions

b. Negotiation

4

10 Post merger valuation 2

11 Integration 1 12 Accounting for Mergers and Acquisitions 1

13 Income Tax, Slump Sale, Demergers, Reverse Mergers. 1 30

Books Recommended

• Robert F. Bruner, Applied Mergers and Acquisitions, Wiley Finance

• Donald M. DePamphilis , Mergers, Acquisitions, and Other Restructuring Activities: An Integrated Approach to Process, Tools, Cases, and Solutions, Academic Press Advanced Finance Series

• Aswath Damodaran, Applied Corporate Finance, John Wiley and Sons


Quiz Class Test

Case Analysis Assignments Problem sets

Project Exam

http://www.amazon.com/s/ref%3Dntt_athr_dp_sr_1?_encoding=UTF8&field-author=Robert%20F.%20Bruner&search-alias=books&sort=relevancerank

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=bibliogroup%3A%22Academic%2BPress%2BAdvanced%2BFinance%2BSeries%22&source=gbs_metadata_r&cad=8

330



Course Name: Multinational Management

Course Code: T2395

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4


23. Analyse the economic, political and social factors that affect the expansion of a firm across borders distinct from domestic expansion

24. Compare and contrast the factors that affect the strategy and performance of a multinational firm

25. Interpret how to organize and manage a multinational network of subsidiaries and transferring knowledge/technology across countries

Pedagogy: 1. Case Studies 2. Lectures from Managers of Multinational firms 3. Activities based on simulations for multinational expansion

Pre-learning:

Foundation courses in International Business

331

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Introduction: What is a Multinational Firm? Understanding their

importance in today’s economy 2

2 Overview: Going International Why, Where and How? 4

3 Managing Global Expansion: Entry Mode 4

4 Multinationals: social and political environment: national culture;

managing risk 4

5 Controlling and Coordinating Multinationals 4

6 International Corporate Governance 2

7 Small Business and International Entrepreneurship 2

8 Leadership and Management Behaviour in Multinational Companies:

Being a Manager in a Multinational Firm 2

9 Case Studies 6

30

Course Outline

Books/Articles Recommended

Guillén, M. 2006. Understanding and Managing the Multinational Firm

Pankaj Ghemawat, “Distance Still Matters: The Hard Reality of Global Expansion”

Harvard Business Review Sept. (2001), pp. 137-147

Sumantra Ghoshal, “Global Strategy: an organizing framework.” Strategic Management Journal

(1987), pp. 425-440

Christopher Bartlett & Sumantra Ghoshal. 2002. “What is a Global Manager?” Harvard

Business Review.

Prahalad, C.K. and Yves L. Doz, “An Approach to Strategic Control in MNC,”

Sloan Management Review, Vol. 22, n. 4, (Summer 1981), pp.5-13

DaimlerChrysler : The Post-Merger Integration Phase” IMD-3-773 (22 pages); “DaimlerChrysler

: Organizing the Post-Merger Integration Phase” IMD-3-0774

(12 pages)


Class Debates, Presentations


332

Name of Member

Dr.AnithaRamanna- Pathak

Dr. Ratna P. A

Prof SmitaSantoki

Prof .Ishita Dutt

Prof. Deepak Havaldar

Designation Adjunct Faculty Assistant


Assistant Professor

Assistant Professor

Org. / Inst. SIIB SIOM SIIB SCMS SCMS

Signature

Name of the Expert: Dr. Anitha Ramanna-Pathak

Signature:

Date:

333



Course Name: Operations & Diversity Management

(UG/PG): PG

Number of Credits:2

Level: 4


1) Analyze the changes needed in the business operations

2) Discuss the value of sustainability in international operations 3) Solve the international diversity issues at work place.

Pedagogy: 1. Lectures

2. Case Studies

3. International Business Simulations

4. Team Activities

Pre-learning:

Global Business Environment & International Market Entry Strategies Course Outline:


HOURS

1 Meaning of International Business Operations, Approaches &

Methods

2

334

2 An Overview of Operations Strategy & its Importance to Firms:

Basic Concept and development of sustainable operations strategies

3

3 Design of Products/Services & Processes and how it relates to Operations and Supply Chain Management

4

4 Concept of Sustainability in Operations Management: Introduction and understanding of the term and aspects of Sustainability, Process and loop of sustainable operations management and

Sustainability issues in the strategic decision areas

4

5 Systems used in Operations Management: Operations

Management Systems, Modules & Benefits

2

6 Practices Adopted for Continuous Improvements: Various tools

and practices implemented sector specifics for cost effective and benefits with efficient strategies

5

7 Evolution & Current Trends in Diversity Management: Concept of

diversity management, forms of diversity, major trends in corporate diversity and Diversity challenges & benefits

3

8 Evaluating an Organization’s Status & Needs in Managing Diversity: Metrics to evaluate the organization’s performance and

methods of managing diversity in International business

3

9 Effects of Diversity on International Corporate Structure & Behavior: Advantages and Limitations of Diversity in International

business

2

10 How to Effectively & Efficiently Manage Diversity: Objectives and concept of Global diversity management, methods and tools to

tackle the diversity issues effeiciently

2

Total 30

Books Recommended

1) Managing Diversity in the Global Work Culture by Harris & Moran

2) Global Diversity Management by Mustafa Ozbilgin

3) International Management by Helen Deresky

4) International Management-A Strategic Perspective by RN Sanyali

Additional Reading:

1) Adler, Nancy. International Dimensions of Organizational Behavior (3rd ed.)

(Cincinnati, OH: South-Western, 1998).

335

2) Bartlett, Christopher , and Sumantra Ghoshal. Managing Across Borders: The

Transnational Solution (2nd ed.) (Cambridge, MA: Harvard Business School Press,

1998).

3) The Global Diversity Desk Reference: Managing an International Workforce by Lee

Gradenswartz (Wiley Publishers, 2003)

Websites Recommended:

www.idm-diversity.org

www.forbes.com/sites/diversity management

www.diversityatwork.net/EN/en_implementing.htm www.emeraldinsight.com/ijopm.htm

www.nist.gov www.activeops.com


1. Class tests

2. Assignments


4. Presentations

http://www.idm-diversity.org/

http://www.forbes.com/sites/diversity

http://www.diversityatwork.net/EN/en_implementing.htm

http://www.emeraldinsight.com/ijopm.htm

http://www.nist.gov/

http://www.activeops.com/

336




Course Name: Operations Planning and Scheduling

Course Code: T2190

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP29


Level: 5


1. To examine supply and demand planning for mid to long term demand. 2. To develop skills of the balancing act of demand and supply. 3. To analyze translation of the product level plans and schedules into requirements 4. To bridge the master planning area with the execution and control area. 5. To discuss the master planning best practices. 6. To analyze the characteristics of detailed capacity planning process.


• Assignments on various Operations concept in Various organizations

Pre-learning:

337

• Introduction to Operations Management (OMP23)

338

Sr. No. Topic Hours

1

Planning hierarchy, Components and linkages of strategic plan, business plan and MPR. CRM concepts, customer service policies and measurements, performance targets, ATP & CTP, performance measurement.

4

2 SOP purpose and its relation with business environment, integration of business and operational goals and objectives with SOP.

4

3 SOP process, demand planning, supply planning, SOP meetings, developing and validating SOP.

3

4 Master scheduling purpose and objectives, Master schedule in different environments, relation with other planning activities.

4

5 Managing Master schedule, trade-offs, Master schedule time zones, time fence policy; creating firm planned orders, integrity of master schedule, unrealistic master schedule, Master scheduler’s function.

4

6 Master Scheduling Process, Data sources for master schedule; master schedule format; designing product structures, Various BOM, RCCP, FAS and its linkages.

3

7 Master scheduling techniques, validating the master schedule, measuring the master Schedule performance, Accuracy of records. Operations plan to support the Material Plan .

4

8

Characteristics of Detailed Capacity planning process, Information in the Detailed Capacity Planning process Techniques of Detailed Capacity planning process, Uses of Detailed Capacity planning process, Measuring the performance of Detailed Capacity planning process, Interactions with other systems

4

Total 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended 1. Master Scheduling by Proud J.F. 2. Distribution Planning and Control by Ross, David Frederick 3. Sales and Operations Planning by Wallace, Thomas F. 4. Master Scheduling in the 21st Century by Wallace. and Stahl. 5. Sales Forecasting: A new approach by Wallace. and Stahl. 6. Introduction to Materials Management by Tony Arnold. Orlicky’s MRP 7. World Class Supply Management by Burt and Dobler 8. Capacity Management by Blackstone 9. Manufacturing Planning and Control Systems, by Vollmann, T.E., W.L.Berry, and

D.C.Whybark)


• Numerical • Project Assignments

339



1 Operations Strategy and Control SIOM

Name of Member



Dr. Suresh Jakhar

Prof. Shirish Jeble

Designation


Assistant Professor

Assistant Professor


Signature

Name of the Expert:


Signature:


340


QS & A Specialization

Course Name: Operations Research (UG/PG): PG

Course Code: T2220


Course No. QS&A P 7

Level: 4


1. To enable learners to comprehend the evolution of Operation research

and its significances in businesses

2. To enable learners to formulate decision making models encountered in

businesses

3. To enable learners to analyze business problems using the power of well-

known operational research tools and techniques

Pedagogy:

1. Lectures 2. Cases 3. Demonstration using software

Pre-learning:

Mathematics (Level 1); Statistics (Level 3)

341

Course Outline

342

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Introduction to OR • Historical Perspective, • Definition of OR, • Phases in OR intervention and application in

business

2

2 Linear Programming: • Mathematical Formulation and Assumptions, • Graphical solution, Special cases

• Simplex Method • Sensitivity, duality and post- optimality analysis. • Applications.

8

3 Transport, Transshipment and Assignment Problems: • Formulation as special case of LP, • Initial Feasible Solution, • Optimal Solutions, • Applications.

4

4 Decision Theory: • Under risk and Uncertainty, • Decision Tree • Marginal Analysis

4

5 Queuing Theory :

• Introduction, • Role of Exponential and Poisson Distribution, • Characteristics of a waiting line, • Single Server,

• Optimization of Service Capacity

4

6 Simulation Model • Introduction, • Random numbers and Monte-Carlo

Simulation,

• Applications.

2

7

CPM and PERT Analysis

• Introduction, • Network Analysis, • Critical Path Analysis, • Activity Float, PERT Analysis, crashing ,Cost

Optimization

2

8

Forecasting Techniques

• Exponential Smoothing • Moving Average • Decomposition of Time Series Data

4

30

343

Books Recommended • Anderson, D. R., Sweeney, D. J., & Williams, T. A. (2001). Quantitative methods for business.

South-Western College Pub.

• Taha, H. A. (1995). Operations research: an introduction. Prentice Hall

• Sharma, J K. Operations Research (3 Edition) : Theory And Applications


Quiz/ test 20 Assignment 20 Project/ Presentation 20 External Examination 40


1 Quantitative Techniques SCIT, SIIB, SIMS

2 Quantitative Techniques

for Optimization

SCMHRD

3 Business Decision Analysis

SIBM-P

4 Operations Research SIOM

Name of Member

B V Cadambi B. Tripathy S . Bhattacharya Kriti Priya Gupta

Vani Rajesh

Designation Professor Assistant

Professor Associate Professor

Associate Professor

Assistant Professor

Org. / Inst. SIBM SIOM SCMHRD SCMS-

Noida SCMS- Pune

Signature


Signature:

Date:

344




Course Name: Operations Strategy and Control

Course Code: T2189

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP28


Level: 5


26. To provide an understanding of production operations in variety of production environments.

27. To discuss the principles, approaches and techniques needed to schedule, control, measure and evaluate the effectiveness of production operations.

28. To understand development of strategic goals of production process. 29. To analyze relationship of existing and emerging systems and technologies to the

manufacturing strategy. 30. To discuss various production performance measurement models.

Pedagogy:

• Lectures supported by examples, case studies


Pre-learning:

• Introduction to Operations Management (OMP23) • Operations Planning and Scheduling (OMP29)

345

Sr. No. Topic Hours

1

Aligning the Resources with the Strategic Plan Strategic Issues – The need for company strategy, the strategic planning model, the need for distinctive competencies.

3

2 Choices Affecting Operations Structure – Operations strategy, product and process decisions, product life cycle, structural decisions.

3

3 Choices Affecting Operations Infrastructure – Infrastructure choices and productivity, workforce involvement, organizational design, quality systems, information systems.

3

4 Configuring and Integrating the Operating Processes to Support the Strategic Plan

3

5 Implementing the Strategic Plan – Operations management system, OM system configuration, supporting dimensions of competitive advantage

3

6 Configuring and Integrating Design and Development and Cost Management Processes

3

7 Overview of manufacturing planning and control systems. Planning and execution interfaces.

3

8 Planning and executing schedules. Managing the Operations Schedule. Improving material flow

3

9 Authorizing activities, Executing activities and Reporting activities. Communicating customer-supplier information. Data communication

3

10 Performance reporting. Evaluating cost of operations. Audits and reporting

3

Total 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended 1. Manufacturing Planning and control systems by Vollman & Berry, TMH (ECO) 2. APICS CPIM Execution and control of operations Reprints, 2000 (ECO) 3. Capacity Management by Blackstone Jr., J.H South western publishing (ECO) 4. Quality, Planning and analysis by Gryna F.M, 4th edn, TMH (ECO) 5. Just-in-Time: Making It happen by Sandras W.A (ECO)


• Case analysis



1 Operations Strategies SCMHRD

2 Strategic Operations Management SIBM-P

3 Operations Strategy and Control SIOM

346

Name of Member



Dr. Suresh Jakhar

Prof. Shirish Jeble

Designation


Assistant Professor

Assistant Professor


Signature


Signature:


347


Human Resource Specialization

Course Name: Organizational Behavior HR P1

Course Code: T2573

(UG/PG): P.G.

Number of Credits:_2

Level: 4


31. To help the students describe how organizational behavior affects the performance and

effectiveness.

32. To understand the dynamics of individual and group behavior in organizations

33. To have a basic frame work of predicting individual and group behaviour in

organizations

34. To enable students to use organizational behavior theories and methods to achieve

better interpersonal relationships and manage people effectively.

Pedagogy:

161. Lectures

162. Class discussions

163. Case studies

164. Presentations

Pre-learning: Nil

Course Outline Gaze

348

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Introduction to OB

Definition of OB, Growth of OB, Challenges and Opportunities for OB,

Models of OB

2 hr

Basic Human Processes

2 Perception, Social perception - impression formation and attribution;

Errors in social perception, Organizational applications of perception

2 hr

3 Learning- Definition; Theories; Principles of Adult Learning;

Applications in Organizations

2 hr

4 Personality- Definition; Theories; Big 5 Model; MBTI; Erikson’s 8

stages of Psycho- physical development .

4.30 hrs

5 Emotions and Stress- Nature of Emotions; Nature of Stress; Stressors;

Stress Management.

2 hrs

The Individual in the Organization

6 Motivation- Theories-Early and Contemporary Approaches;

Applications at work

2 hrs

7 Attitudes- Nature and types- job satisfaction, job involvement,

organizational commitment, types of organizational commitment

2.30 hrs

Group Dynamics and Team Management

8 Foundations of group behaviour- Nature of groups, stages of group

development, group structure- roles, norms, status; group decision

making Types of teams- Creating high performance teams

2.30

hrs

9 Leadership- Nature and Theories- contemporary leadership roles 3 hrs

10 Power and Politics- Definition and basis of organizational politics 1.30 hrs

11 Art of Conflict Management- Definition of conflict; conflict process;

causes of conflict; Managing organizational conflict

2.00 hrs

12 Understanding Organizational culture and climate

Definition,

Impact of work culture on behavior and productivity

How culture is formed in organizations

2 hrs

13 Managing Change- Nature of planned change, Resistance to Change,

Lewin and Kotter’s model of planned change

2 hrs

TOTAL 30 HRS

349

Books Recommended

1. Robbins, S. P., & Judge, T. A. & Vohra, Organizational Behavior, Stephen P.

Robbins, Judge & Vohra Pearson. (latest edition)

2. Luthans, F Organizational Behavior, (12th Edition), Mc Graw Hill.

3. Aswathappa.K , Organizational behavior: Text, Cases and Games. Himalaya

Publishing House. (latest edition)

4. Greenberg.J and .Baron.R Behavior in Organizations. (latest edition)

5. Kinicki, A. & Kreitner, R. Organizational Behavior: key concepts, skills, & best

practices. 2nd edition. McGraw Hill. (latest edition)

6. Nelson, D. & Quick, J. Organizational Behavior: Foundations, Realities and

Challenges. 5th ed. Thomson South-Western. (latest edition)

7. Newstrom, J. & Davis, K Organizational behavior: readings and exercises. 8 th ed.

New York: McGraw Hill. (latest edition)

8. PareekUdai, “Understanding Organizational Behavior”, Oxford University Press.

(latest edition)

9. Parikh.M and Gupta.R, Organizational Behavior. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.

(latest edition)

10. Schermerhorn, J., Hunt, J. & Osborn, R. Managing Organizational Behavior. 3rded.

New York: Wiley. (latest edition)


Students will be evaluated through a mix of presentations, regular assignments, involvement in class activities and examinations.

350


HR Specialization

Course Name: Organizational Development and Change HR P7

Course Code: T2575

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4


1. The objective of this course is to provide valuable insight about the meaning and need for organization change and organization development for maintaining the effectiveness of the organization.

2. The course will help students to understand the process of Organization Development; apply, analyze, conduct and evaluate different Interventions necessary for achieving the organizational goals.

Learning Outcome:

It will help students to become effective change agents and OD consultants.

Pedagogy:

165. Lecture, 166. workshops, 167. assignments, 168. case studies

Pre-learning:

Students are expected to study Human Resource Management and Organizational Behavior courses before taking up this course.

Course Outline:

351

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Introduction: Organizational Development and Change 3

2 Overview of Human Process interventions, Techno-structural interventions and Human resource management interventions

3

3 Individual and Interpersonal Interventions 3

4 Team or Group Interventions 3

5 Comprehensive interventions, Strategic change interventions: Continuous change, Transformational change, Trans-organizational change.

6

6 Experiential learning of OD interventions 9

7 OD consultant: Role of OD consultant, Competencies of OD consultant. OD and future trends

3

Total 30

352

Books Recommended 9. Cummings, T. G., & Worley, C. G. (2008). Organization development and change. Cengage

Learning. 10. French, W. L. (2006). Org Dev&Trng, 6E (Iae). Tata McGraw-Hill Education. 11. Burnes, B. (2009). Managing Change: A Strategic Approach to Organizational Dynamics. Pearson

Education. 12. Carnall, C. A. (2007). Managing change in organizations. Pearson Education. 13. Srivastava, P. D. B. (2007). Organization Design & Development: Concepts & Applications.

Dreamtech Press. 14. Organization Development and Transformation: Managing Effective Change

Wendell French, Cecil Bell, Robert Zawacki. Tata McGraw-Hill Education 15. Managing Organizational Change: A Multiple Perspectives Approach

Ian Palmer, Richard Dunford, Gib Akin. Tata McGraw-Hill Education. 16. Singh, K. (2009). Organisation change and Development. Excel Books India. 17. Sharma Radha, R. (2007). Change management-Concepts and Applications. TMH Edition, 3, 33-

36. 18. Harigopal, K. (2006). Management of organizational change: Leveraging transformation. Sage. 19. Organization Development: Behavioral Science Interventions, Wendell L. French, Cecil H. Bell,

VohraVeena, 6th Edition, Pearson Education 20. HRD and Organizational Effectiveness- KalyaniMohanty and PadmalitaRoutray, Excel Books.

Other Reading Material:

1. Warrick, D. D. (2011). The urgent need for skilled transformational leaders: Integrating

transformational leadership and organization development. Journal of Leadership, Accountability, and Ethics, 8(5), 11-26.

2. Kotter, J. P. (1995). Leading change: Why transformation efforts fail. Harvard business review, 73(2), 59-67.

3. Worren, N. A., Ruddle, K., & Moore, K. (1999). From Organizational Development to Change Management The Emergence of a New Profession. The Journal of Applied Behavioral Science, 35(3), 273-286.

4. Stupak, R. J., & Moore, J. E. (1987). The practice of managing organization development in public sector organizations: Reassessments, realities, and rewards. International Journal of Public Administration, 10(2), 131-153.

5. Weick, K. E., & Quinn, R. E. (1999). Organizational change and development. Annual review of psychology, 50(1), 361-386.

6. Robertson, P. J., &Seneviratne, S. J. (1995). Outcomes of planned organizational change in the public sector: A meta-analytic comparison to the private sector. Public Administration Review, 547-558.

7. Senge, P. M. (Ed.). (1999). The dance of change: The challenges to sustaining momentum in a learning organization. Random House Digital, Inc..


Written Tests, assignments, Quiz, presentations

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Wendell%2BFrench

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Cecil%2BBell

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Robert%2BZawacki

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Ian%2BPalmer

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Richard%2BDunford

http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/cgi-bin/same_author.pl?author=Gib%2BAkin

353



Course Name: Performance Management System Course Code: T2576

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4


35. Understand the concepts and key constituents of PMS.

36. Understand the importance of PMS in business context.

37. Categorize the performance standards and develop performance objectives for business

scenario

38. Select appropriate measurement techniques for evaluation

Pedagogy:

169. Lectures

170. Case Study

171. Presentations

172. Role Play

Pre-learning:

Basics of Human Resource Management

354

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Performance Management : Nature and Systems 2

2 Components of PMS, Defining and Identifying Performance Indices: KPAs and KRAs for various job holders

3

3 Impact of improper objective on organizational performance 2

4 Performance Measurement Techniques 5

4 Balanced Score Card 2

5 Performance Management Execution, feedback system 2

6 Performance Coaching and Mentoring : Frameworks 4

7 Performance Decisions: Reward decisions 2

8 Performance Decisions: Rewarding individual, group and teams 2

9 Effective Performance Design: Relations between PMS and

compensation, Job Description and Training and Development 2

10 PMS Audit : Indicators, audit process and outcome 2

11 Current Trends in PMS 2

Books Recommended

1. Performance Management – Herman Aguinis, Pearson

2. Performance management – A strategic and Integrated Approach to achieve success

Michael Armstrong and Angela Baron, Jaico Books.

3. Performance Management: Measure & Improve the Effectiveness of your Employees.

Richard Luecke, Brian J Hall –Harvard Business School.

4. Performance Management: Concepts, Skills & Exercise. –Robert LCardy. M.E.

Sharpe Inc.

5. From Cost to Performance Management – Catherine Stenzel& Joe Stenzel Wiley.

6. Niven, P. R. (2008). Balanced scorecard step-by-step: maximizing

Performance and maintaining results (2nd ed.). New Jersey: John Wiley.

7. Richard, L., & Brian, J. H. (2006). Harvard business essentials:

Performance management: measure and improve the effectiveness of

Your employees (2nd ed.). Boston: HBS Press.


11. Test


13. Class participation

14. Assignment

15. Project

355

Sub Committee for Curriculum Development IT Business Management


Course Name : Principles and Practices of Management

Course Code : T2560

(UG/PG) : PG

Number of Credits : 2

Level : 3


On successful completion of the course students will be able to: 1. Understand basics of business theory and comprehend business principles, practices and

skills.(PODSCORB) 2. Understand the varied range of business organizations and activities and the cultural and economic

perspective in which business functions.

3. Understand the role of strategic analysis and implementation in Business 4. Enable students’ to be critical and effective contributors in overall business scenario

Pedagogy :

• 75% Teaching Theory Through Interactive Classes, PPT’s, Role Plays, Group/ Individual

Presentations • 25% Teaching through Case Studies (Sector Specific) and Management Games

Pre-learning : NIL

356

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Introduction: Management Concept: definition, goals and skills

• Roles of Manager

• Functional areas of Management • Issues and Challenges in Management

2.30

2

Managerial Aspects: Why mangers are important

• What is organization

• Functions, roles, and skills of managers.

• The factors that are reshaping and redefining the manager’s job.

• The value of studying management.

• Understanding Organizational Environment

• Creating organizational Culture

• Evolution of management thinking

5

2

Business organization and environment

• Types of organization

• Private sector and

• public sector

• Organizational objectives

• The importance of objectives

• Statements : Mission statements and Vision statements

• Aims and objectives

2.30

3

Evolution of Management Theory

• Scientific management.

• Bureaucratic organizations.

• Administrative principles.

• Human relation movement.

• Behavioral science approach.

• System theory.

• Contingency approach. Organization Design

5

4

Planning • Tools and Technique:

o Forecasting o Contingency o Scenario o Benchmarking o Best Practices o Participatory

• Types of Plan:

o Strategic Plan o Operational Plan

Policy, Procedures, Rules, Program, Project

2.30

5

Organizing

• Work specialization.

• Chain of command.

• Span of management. • Delegation.

2.30

357

• Types of the organization structures. Centralization and decentralization. Departmentalization.

Organization structure and environment

6

Controlling :

• Control as a management function

• Control process and approaches to implement control

• Types of control • Tools for measuring organizational performance

Perspectives on organizational power.

2.30

7

Decision making and Manager • Types of decisions and problems.

• Decision-making models: classical, administrative, and political.

• Decision-making steps. Vroom-Jago model.

• Risk in decision-making. Garbage-can theory. Group decision-making techniques. Conformity and groupthink.

2.30

8

Coordinating and Communication:

• Nature and function of communication

• Methods of interpersonal communication

• Information technology and communication

2.30

9

Managing People : Staffing

• Directing,

• Staffing, development and compensation

1.30

10

Budgeting – Overview The concept

Tools and Techniques

1

Course Outline

Books Recommended: • Management( Latest Edition) – Stephen Robbins, Mary Coulter and Niharika Vohra.

• Fundamentals of Management: James H. Donnelly, James Lawrence Gibson, John M. Ivancevich

• Essentials of Management: Weihrich Koontz

• Principles and Practices of Management: L.M Prasad

• Fundamentals of Financial Management: Chandra Prassana

• Principles of Marketing : Philip Kotler

Recommended Text Books: NIL

Additional Readings: HBR articles Cases on Business Startegies, Management Additional study materials if required and found suitable will circulated in the form of cases from ecch, and other selected sources, relevant videos of solutions providers and from other sources as

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor%3A%22James%2BH.%2BDonnelly%22

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor%3A%22James%2BLawrence%2BGibson%22

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor%3A%22John%2BM.%2BIvancevich%22

http://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor%3A%22John%2BM.%2BIvancevich%22

http://books.google.co.in/books?id=mu5bYgEACAAJ&dq=financial%2Bmanagement%2Bby%2Bprasanna%2Bchandra&hl=en&sa=X&ei=iVD7UZmYBMGLrQeV5IGQBg&ved=0CEcQ6AEwBA

358

selected by the faculty. Suggested Evaluation Methods:

Internal Evaluation : 60 Marks External Evaluation : 40 Marks

• Written Test • Group/Individual Presentation

• Quiz

• Assignment • Case Study Analysis


S.No. Name of the course Institute where it was offered 1 Apoorva Kulkarni

Name of Member

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Symbiosis Centre for Information Technology

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

359


Innovation Management Specialization

Course Name: Product Innovation

Course Code: T2247 Course No. IM P 3

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 5


The students will be able to

1. Appreciate the importance of product innovation in modern business

2. Apply the principles, practices, and concepts of product innovation in business

3. Evaluate the relationship of customer expectations and product innovation in

planning, managing, and executing the marketing mix.

4. Strtagize the use of innovation tools in product development

Learning Out comes :


• Apply the innovation processes to product development in business

• Apply the product development as a solution to business problems

• Develop product developer plan for marketers effectively compete in the market

Pedagogy: 1. Class Interactions

2. Case Study

3. Projects

4. Research Papers

5. Guest lectures

Pre-learning: Innovation Management and Marketing Management

360

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Innovation Strategy (Understanding Innovation: the need for

innovation in the Products) New product development as a

proactive/reactive process

3

2 Managing Product Innovation: New product development, Process

innovations, Product innovation, cases of success and failure. 3

3

Creating Customer-focused Ideas: understanding customers’ hidden

needs, Consumer Biases and Simplifying Heuristics.

Opportunity Identification (Sensing Opportunities Externally and

internally), Perceptual mapping, Market analysis and identification of

innovation opportunities

3

4

New Products Analytical Tools: Conjoint Analysis, Trade Off Analysis,

Dimensional Analysis and Relationship Analysis

Opportunity Screening and development

3

Idea generation: concept and tools. Concept Generation, Open

Innovation, Crowdsourcing & Expert sourcing. 2

4

Design, Prototyping, Strategic importance of Design,

New product design: concept and techniques;

3

5 Technical, market and financial risks of innovation, The economics of

First and Second movers 3

5 Testing Protection of Product and Design Innovations 3

6

Launch Crafting Deployment Strategy, New Product Diffusion

Models, communicating about new products, Product recall, Managing

the response of competitors

5

7 Auditing Innovation Performance ( Measuring and Quantifying

Innovation) 2

Course Outline

Books Recommended:

1. Crawford, Merle and Di Benedetto, Anthony (2011). New Products Management.

McGraw-Hill/Irwin.

2. Trott, Paul (2008). Innovation Management and New Product Development. Prentice Hall.

361

3. Michael E. McGrath (1996), Setting the PACE in Product Development, Butterworth-

Heinemann.

4. Henry Petroski (1996), Invention by Design by, Harvard University Press, 1996.

5. Preston G. Smith,and Donald G. Reinertsen(1997), Developing Products in Half the

Time : New Rules, New Tools, Wiley.

6. Joseph Tidd, J. R. Bessant, Keith Pavitt (2001) , Managing innovation: integrating

technological, market and organizational change, Wiley.

7. Peter F. Drucker (2006), Innovation and Entrepreneurship, HarperBusiness.

8. Armstrong, J. Scott (2001). Principles of Forecasting. Boston: Kluwer Academic

Publishers.

9. Mahajan, Muller & Wind (Eds.) (2001). New-Product Diffusion Models. Boston:

Kluwer.

10. Urban & Hauser (1993). Design and Marketing of New Products, 2nd Edition.

Englewood

Cliffs: Prentice-Hall.

11. J. Goldenberg and D. Mazursky (2002), Creativity in product innovation. Cambridge

University Press.

12. Craig M. Vogel, Jonathan Cagan, and Peter Boatwright, (2005), The Design of Things to

Come: How Ordinary People Create Extraordinary Products, Wharton School Publishing.


1. Presentations.

2. Projects

3. Case Analysis


S.No. Name of the course Institute where it was offered Nil Nil

Name of

Member

Ardhendu

Shekhar Singh

B R Londhe


Professor

Professor

Org. / Inst. SSBM SIMS

Signature

http://www.amazon.com/dp/0887306187/ref%3Drdr_ext_tmb

362

Name of the Expert: B R Londhe

Signature:

Date:

Articles:

Holak, Susan L. and Donald R. Lehmann (1990), "Purchase Intentions and the Dimensions of

Innovation: An Exploratory Model," Journal of Product Innovation Management, 7 (1), 59-73.

Moreau, C. Page, Arthur B. Markman, and Donald R. Lehmann (2001), ""What Is It?"

Categorization

Flexibility and Consumers' responses to Really New products," Journal of Consumer Research,

27, March, 489-98.

Moreau, C.P., Lehmann, D.R., & Markman, A. B. (2001), Entrenched Knowledge Structures and

Consumer Response to New Products, Journal of Marketing Research, 38(1), 14-29.

Gatignon, Hubert, Michael Tushman, Philip Anderson and Wendy Smith (2002), "A Structural

Approach To Assessing Innovation: Construct Development of Innovation Types and

Characteristics and their Organizational Effects," Management Science, 48, 9, 1103-1122.

Sorescu Alina B., Rajesh K. Chandy and Jaideep C. Prabhu (2003), "Sources and Financial

Consequences of Radical Innovation: Insights from Pharmaceuticals," Journal of Marketing, 67,

October, pp.82-102.

Kempf, Deanna S and Robert E Smith (1998), "Consumer processing of product trial and the

influence of prior advertising: A structural modeling approach," Journal of Marketing Research,

35 (3), 325-38.

Steenkamp, J.B. and K. Gielens (2003), "Consumer and Market Drivers of the Trial Probability

of New Consumer Packaged Goods," Journal of Consumer Research, Devember, 30, 3, 368-384.

Goldenberg, Jacob, David Mazursky, and Sorin Solomon (1999), "Toward identifying the

inventive templates of new products: A channeled ideation approach," Journal of Marketing

Research, 36 (2), 200-10.

Urban, G.L., & E. Von Hippel (1988), "Lead user analysis for the development of new industrial

products," Management Science, 34(May), 569-582.

Morrison, Pamela D., John H. Roberts, and Eric von Hippel (2000), "Determinants of User

Innovation and Innovation Sharing in a Local Market," Management Science, 46, 12

(December), 1513-27.

Goldenberg, Jacob, Donald R Lehmann, and David Mazursky (2001), "The idea itself and the

circumstances of its emergence as predictors of new product success," Management Science, 47

(1), 69-84.

363

Dahl, Darren W and Page Moreau (2002), "The Influence and Value of Analogical Thinking

During New Product Ideation," Journal of Marketing Research, 39 (1), 47-60.

Lillien, Gary L., Pamela D. Morrison, Kathleen Searls, Mary Sonnack and Eric Von Hippel

(2002),

"Performance Assessment of the Lead User Idea-Generation Process for New Product

Devleopment," Management Science, 48, 8, pp. 1042-1039.

Mahajan, Vijay, Eitan Muller, and Frank Bass (1993), "New Product Diffusion Models," in

Jehoshua Eliashberg and Gary L. Lilien, eds., Handbooks in Operations Research and

Management Science (Vol. Marketing), Amsterdam, The Netherlands: Elsevier Science

Publishers B.V., 349-408.

Sultan, Fareena, John U. Farley, and Donald R. Lehmann (1990), "A Meta-Analysis of

Applications of Diffusion Models," Journal of Marketing Research, 27, 1 (February), 70-77.

Bulte, Christoph Van den (2000), "New Product Diffusion Acceleration: Measurement and

Analysis,"

Marketing Science, 19, 4 (Fall), 366-80.

Urban G.L., and J. Hauser (2004), "Listening in" to find and explore new combinations of

customer needs, Journal of Marketing, 68 (April) , 72-87

Sethi, R., D. C. Smith and C. W. Park (2001). "Cross-Functional Product Development Teams,

Creativity, and the Innovativeness of New Consumer Products." Journal of Marketing Research

38(February): 73-85

Dodson, J. A. and E. Muller (1978), "Models of New Product Diffusion Through Advertising

and Word-of- Mouth," Management Science, 24, , 1568-1578.

Narasimhan, Chakravarthi (1989), "Incorporating Consumer Price Expectations in Diffusion

Models," Marketing Science, 8, 4 (Fall), 343-57.

Parker, Philip and Hubert Gatignon (1994), "Specifying Competitive Effects in Diffusion

Models: An

Empirical Analysis," International Journal of Research in Marketing, 11, , 17-39.

Kaul, Anil and Vithala R Rao (1995), "Research for product positioning and design decisions:

An integrative review," International Journal of Research in Marketing, 12 (4), 293 28 pages.

Griffin, A., & Hauser, J. R. (1993), "The Voice of the Customer," Marketing Science, 12, 1

(Winter), 1-27.

Hoeffler, S. (2003). Measuring preferences for really new products. Journal of Marketing

Research, 40(4), 406-420

364

Urban, G. L., Weinberg, B. D., & Hauser, J. R. (1996), "Premarket Forecasting of Really-New

Products," Journal of Marketing, 60, 1 (January), 47-60.

S.L. Brown & K.M. Eisenhardt, "Product development: Past research, present findings, and

future

directions," Academy of Management Review, 1995, 343-378

Krishnan, V., & K.T. Ulrich (2001), "Product development decisions: A review of the literature,"

Management Science, 47 (January), 1-21.

365


Course Name: Product Management Number of Credits: 2 Course Code: MM P 016 Course Range: 600-899 Level: 4/5

Learning Objective(s): After the completion of this course, a student shall be able to :

• Ably analyse the importance of markets, consumers , competition and marketing owing to Products.

• To give insights to the origin & Development of the Product Management Function

• To address the role of a Product and Production with the creation of products and services.

• Appreciate the importance of Product as one of the 4 P’s from among other in the marketing mix.

• Infer the importance of Product Strategy as a core to any organisation’s competitiveness.

• Analyse and assist in preparing sustainable competitive advantage while drafting product strategy.

• Conduct a holistic discussion and explanation of product strategy and new product management.

Pedagogy: 12. Lecture 13. Case Study 14. Projects 15. Group Presentatio

Pre-learning: 1. Marketing Management 2. Consumer Behaviour (Recommended) 3. Marketing Research (Recommended)

Course Outline

Sr. No.

Topic Hours

13. Overview of product management: • Emerging Trends, need, evolution,

• Relevance to different industries

• Role and scope of a product manager

3

14. Competitive Intelligence for Competitive Strategies • Analyzing Category Attractiveness and Competitor Analysis

6

366

o Product Category Mapping (Aggregate market , category and environmental factors)

o Assessing and analysing competitor objectives and strategy

• Analysing customers

• Who buys, what does the customer buy, Why does he buy and How does the customer choose.

• Customer Participation

• Multiattribute Model of Decision making.

• Customer Value and Assessing the value of product/brand or service

RM 1 Profit Benefits of Category Management (Michael J Zenor)

15. Product Portfolio Analysis: • Product Portfolio Models – The Strengths and Limitations of BCG Growth-Share Matrix,

GE , Shell’s Directional Flow Matrix

• AD Little and Risk Return Models For Portfolio Analysis – Analysis Of Product Length,

Depth And Width For Strategic Decisions

• Portfolio gap analysis and Product Planning – Products and Brands When to Go for

Branding—the Role of Packaging, Positioning, Repositioning, Differentiation, De-

marketing.

RM 2 Growing a brand through Portfolio management : Masterfoods

6

16. New Product Development

• The Importance of Innovations: (Consumer Adoption and Diffusion Process)

• Introduction and Reasons for NPD Success and Failure

• New Product Introduction Process: Different Models to explain ( Booz Allen and

Hamilton Model, Arthur De Little to add few more)

• Stages in NPIP :

o Opportunity Identification and Business Analysis

o Idea Generation, development and Testing (Projective Techniques)

o Concept Testing and Development (Multi-Attribute Analysis , Conjoint

Analysis, Multi-Attribute Analysis Models)

o Product Prototype testing,

o Product Development

o Product Design

o Market Analysis

o Pre-test Marketing Analysis (Simulated )

o Test marketing (Simulated and Non-simulated)

7

367

o Product Launch/Commercialisation

o Post Launch Test (Ongoing Test)

17. Pricing, Distribution and Promotion Decisions: • Planning for, Monitoring and Controlling the Product over Its Life Cycle;

• Role of Communication in Product Planning—PR, Advertising, Event Marketing and Sales

Promotion—

• Choice of Channels

3

18. Packaging in Product Strategy 2

19. Contemporary issues 3

Total Hours 30

Recommended Reading Material: RM 1 Profit Benefits of Category Management (Michael J Zenor) RM 2 Growing a brand through Portfolio management : Masterfoods Textbooks and Reference Material:

1. Product Strategy and Management 2nd ed. By Michael Baker and Susan Hart.

2. Product Management by Lehman & Weiner.

3. The Product Manager’s Handbook 3rd ed. by Linda Grochel

4. Product Innovation by Dr B.R. Londhe

5. New Product Development- by Suresh K Hyderabad/icfai press/2006

6. New Product Management by Merle C Crawford and Benedetto C Anthony.

7. Successful Product Management by Stephen Morse, Kogan.

8. Product Management by Srivastava

9. Product Management in India by Mujumdar

10. Product Management & Cases by Chandrashekhar

11. Product Management by S.A.Chunnawala

12. Product Management by C. Anandan

13. Brown, N Marisa, Paige Leavitt, Steve Wright ‘New Product Development’. Tata McGraw Hill

Evaluation :

2 credits – 100 marks iii) Internal

a. Projects & presentationProduct Research Assignment

iv) External

http://10.10.61.5/webopac/details.asp?m_doc_no=8626

368




Course Name: Project (Corporate Social Responsibility)

Course Code: T2237

(UG/PG): PG



Level: 5



Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR).


domain of CSR within corporate context by linking the micro context to that of macro

context in a state and global context.

Expected Outcomes:

2. At the end of the course students will have a broad understanding of CSR related aspects

within a corporate atmosphere, and should be in a position to review and make a CSR

project.

Pedagogy:

173. Lecture.

174. Case Study.


176. Workshops.

Pre-learning:

NIL

369

S. No. Topic Hours

1.

Corporate Social responsibility

a. Political economy of CSR: Scholarly arguments both pro

and against CSR practices (Introducing Milton Friedman

and Michel Porter)

b. Global standard practices by corporates in Corporate Social

Responsibility (CSR): globalization and its implications on

CSR.

c. CSR as a strategic tool in governance d. Non-strategic CSR

7

2.

a. Role of different stakeholders in CSR (State,

Community, and Civil Society/NGO or NPO).

b. Managing expectations of different stakeholders through

CSR.

c. CSR in India: cases of Private and public sector

enterprises

d. Where to start your CSR? Social Problems v/s

Enterprise Problems

e. CSR project formulation, implementation, evaluation

and Reporting-social audit.

8

Books Recommended

20. Bidyut Chakrabarty, 2009, Corporate Social Responsibility in India. Routledge.

21. Sanjay K Agarwal. 2008. Corporate Social Responsibility in India. SAGE Publications.



23. W. Timothy Coombs, Sherry J. Holladay. 2012. Managing Corporate Social

Responsibility: A Communication Approach. Wiley publishers.

24. Samuel O. Idowu, Celine Louche (Ed.). 2011. Theory and Practice of Corporate Social

Responsibility. Springer.

25. Jeanette Brejning. 2012. Corporate Social Responsibility and the Welfare State: The

Historical and the welfare state: The historical contemporary role of CSR in the mixed

economy of welfare. Ashgate Publishing ltd.



27. Milton Friedman (1970), The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits

Articles:

1. Archie B. Carroll, (1999), Corporate Social Responsibility: Evolution of a Definitional

Construct, Business & Society , 38: 268-295.

2. Abagail McWilliams1 and Donald Siegel, Corporate Social Responsibility: a Theory of

the Firm Perspective, ACAD MANAGE REV January 1, 2001 vol. 26 no. 1 117-127.

370

3. Elisabet Garriga, Domènec Melé, (2004), Corporate Social Responsibility Theories:

Mapping the Territory, Journal of Business Ethics, August 2004, Volume 53, Issue 1-2,

pp 51-71.

4. Michael Porter and Mark Kramer, (2002), the competitive advantage of corporate

philanthropy, December, pp. 5-16.

5. Michael Porter and Mark Kramer, (2002), strategy and society: the link between

competitive advantage and corporate social responsibility, December, pp. 78-93.

6. Adam Lindgreen1, Valérie Swaen (2010), Corporate Social Responsibility, International

Journal of Management Reviews, Volume 12, Issue 1, pages 1–7.

7. Ronald Paul Hill, Thomas Ainscough, Todd Shank, Daryl Manullang, (2007), Corporate

Social Responsibility and Socially Responsible Investing: A Global Perspective quick

view, Journal of Business Ethics, Vol. 70, No. 2 , pp. 165-174


9. Corporate Social Responsibility and Environmental Management

10. Nonprofit Management and Leadership

11. VOLUNTAS: International Journal of Voluntary and Nonprofit Organizations

12. Nonprofit and Voluntary Sector Quarterly

13. Indian journal of social work.






19. Harvard Business Review.


3. Projects


Benchmark

1. New York University

https://wagner.nyu.edu/files/syllabi/201206/PADM-GP.4134.001_0.pdf

2. MIT University

http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/sloan-school-of-management/15-270-ethical-practice-

professionalism-social-responsibility-and-the-purpose-of-the-corporation-spring-

2010/calendar/


http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/sloan-school-of-management/15-270-ethical-practice-professionalism-social-responsibility-and-the-purpose-of-the-corporation-spring-2010/calendar/



371


Business Ethics and


SIBM,P

Business Ethics and


SIBM,B


CSR

SCMHRD


Business Ethics &


SIBM,B


business Ethics

SIHS

Name of

Member

Venkatesha

Murthy

Ardhendu

Shekhar

Singh

Shrirang

Altekar


Professor

Assistant

Professor

Director


Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

372

Sub-Committee for Curriculum Development

Banking & Finance Specialization Course : FP63

Course Name: Project Feasibility and Financing (UG/PG): PG

Number of Credits: 2 Level: 4

Learning Objective(s) Students will be able to:

1. Bring forth fundamental clarity on the process of infrastructure appraisal 2. Anticipate and identify the necessary data and assumptions

3. Identify project flows 4. Appraise the financial viability from the perspective of developers, investors, lenders and

Govt. sector 5. Identify and analyse the risks and quantify the same so as to gauge the appropriateness of

the returns 6. Discuss issues of taxation, company laws relevant to appraisal

7. Evaluate the suitability of various categories, types and sources of financing the project.


S. No. Topic Hours 1 Project Formulation process, Preliminary screening 3 2 Project Appraisal process 2

3 Identifying the demand for services and projections 2 4 Technical appraisal and cost calculations 2 5 Financial projections 2 6 Identifying project Cash flows from different perspectives 2 7 Applying appraisal criteria 2 8 Assessment of Risk 2

9 Fundamentals of various categories of sources of finance 2 10 Choosing Finance 2 11 Raising finance from Commercial Banks Process and issues 2 12 Issues of Taxation 2 13 Assignments 6

Total Hours 31

2. Case Studies 3. Discussions on current developments

Pre-learning:

373

1. Financial Management I 2. Public Private Partnerships

Course Outline Infrastructure services serve the society in the larger interest. Still the projects need to be

generating sufficient returns on the capital invested. This course deals with fundamentals of investment evaluations under various parameters relevant for investors, Lenders and Govt. sector. There is always a need for creating services at the most economic rates. Global completion, costs are major concerns. Financing, choosing appropriate sources are significant for developer so as to

be financially attractive. Various innovations in financing need to be explore. This course serves as a foundation for students wanting to specialize in Project Financing, one of the specializations offered

in Sem-III. Books Recommended:

1. “Projects – Appraisal, financing and implementation’ by Dr Prasanna Chandra, Tata

McGraw Publishing

References: 1. Research articles by Benjamin Esty

2. ‘Modern cases in Project Finance’ by Benjamin Esty

3. Mid Term Review of 11th Plan, Infrastructure Development in 12th Plan-Approach papers.

4. Periodicals such as ‘India Infrastructure’ ‘Infrastructure Today’, ‘Powerline’

5. ‘India Infrastructure Reports’ 2002 to 2009 published by 3iNetwork Publications

6. Reports / Study papers on websites of Ministry of Finance, Roads, Power, Urban

Development, Water sources, Shipping, Petroleum and Natural Gas, Railways, Civil Aviation,

Commerce & Industry, New & Renewable energy, Mines and Secretariat of Infrastructure ,

Planning commission

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Students will be evaluated through a mix of presentations, individual and group assignments,

involvement in class activities and examination. Quiz (1) 15 marks Assignments (3) 45 marks Final Exam 40 marks

374

(Established under section 3 of the UGC Act 1956, by notification No.F.9-12/2001-U3 Government of India)

Accredited by NAAC with ‘A’ Grade

Founder: Prof. Dr. S. B. Mujumdar, M.Sc.,Ph.D. (Awarded Padma Bhushan and Padma Shri by President of India)

Sub Committee - Specialization for Curriculum Development (Mandatory Credit for First

Year PG Freshman)

Well for Life – 1 credit over 1st Semester (30 Hrs. 1 credit: 30hrs / Semester.) for post

graduates (only freshmen) under Mandatory Letter grade, Credit Policy of SIU

Post Graduate

Course Name: Well for Life (Project 1)

Course Code: T4665


Level – 2

Learning objective and outcome (S)

• Acquire knowledge and skills for life long participation in physical activity

• Improving quality of life through practice of yoga

• Achieving optimum health benefits

• To improve physical and mental well-being.

Pre-learning:

• Basic Knowledge and skills in Physical activity and Yoga

Course Outline

S.No Topic Hours

375

1 Yoga

• Understanding Yoga and its place in life

• Yoga practice through the life span

4

2 • Asanas –

o Shithilikaran

o Traditional asanas (any 4)

o Relaxative asanas (any 4)

o Meditative asanas (any 2)

o Pranayam and Kriyas (any 4)

o Salutation

10

3. • Stress Management Techniques 10

4. • Physical activity 6

Total 30

Pedagogy:

1. Field and indoor practical

2. Demonstrations

3. Discussions

4. Group Activities

Books Recommended:

1. Wener W.K. Hoeger, Sharon A. Hoeger (2013). Fitness and Wellness

2. BKS Iyengar (2015). Yoga For Sports: A Journey towards Health and Healing

3. B.K.S. Iyengar (2014). BKS Iyengar Yoga The Path to Holistic Health

4. DK (2012). The Fitness Book

5. American College of Sports Medicine (2003). ACSM Fitness Book

6. Yoga books publication Munger and S Vyasa

Assessment –

Assessment 1 Physical Activity- Physical Activity tracking

Assessment 2- Yoga (12 salutations and any 1 asanas and any1 pranayam)

376

Min 40 % marks for passing. Failures will be allowed 2 further attempts in the 2nd & 3rd year.

Final performance will be reflected as a letter grade in the final transcript

S. No.

Name of the Course Name of University where it is

offered

1. Fitness & Wellness Programs Yale University

2. Wellness Stanford University

3. BSc; Sport & Physical Activity University of Strathclyde Glasgow

4. YIC S VYASA; Bangalore

Name of

Members

Dr. Nayana

Nimkar

Dr

Amritashish

Bagchi

Designation Director Asst.

Professor

Org. / Inst. SSSS SSSS

Signature

Name of

Experts

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Signature of Dean:

Date:

377


General Management Specialization Course Name: Transformation to Corporate Leaders (Project II) Number of Credits: 2

Course Code:

Learning Objective(s): At the end of the course the student will be able to: • To Orient the new batch of MBA students towards management learning

• To apprise the new batch of MBA students to the various departments of the institute.

• To inculcate physical, emotional, mental, and social development of new batch of MBA students

• To develop the attitude of discipline, leadership, time management amongst the new batch of MBA

students

• To inculcate overall development of new batch of MBA students

Pedagogy:

• Case Studies.


• Assignments.

• Projects.

• Workshops.

• Lectures

Pre-learning: E-primer

Course Outline S.No Topic Hours

1 Induction – a) Briefing session by Director sir and Deputy Director sir (1 day

before the commencement of the Induction) b) Session by SCHC c) Session by the Campus Administration, Academics Head,

Placement Incharge, Librarian, IT Head, Examination Head

11

378

d) Admin department (1 day before the commencement of the Induction)

2 Value Added sessions - A] Guest sessions

a) Inauguration Ceremony b) Guest lecture on the Inauguration day c) Guest lectures conducted on the other days d) Musical Programme by Dr Rahul Joshi

15.5

3 Value Added sessions- B] Classroom session

a) Session on Economics b) Session on Statistics c) Session on Business communication

& logo motto, vision and mission d) Session on Accounting e) Others

26

4 Outreach Programme – a) Institute Social Responsibility (ISR) b) Cleanliness Drive

7.5

5 Extension Programme – a) Business Exercise b) Market Survey c) Inbound Activity d) General Management Games

27

6 Physical Training a) PT b) Yoga c) Zumba

5

7 Assignments (Self Study) Batch meets conducted by the Senior Student councils under the supervision of a faculty, staff and office attendant

28

TOTAL HOURS 120

379




Course Name: Project IV (Corporate Social Responsibility)

Course Code: T2237

(UG/PG): PG



Level: 5



Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR).


domain of CSR within corporate context by linking the micro context to that of macro

context in a state and global context.

Expected Outcomes:

3. At the end of the course students will have a broad understanding of CSR related aspects

within a corporate atmosphere, and should be in a position to review and make a CSR

project.

Pedagogy:

177. Lecture.

178. Case Study.


180. Workshops.

Pre-learning:

NIL

380

S. No. Topic Hours

1.

Corporate Social responsibility

e. Political economy of CSR: Scholarly arguments both pro

and against CSR practices (Introducing Milton Friedman

and Michel Porter)

f. Global standard practices by corporates in Corporate Social

Responsibility (CSR): globalization and its implications on

CSR.

g. CSR as a strategic tool in governance h. Non-strategic CSR

7

2.

f. Role of different stakeholders in CSR (State,

Community, and Civil Society/NGO or NPO).

g. Managing expectations of different stakeholders through

CSR.

h. CSR in India: cases of Private and public sector

enterprises

i. Where to start your CSR? Social Problems v/s

Enterprise Problems

j. CSR project formulation, implementation, evaluation

and Reporting-social audit.

8

Books Recommended

28. Bidyut Chakrabarty, 2009, Corporate Social Responsibility in India. Routledge.

29. Sanjay K Agarwal. 2008. Corporate Social Responsibility in India. SAGE Publications.



31. W. Timothy Coombs, Sherry J. Holladay. 2012. Managing Corporate Social

Responsibility: A Communication Approach. Wiley publishers.

32. Samuel O. Idowu, Celine Louche (Ed.). 2011. Theory and Practice of Corporate Social

Responsibility. Springer.

33. Jeanette Brejning. 2012. Corporate Social Responsibility and the Welfare State: The

Historical and the welfare state: The historical contemporary role of CSR in the mixed

economy of welfare. Ashgate Publishing ltd.



35. Milton Friedman (1970), The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits

Articles:

8. Archie B. Carroll, (1999), Corporate Social Responsibility: Evolution of a Definitional

Construct, Business & Society , 38: 268-295.

9. Abagail McWilliams1 and Donald Siegel, Corporate Social Responsibility: a Theory of

the Firm Perspective, ACAD MANAGE REV January 1, 2001 vol. 26 no. 1 117-127.

381

10. Elisabet Garriga, Domènec Melé, (2004), Corporate Social Responsibility Theories:

Mapping the Territory, Journal of Business Ethics, August 2004, Volume 53, Issue 1-2,

pp 51-71.

11. Michael Porter and Mark Kramer, (2002), the competitive advantage of corporate

philanthropy, December, pp. 5-16.

12. Michael Porter and Mark Kramer, (2002), strategy and society: the link between

competitive advantage and corporate social responsibility, December, pp. 78-93.

13. Adam Lindgreen1, Valérie Swaen (2010), Corporate Social Responsibility, International

Journal of Management Reviews, Volume 12, Issue 1, pages 1–7.

14. Ronald Paul Hill, Thomas Ainscough, Todd Shank, Daryl Manullang, (2007), Corporate

Social Responsibility and Socially Responsible Investing: A Global Perspective quick

view, Journal of Business Ethics, Vol. 70, No. 2 , pp. 165-174


20. Corporate Social Responsibility and Environmental Management

21. Nonprofit Management and Leadership

22. VOLUNTAS: International Journal of Voluntary and Nonprofit Organizations

23. Nonprofit and Voluntary Sector Quarterly

24. Indian journal of social work.






30. Harvard Business Review.


5. Projects


Benchmark

3. New York University


4. MIT University

http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/sloan-school-of-management/15-270-ethical-practice-

professionalism-social-responsibility-and-the-purpose-of-the-corporation-spring-

2010/calendar/





382


Business Ethics and


SIBM,P

Business Ethics and


SIBM,B


CSR

SCMHRD


Business Ethics &


SIBM,B


business Ethics

SIHS

Name of

Member

Venkatesha

Murthy

Ardhendu

Shekhar

Singh

Shrirang

Altekar


Professor

Assistant

Professor

Director


Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

383




Course Name: Project Management

Course Code: T2193

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP32


Level: 4


1. To understand and learn major aspects of project management 2. To discuss various concepts, tools & techniques of project management. 3. To discuss various issues related to project planning and scheduling 4. To discuss various issues in project evaluation. 5. To analyze and categorize the different risks involved in project management.



Pre-learning: Nil

384

Sr. No. Topic Hours

1 Project Management Overview-Definition, functions, evolution of Project Management, Classification, different environments 2

2 Project Management Systems-Systems approach, analysis, development, project feasibility, life cycle, appraisal, different phases of development cycle 2

3 Project Feasibility Study-Developing a project plan, Analysis -market & technical, financial, risk, sensitivity, social cost benefit analysis

2

4

Project Planning and Scheduling-Planning fundamentals, master plan, work breakdown structure, work packages, Use of Gantt Charts & network diagrams, activity of node diagrams, activity on arrow diagrams, the critical path

3

5 PERT, CPM, Resource Allocation-Tools & techniques for scheduling , crashing of networks, time cost, relationship, resource levelling

4

6 Cost Estimating & Budgeting -Cost estimating process elements of budgeting, project cost accounting

4

7 Managing Risks in Projects-Risk concept & identification, risk assessment, risk priority, risk response planning, risk management methods

2

8 Project Control and Project MIS-Information monitoring, internal & external project control, , variance limits, features of PMIS

3

9 Project Evaluation, Reporting & Termination-Project reviews & reporting, closing the contract 2

10

Project Organization- Structure-Requirements of project organizations, structures & integration in large scale projects, roles -project manager & team, Leadership, Building teams, Resolving conflicts

2

11 Project Quality -Quality assurance, quality audit, tools & techniques of TQM 2

12 Contract and Procurement Management-Project Procurement and Contracts Management Methods

2

Total 30

Course Outline Changed from 2 to 3 hrs. as per mail from Dr.Vandana Sonwaney on June 09, 2014 Books Recommended

1. Project Management for Business & Technology (Principles & Practice) 2. By Nicholas, John M. Pearson Education 3. Project Management – A Managerial Approach: By Meredith, Jack R / Mantel, Samuel J. JW &

Sons, 2002 4. Projects: Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation & Review By Chandra, Prasanna.

Tata McGraw Hill 2004 5. Project Management – A systems Approach to Planning, Scheduling and Controlling by

Harold Kerzener , Wiley publications 6. Project Management – A systems Approach to Planning, Scheduling and Controlling by

Harold Kerzener , Wiley publications


• Project • Case analysis

385



1 Project Management SIOM

2 Project Management (Operations) SCMHRD

3 Project Planning, Analysis & Management SIBM-B

4 Project Management SIBM-P

5 Project Management SIIB

6 Project Management SIMS

Name of Member



Dr. Suresh Jakhar

Prof. Shirish Jeble

Designation


Assistant Professor

Assistant Professor


Signature

Name of the Expert:


Signature:


386



Course Name: Project Management Suite

Course Code: T3312

(UG/PG): PG



Every business faces the challenges of achieving the goals with optimization. The aim of the Project

Management course is to equip bussing mangers with tools and knowledge to enable them face the primary

challenge of project management to achieve all of the project goals and objectives while honoring the

preconceived constraints in order to optimize the allocation of necessary inputs and integrate them to meet pre-

defined objectives.

Pedagogy: Project Management concepts understanding with discussion, demonstration and hands on using Enterprise Project Management Suite MS Project.

Pre-learning: Fundamental understanding of Project, Gantt Chart & Network Diagram

387

Course Outline

Sr. No. Topics No. of Hours

1 CONCEPT OF A PROJECT

Project management Life cycle

Concept of PERT, CPM, GANTT Chart

Case study discussion

2

2 Project Management Suite introduction

Planning

Scheduling

2

3 Significance of Critical path and impact on projects

Baseline Concepts and necessity in Project life cycle

2

4 Controlling views

Resources, Types and allocation

3

5 Resource costs all options

Resource Views

3

6 Cost Views

Tracking Views

2

7 Resource over allocation issues

Resource leveling

2

8 Earned value concept

Concept of Master and sub Projects

2

9 Project Crashing scenarios– Constraints 2

10 Case studies 10

Total Hours 30

Books Recommended

• Leo Staples, “Project Management: A Technician's Guide”, 2010 International Society of Automation, ISBN 978-1-934394-75-5.

• Harold Kerzner, “Advanced Project Management: Best Practices on Implementation”, 2004 by

John Wiley & Sons, ISBN: 0-4-71-47284-0.

Reference Reading

Project Management – K. Nagarajan Elements of Project Management- K. Nagarajan Modern Project Management- R.C. Mishra, Tarun Soota Microsoft Project Handbook


Presentation Hands on – Class assignments and homework assignments Projects/practical application using tool Case study

388

Term / Semester end examination


Name of Member

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

389




Course Name: Quality Management

Course Code: T2163

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP02


Level: 4


43. To develop understanding about benefits of Quality management to enterprises. 44. To develop proficiency in knowledge and use of different quality management standards. 45. To define the impact of Quality management systems on organizational performance. 46. To demonstrate tools of Quality Management 47. To analyze the different criteria for quality awards

Pedagogy: 181. Lectures supported by case studies 182. Projects /Assignments on application of Quality tools by various orgnisations.

Pre-learning: Nil

390

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Evolution, Concepts of quality, definitions, approaches, philosophy and systems. Inspection and Quality assurance Quality control.

3

2

Use of seven QC tools such as Process flow chart, Check sheet, Histogram, Pareto chart, Cause & Effect Diagram, Control chart, Scatter Diagram, Process capability studies, Application of SPC.

6

3

Quality Standards. Introduction to ISO 9000 Series, Certifying bodies Accreditation agencies, Necessity for certification & Certification process, Benefits of certification Study of ISO 9000 Series clauses, such as Quality Management System, Management Responsibility, Resource Management, Product Realization, Measurement, Analysis and Improvement.

6

4 Introduction to TQM, Need, Importance, purpose & benefits of TQM. External & Internal Customer-Supplier relationship

3

5

Process Management-Process Control, Continuous process improvement. Tools for Process improvement. Poka-Yoke (mistake proofing), Taguchi Loss Function, QFD, FMEA, DFM, Design for Quality, Quality Performance Measurement: Cost of quality, Retu on Quality, Concept of Zero defects.

6

6

Quality Awards: Deming Award, Malcom Baldrige Criteria for business performance excellence etc.

3

7 Basic principles of Six Sigma. 1.5

8 Service Quality and its management 1.5

Total 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended

• Quality Management by Kanishka Bedi, Oxford University Press

• Juran on Leadership for Quality

• Juran’s Quality Planning & Analysis for Enterprise Quality (TMG Hill)

• Quality is Free by Philip Crosby

• Total Quality Management by Dale H. Besterfield, Carol, Glen, Mary – Pearson education. • Quality Control and Management by James Evans & William Lidnsayith

• Total Quality Management with Cases John S Oakland

• Principles of Total Quality, Vincent K Omachom, Joel E Ross, J.A. Swift.

• 100 Methods for Total Quality Management, Gopal K Kanji & Mike Asher.

391

Suggested Evaluation Methods: • Case presentations

• Project work to be evaluated on the basis of understanding the impact of Quality on businesses



1 Quality management SIOM 2 Quality management SIIB

3 Total Quality management (2) SIBM B

4 Total Quality management (3) SIBM B

5 Total Quality management SIMS

Name of Member

Dr Vandana Manisha Ketkar

Mr Shirish Jeble

Dr. Suresh Jakhar

Designation Director Dy Director Asst

Professor Asst. Professor

Org. / Inst. SIOM SIIB SIBM P SCMHRD

Signature

Name of the Expert: Manisha Ketkar

Signature:

Date: 3rdt August 2013

392

SYMBIOSIS INTERNATIONAL (DEEMED) UNIVERSITY

Established under section 3 of the UGC Act 1956,

Re- accredited by NAAC with ‘A’ Grade


Sub Committee - Specialization for Curriculum Development

Data Science

Post Graduate/ Under Graduate

Course Title: R Programming

Course Code: T3531


Level: 02

Learning Objective/Outcome (s):

This course will help students to understand the R programming basics. After completion of this course

student can able to do data analysis using R programming.

Pre-learning:

Basic knowledge of statistics

Course Outline:

Sr.

No.

Topic Name

No. of Hrs.

1. Introduction to R programming 2

2.

Data Types in R, Different vector operations, Programming

constructs in R, Arrays, Lists

6

3. Reading different file formats: .txt,.json, .csv, xlsx, xls, XMl,

database files 4

4. User defined functions in R. 2

5. Numeric, character, date ,grouping functions in R 4

6. Graphs and Charts in R 4

7. Statistical data analysis using R 3

8. Data Analysis using R, Web Scraping 5

Total 30

Pedagogy

• Lectures

393

• Presentations

• Lab Work

• Case Study

Books Recommended

• R for Data Science: 1st Editionby Hadley Wickham , Garrett Grolemund , ISBN-13: 978-1491910399

ISBN-10: 1491910399

• Hands-On Programming with R, Garrett Grolemund ISBN-13: 978-1449359010,ISBN-

10: 1449359019

• R Cookbook: Paul Teetor ISBN-13: 978-0596809157,ISBN-10: 0596809158

• Curran, J.M. (2010) Introduction to Data Analysis with R for Forensic Scientists, ISBN: 978-

1420088267

• Murrell, P (2005) R Graphics, ISBN: 978-1584884866

• Murrell, P Introduction to Data Technologies www.stat.auckland.ac.nz/~paul/ItDT

Suggested Assessment/ Evaluation Methods

🟃 Quizzes

🟃 Presentation

🟃 Assignments

Benchmarked against similar courses in other national/ international universities /organizations

S. No.

Name of the Course Name of University where it is offered

1. Introduction to R The University of Auckland

2. Introduction to R Stanford University

Name of

Members

Dr. Vidya

Patkar

Prafulla

Bafna


Professor

Assistant

Professor

Org. / Inst. SICSR SICSR

Signature

Name of

Experts

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Signature of Dean:

Date:

http://www.stat.auckland.ac.nz/~paul/ItDT

394


Entrepreneurship

Specialization


Course Name: Regulatory Framework For Entrepreneurs Course No. ENTRE U 8

Course Code: T2346

(UG/PG):____UG__________

Number of Credits:_3___________________

Level:3

Learning Objective(s): After completion of the course the students will be able to

• Apply the Industrial policies fostering Entrepreneurship.

• Name and recognize the essential labour laws applicable to Entrepreneurs.

Pedagogy: 183.

_Lectures__( AV

)_____________________________________________________________________________________ 184. Case Studies_,

Workshops_____________________________________________________________________________________

395

185. Industry Interactions_and visits_____________________________________________________________________________________

Pre-learning: ENTRE U2 ,ENTRE U 3, ENTRE U 4, ENTRE U 5, ENTRE U 6.

Course Outline

Unit Contents Hours

I Introduction

Different forms of Business organisation

Proprietary, partnership-LLP, Incorporated association

Types of companies - advantages and disadvantages

Industrial policies fostering entrepreneurship

Deregulation and relicensing

Industrial policy regulation since 1991

15

II Laws applicable to Entrepreneurs

Laws for setting up business in Special Economic Zones-An

overview of the-The MSMED ACT,2006 Intellectual property laws for the entrepreneurs

An overview of the laws relating to Patent, Trademark, Design

and Copyright.

15

III Essential Labour laws applicable to entrepreneurs The Shops and Establishment ACT.

396

The Factories Act, 1948

The Employee State Insurance Act, 1951

The Workmen’s compensation Act, 1923

The Payment of gratuity Act, 1972

15

Recommended Books:

Ashok Bagrial,‘Company Law’, Vikas publishing house, 12th Edition, 2005

Misra and Puri, ‘Indian Economy’, Himalaya Publishers,2007

N.D.Kapoor, ‘Elements of Mercantile Law’, Sultan Chand

Suggested Evaluation Methods:Assignments, Projects, Written tests, MCQs , Case Analysis

Parallel/Similar courses the existing curriculum: NA


Signature:

Date: 1/08/2013

Name of Member

Sabiha Fazalbhoy

Sruti Mitra

Designation Faculty Member

Asst. Professor

Org. / Inst. SCMS ( Pune ) SCMS ( Pune )

Signature


397


QS& A Specialization

Course Name: Research Methodology

Course Code: T2225

(UG/PG): PG


Course No. QS&A P 12

Level: 04

Learning Objective(s): 48. To enable students comprehend research issues 49. To enable students to identify research questions and formulate research hypothesis 50. To equip students with various techniques of research design and data collection 51. To enable students to synthesize qualitative and quantitative data crunching techniques

Pedagogy:

186. Cases 187. Live Projects

Pre-learning: Basic Statistics

398

S.No. Topic Hours

01 Introduction to Research • Types of research • Research Process

04

02 Literature Review • Traditional Literature review

• Systematic Literature Review

• Critical Literature review

• Grouping variables through Literature review • Primary and Secondary data and exploration

04

03 Theoretical Framework and Hypothesis Formulation • Direct Linkage Model • Indirect Linkage Model

• Control Variable Treatment

• Moderating Variables

• Mediating Variables

• Intervening Variables • Cofounding Variables

• Exogenous and Endogenous variables • Formulation of Hypothesis and Research questions

06

04 Research Design • Types of Research design

• Instrument design, Scale formation • Sampling Design

• Data Collection methods

• Reliability test of Instrument • Validity test of Test of Data

06

05 Data Analysis &Interpretation • Descriptive Analysis

• Normality tests

• Outlier tests

• Data Reduction • Hypothesis testing

06

06 Referencing • APA format

• Harvard Style

• IEEE format • MLA format

02

07 Report Writing 01

08 Ethical Practices in Research • Plagiarism

• Introduction to plagiarism software • Legal, Governmental and other norms

01

Total 30

Course Outline

399

Books Recommended 1. Adler, Stier and Clark, How it’s done: An Invitation to Social Research 2. Becker, Writing for Social Sciences: How to start and finish your thesis, book, or article 3. Cooper, Schindler , Social Sciences Research Methods: 4. Salkind, Exploring research

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Projects and written exams


01 Research Methodology SITM, SIOM, SCMS-P, SSE

Name of Member

Prof. Sandeep Prabhu

Prof. Rameshwar Dubey

Prof. Vani Rajesh

Prof. Ishita Ghosh


Org. / Inst. SITM SIOM SCMS (P) SSE

Signature


Signature:

Date:

400



Post Graduate

Course : FP32

Course Name: Retail Banking

Course Code: T2499


Level:4


1. Appraise the various functions and the operations of a bank.

Pedagogy: 188. Interactive classroom session 189. Case study 190. Group assignment/presentation

Pre-learning:

Knowledge of basic Commercial Banking

401

S.No. Topic Hours

Introduction, Functions and Growth of the Banking Sector 2

Current reforms in the Banking sector, Retail banking industry in India 4

Retail Liabilities 7

Retail assets 7

Corporate Banking & Wealth Management 6

Portfolio management 4

Cases in Retail Banking

30

Course Outline

Books Recommended

1. Retail Banking, Keith Pond, Financial World Publishing, 2012 2. Retail Banking in India, O P Agrawal, Skylark Publishers, India 3. Retail Banking, IIBF, 2010, Macmillan Publishers India 4. Merchant Banking by Verma J C 5. Merchant Banking by Machi Raju 6. Management of Banking and Financial Services By Justin Paul and Padmalatha Suresh

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Periodical written test/quiz Group assignment End term written test


Name of Member

Dr. Mita Mehta Prof. Aneesh Day


Visiting Faculty


Signature


402


Retail Management

Course Name: Retail Distribution and Logistics

Course code: RM P 4

Course Code: T2329

UG/PG: PG

Credit: 2

Level: 5

Objectives:


Critically analyse the role and importance of logistics in the formation of business strategy for retail Develop relationship between logistics operating areas and their interrelationships. Design mechanism to reduce cost involved in retail logistics

Leaning outcome


o Strengthen integrative management analytical and problem-solving skills in

retail logistics. o Design cost reduction models in retail logistics.

Pedagogy

Case studies

Projects

Theory

Pre learning

Marketing Management, Sales and Distribution management

Course outline

S.No Course Content Hours

1 Definition and Role of Distribution and Logistics 2

403

2 Warehousing

• Overview

• Ownership Decisions

• Layout and Design

• Location Decisions

4

3 Inventory management, Packaging and Material

Handling

6

4 Transportation for Modern Organized Retail

• Inbound Transportation

• Outbound Transportation

• Reverse Logistics

• 3rd Party logistics Company

5

5 Distribution and Logistics for different Retail

Formats

6

6 Channel Management

• Importance and role of channels

• Channel flows

• Channel Power and conflict

5

7 Technology in Distribution 2

Total hours 30

Books 1. Coyle John / Bardi Edward] – The management of Business Logistics – A Supply

Chain Perspective,Thomson Asia Publisher.

2. Croucher Phil / Rushton Alan– The Hand book of Logistics & Distribution

management – Kogan age Publisher.

3. Levy Michael / Weitz Barton Retailing Management ,McGraw Hill.

4. Khanna K.K– Physical Distribution Management logistics approach – Himalayan

Publisher.

5. Ross David Distribution Planning and control ,Spinger Pvt Ltd.

6. Water Donald– Inventory Control and Management ,John Wiley and sons.

7. Retailing Management, 8th edition, by Levy and Weitz, McGraw-Hill/Irwin,

2012.

Suggested Cases and Research articles: Articles:-

1. The mediating effect of innovation in the relationship between retailers' strategic orientations and

performance

Cayetano Medina, Ramón Rufín (pp. 629 - 655)

Keywords: Business performance, Distribution, Market orientation, Product

innovation,Retailing, Spain

Article type: Research paper

2. Cuneyt Eroglu, Brent D. Williams, Matthew A. Waller, (2011) "Consumer-driven retail

operations: The moderating effects of consumer demand and case pack quantity", International

Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics Management, Vol. 41 Iss: 5, pp.420 – 434

http://www.emeraldinsight.com/search.htm?ct=jnl&st1=Business%2Bperformance&fd1=kwd&mm1=all

http://www.emeraldinsight.com/search.htm?ct=jnl&st1=Distribution&fd1=kwd&mm1=all

http://www.emeraldinsight.com/search.htm?ct=jnl&st1=Market%2Borientation&fd1=kwd&mm1=all

http://www.emeraldinsight.com/search.htm?ct=jnl&st1=Product%2Binnovation&fd1=kwd&mm1=all

http://www.emeraldinsight.com/search.htm?ct=jnl&st1=Product%2Binnovation&fd1=kwd&mm1=all

http://www.emeraldinsight.com/search.htm?ct=jnl&st1=Retailing&fd1=kwd&mm1=all

http://www.emeraldinsight.com/search.htm?ct=jnl&st1=Spain&fd1=kwd&mm1=all

404

Case studies:-

1. Reliance Retail: Creating Social Value through Banana Supply Chain Teaching Note

Sourav Mukherji

Publication Date: Jun 01, 2013 Product number: IMB422-PDF-ENG

2. Reliance Retail: Creating Social Value through Banana Supply Chain

Sourav Mukherji, Milena Mueller, Kunal Basu

Publication Date: Jun 01, 2013 Product number: IMB421-PDF-ENG

3. http://sclgme.org/shopcart/Documents/Retail%20Logistics%20-

%20Change%20and%20Challenges.pdf

4. http://www.ebusinessforum.gr/old/content/downloads/The%20integrated%20logistics%2

0management%20system%20CASE%20STUDY.pdf

Suggested evaluation method

Case studies, assignments and projects.

Parallel / Similar courses the existing curriculum

S.no. Name of the course Institute where it is offered

1 Retail Operations management SIOM

2 SCM in Retail SIIB

Name Dr Londhe Ms. Adya Sharma Ms. Yashomandira

Kharde


Institute Symbiosis Institute of

Management Studies




Operations

Management

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:


• National – University of Pune.

• International- Masters in Retail management. University of Cranfield ,

http://www.som.cranfield.ac.uk/

http://cb.hbsp.harvard.edu/cb/web/product_detail.seam?E=4796688&R=IMB422-PDF-ENG&conversationId=74695






http://sclgme.org/shopcart/Documents/Retail%20Logistics%20-%20Change%20and%20Challenges.pdf

http://sclgme.org/shopcart/Documents/Retail%20Logistics%20-%20Change%20and%20Challenges.pdf

http://www.ebusinessforum.gr/old/content/downloads/The%20integrated%20logistics%20management%20system%20CASE%20STUDY.pdf

http://www.ebusinessforum.gr/old/content/downloads/The%20integrated%20logistics%20management%20system%20CASE%20STUDY.pdf

http://www.som.cranfield.ac.uk/

405


Retail Management Name of the course: Retail Franchising

Course Code: RM P 6

Course Code: T2332 UG/PG: PG

Level: 5

Credits: 2



• Critically analyse the elements of Franchising

• Evaluate the role Franchising in retailing

• To explore the objectives of franchising under given situation in given markets

Leaning outcomes


•Apply the operational processes to business problems Retail Store Operation Management

•Develop operational strategy for resource optimization in Retail Store Operations

Pedagogy Case studies

Projects

Theory

Pre learning

Marketing Management, Introduction to Retail Management

Course outline

S.No Topic Hours

406

1 Franchising-An Overview

What is Franchising?

Types of Franchises

Advantages and Disadvantages to Franchisor. Advantages and

Disadvantages to Franchisee Theories of Franchising

6

2 Franchising as a Strategy 4

3 Preparing for Franchisee

Motivations and Decision Process for Franchisees

6

4 Investing and evaluating a Franchisee

• Sources of Revenue

• The Role of Real Estate Infrastructure/Services Provided

• Profit Pie to Share

6

5 Financial and legal aspects of a Franchisee 4

6 Managing Franchisee Relationships Managing conflicts between franchisees

4

Total 30

Books

• Hoy, F and Stanworth, J (2003), Franchising : An International Perspective, Routledge

• Bradach, J.L. (1998) Franchise Organizations, Harvard Business School Press

• Carter, S. & Jones-Evans, D (eds) (2000): Enterprise and Small Business, FT/Prentice Hall.

Chapter 12

• Felstead,A, (1993) The Corporate Paradox: Power and control in the Business

Franchise International Thompson Business Press

• Lashley, C. & Morrison, A (eds) (2000) Franchising Hospitality Services, Butterworth

Heinemann

• Mendelsohn, M., (2001) The Guide to Franchising (6th. edn.), Continuum International

Publishing Group - Academic and Professional

• Perdy, D., Stanworth, J. and Hatcliffe, M., (1996) Franchising in Figures, University of

Westminster Press

• Price,S., (1997)The Franchise Paradox, Cassell

• Toplis, N, Marsh, G (2004) The 60 Minute Guide to Franchising, 60 Minute Book Company,

England

• Love, J.F.(1995) McDonald's: Behind the Arches, Bantam

• Ritzer, G (1993) The McDonaldisation of Society, Pine Forge Press

• Roddick, A. (1992) Body and Soul, Vermillion


1. AN EXAMINATION OF INTERNATIONAL RETAIL FRANCHISING IN EMERGING

MARKETS ,Dianne H.B. Welsh ,Ilan Alon ,Cecilia M. Falbe ,Journal of Small Business

Management, January 2006

2. Franchising as an entrepreneurial venture form, Frank Hoy, Scott Shane, Journal of

Business Venturing,Volume 13, Issue 2, March 1998, Pages 91–94

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0883902697000645

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0883902697000645

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/08839026

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/08839026

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/08839026/13/2

407

Case studies:-

1. Tanpin Kanri: Retail Practice at Seven-Eleven Japan

Rajiv Lal, Arar Han

Revision Date: Feb 23, 2011

Publication Date: Jul 12, 2005

Product number: 506002-PDF-ENG

2. Competitive Advantage through Channel Management

Lauranne Buchanan, Carolyn J. Simmons

Publication Date: Aug 30, 2004

Product number: TB0113-PDF-ENG



Parallel Similar courses in the existing curriculum S.No. Name of the course Institute where it was offered

2. Nil Nil

Name Dr Londhe Adya Sharma Yashomandira Kharde



Management Studies




Operations

Management

Signature

Name of the Expert: Dr B R Londhe

Signature: Date:


• National – Not available.

• International- STRATEGIC FRANCHISING, Kellogg School of Management,

www.kellogg.northwestern.edu, http://www.kellogg.northwestern.edu/faculty/cohen/MGMT-

931Syllabus,Fall.pdf

http://cb.hbsp.harvard.edu/cb/web/product_detail.seam?E=31109&R=506002-PDF-ENG&conversationId=75260



http://cb.hbsp.harvard.edu/cb/web/product_detail.seam?E=1866158&R=TB0113-PDF-ENG&conversationId=75390



http://www.kellogg.northwestern.edu/

http://www.kellogg.northwestern.edu/faculty/cohen/MGMT-

408



Course Name: Retail Management


• Critically analyse importance of Retail Management in formation of business strategy

• Critically analyse retail management concepts, types and location of retailing.

• Synthesise relationship between various elements involved in Retail Management.

• Design optimum Retail Management Strategies for retail business

Leaning outcome


•Apply the Retail Management processes to retail business problems

•Develop Retail Plan for retailers effectively compete in the market

Develop strategies for optimisation of resource in managing retail outlets

Pedagogy: Case study Field visits Projects Research papers Pre-learning: Marketing Management Sales & Distribution Management

409

Course Outline

S.No Topic Hours

1 Introduction to retail management • Introduction to Retailing Management • Indian retail scenario discussion

• Various theories of retailing

• Types of Retail formats, Types of ownerships

• Shopper Buying Behavior in relation to retail

• Multichannel Retailing

10

2 Retailing Strategy • Retail Market Strategies, Private label strategies

• Financial strategies for retailers

• Human Resource strategies for retailers

• Location strategies in retailing

• Decision of Retail Site Location

• Internationalization strategies of retailing

8

3 Merchandise Management at retailer

• Managing Merchandise Assortments at retail • Merchandise Planning Systems, Inventory

management

• Buying, Outsourcing of Merchandise at retailer, Sources of supply and Selection

• Category Management at retailer

7

4 Store Operations Management • Management of retail Store, Mall management,

Franchisee management

• Effective Store Layout, Design

5

Total 30

Books Recommended

1. Retailing Management- Levy, Weitz- Tata McGraw 2. Retail Management- Barry Berman, Joel R Evans 3. Retailing Management- text & Cases- Swapna Pradhan- Tata McGraw 4. Retailing Management- W. Stewart Howe 5. Retailing Marketing Management- David Gilbert 6. Retail Management- Gibson G Vedamani 7. Retail Environment and Operations- Andrews J Newman & Peter Cullen 8. The Art of Retailing- A J Lamba 9. Franchising: The Route Map to Rapid Business Excellence by Pramod Khera, 2001, TMH 10. Retail Strategy – Planning and Control by David Walters and Jack Hanrahan, Macmillan Business

(ISBN 0333 75234 1 for hardback and ISBN 0333 75235 X for paperback)

410

11. Retail Management by Roger Cox and Paul Brittain. Financial Times, Prentice Hall, 4th Ed, Published 2000, Pearson Education Ltd. 2000 (ISBN 0273 63428 3)

12. Gupta S.L [2007] – Retail Management – Wisdom Publisher. 13. Bajaj Chetan / Tuli Rajnesh [2005] – Retail management – Oxford University press. 14. PradhanSwapna [2007] Retailing Management 2nded Tata Mcgraw Hill Publisher. 15. Retailing: Environment & Operations by Newman & Cullen, Thomson

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Assignments/ activities based on formats, locations, Indian retail scenario, International and Indian retail brands

Name of members

Dr. Pravin Kumar


Org/Inst. SIMS

Signature


Date:

Benchmarking:

411


Retail Management Course Name: Retail Merchandising and Buying

Course Code: RM P 3

Course Code: T2330 UG/PG: P.G.

Credit: 2

Level: 5

Learning Objective:


• The students will be able to

• Critically analyse the elements in merchandising and buying

• Evaluate the role Buying and sourcing in retailing

• Compare and contrast the value of retail merchandising as a valuable managerial tool

• Develop merchandising systems under given situation in given markets

Leaning outcomes


• Develop merchandising systems under given situation in given markets

• Develop buying systems under given situation in given markets

• Apply the buying processes to business problems in Retailing

Pedagogy Case studies

Projects

Theory

Videos

Pre learning

Marketing Management, Retail Management

412

Course outline


1 Buyers and Merchandising’s Role in the Retail Organization 2

2 Category Management- Role of category and definition

• Benefits to Retailers and Manufacturers.

• The Buying organization

4

3 Merchandise Assortment Planning And Controls.

• Merchandise Budget Plan

• Measuring Inventory Turnover

• Analysing Merchandise performance

• Technology for Merchandise Planning and Control

• Sales Forecasting

• Trade-offs between Variety, assortment and Product availability

6

4 Buying Systems

• Detail the elements of a six-month merchandising plan

• Compute monthly sales for the season

• Compute average stock for the season.

• Define the basic stock method and calculate the beginning of the moth stock

• Compute the BOM stock.

• Define stock turnover ratio and calculate

• Complete a six month plan using the basic stock method and the stock sales ratio method

5

5 Setting merchandise Financial Objectives

• Pricing and Profits.

• Estimating Gross Margins, GMROI,

• Pricing Fundamentals,

• Planning Price Lines,

• Pricing Adjustments

6

6 Buying And Distribution of Merchandise.

• Supply Chain review ;

• Physical Distribution of Merchandise,

• Vendor Relationships and Negotiations.

5

413

7 Branding of Merchandise

• Manufacturer Brand

• Private Label Brand

2

Total hours 30

Books

1. Management of Retail Buying,R. Patrick Cash, Chris Thomas, John W. Wingate, Joseph

S. Friedlander ISBN: 978-0-471-72325-7

2. Gilbert, David, Retail Marketing Management, 2M edition, Peal~UII I:ducation

3. Spector, Robert, Category Killers: The Retail Revolution and Its Impact on Consumer

Culture, HBS Press, Boston, 2005.

4. Clodfelter, Retail Buying: From Basics to Fashion, 3rd edition, Fairchild Publishing. (ISBN: 978-1-56367-703-8)

5. Clodfelter, Making Buying Decisions: Using the Computer as a Tool, 3rd edition, Fairchild Publishing. (ISBN: 978-1-56367-699-4)

6. Kincade, D. H., Gibson, F. Y., & Woodard, G. A. (2004). Merchandising math: A

managerial approach.Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. 7. Retailing Management, 8th edition, by Levy and Weitz, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2012.

Suggested Cases and Research articles:

Articles:-

1. Do shopping events promote retail brands?

Type: Research paper

Author(s): Alexander Leischnig, Marko Schwertfeger, Anja Geigenmueller

Source: International Journal of Retail & Distribution Management Volume: 39 Issue: 8 2011

2. The importance of self-service kiosks in developing consumers' retail patronage intentions


Author(s): Hyun-Joo Lee, Ann E. Fairhurst, Min-Young Lee

Source: Managing Service Quality Volume: 19 Issue: 6 2009

3. http://www.decisioninsight.com/content/pdf/Nestle-Dreyers.pdf

4. http://www.ibm.com/smarterplanet/global/files/us en_us retail rew03010-usen-00_hr.pdf

Case studies:-

1. Creating a Luxury Experience at Value Retail

Jose B. Alvarez, Matthew Preble

http://www.wiley.com/WileyCDA/Section/id-302475.html?query=R.%2BPatrick%2BCash

http://www.wiley.com/WileyCDA/Section/id-302475.html?query=Chris%2BThomas

http://www.wiley.com/WileyCDA/Section/id-302475.html?query=John%2BW.%2BWingate

http://www.wiley.com/WileyCDA/Section/id-302475.html?query=Joseph%2BS.%2BFriedlander

http://www.wiley.com/WileyCDA/Section/id-302475.html?query=Joseph%2BS.%2BFriedlander

http://www.emeraldinsight.com/journals.htm?issn=0959-0552

http://www.emeraldinsight.com/journals.htm?issn=0959-0552&volume=39&issue=8



http://www.decisioninsight.com/content/pdf/Nestle-Dreyers.pdf

http://www.ibm.com/smarterplanet/global/files/us__en_us__retail__rew03010-usen-00_hr.pdf




414

Revision Date: Mar 22, 2013 Product number: 513009-PDF-ENG

2. Retail Relay A

Ronald T Wilcox, Kelly Brandow

Publication Date: May 10, 2010 Product number: UV5738-PDF-ENG

3. Merchandising at Nine West Retail Stores

Ananth Raman, Colin Welch Revision Date: May 31, 2001 Product number: 698098-PDF-ENG




3. Nil Nil

Name Dr Londhe Adya Sharma Yashomandira Kharde



Management Studies




Operations

Management

Signature

Name of the Expert: Dr. Londhe B R

Signature:

Date:


• National – Not available.

• International- (Retail Buying )College of Design, University of Minnesota, U.S., www.umn.edu

- (Retail Merchandising) MKT 122 BUYING AND MERCHANDISING

MANAGEMENT MASTER COURSE SYLLABUS, Athens Technical College www.athenstech.edu

http://cb.hbsp.harvard.edu/cb/web/product_detail.seam?E=4718283&R=UV5738-PDF-ENG&conversationId=75174






http://www.umn.edu/

http://www.athenstech.edu/

415


Retail Management Course Name: Retail Store Operation Management

Course code: RM P 2

Course Code: T2328

UG/PG: PG

Credit: 2

Level: 5



• Critically analyse the elements of Retail Store Operation Management

• Evaluate the role of Retail Store Operation Management in retail business strategy

• Synthesise relationship between various activities involved in Retail Store Operation

Management.

• To explore the objectives of Good Store Design

Leaning outcomes


•Apply the operational processes to business problems Retail Store Operation Management

•Develop operational strategy for resource optimization in Retail Store Operations

Pedagogy

Case studies

Projects, Presentations

Theory

Pre learning

Having knowledge of Marketing Management

Course outline


416

1 Introduction to different types of Store Based Retailing

• Food Retailers.

• General Merchandise Retailers.

• Service Retailing.

4

2 Retail Store Locations.

• Types of Retail Locations.

• Location and Retail Strategy.

• Location Legal Issues.

• Objectives of Good store Design.

4

3 Store site Selection

• Factors affecting the Demand for a Region or a Trade Area.

• Factors Affecting the Attractiveness of a Store site.

• Estimating Demand for a New Location.

5

4 Store Layout and Space planning.

• Types of Layouts.

• Role of Visual Merchandiser.

• Visual Merchandising Techniques.

• Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss, Exteriors,

Interiors. • Space planning

6

5 Store Management.(Operations)

• Responsibilities of Store Manager.

• Store Security.

• Parking Space Problem at Retail Centers.

• Store Record and Accounting System.

• Coding System.

• Material Handling in Stores.

• Reducing Inventory loss.

• Controlling costs.

• Mall Management, Factor influencing Mall establishments.

6

6 Managing the Store.(People)

• Store management responsibilities.

• Recruiting and Selecting Store employees.

• Socializing and training the new store employees.

• Evaluating Store Employees.

• Motivating and managing the store employees.

5

Total hours 30

Books

1. Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education. 2. Dravid Gilbert- Retail Marketing Management, Pearson,ISBN13: 9780273655114

417

3. George H, Lucas Jr., Robert P. Bush, Larry G Greshan- Retailing , Houghton Mifflin, 1994,ISBN 0395692377,9780395692370 4. A. J. Lamba- The Art of Retailing, Tata McGraw-Hill Education. 5. Barry Berman, Joel R Evans- Retail Management; A Strategic Approach, Pearson

publication ISBN: 0131870165

6. Retailing Management, 8th edition, by Levy and Weitz, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2012.


1. Architecture as brand: store design and brand identity

Type: Case study

Author(s): A.E. Kirby, A.M. Kent

Source: Journal of Product & Brand Management Volume: 19 Issue: 6 2010

2. Building store brands using store image differentiation


Author(s): Amit Saraswat, Toby Mammen, Jayesh P. Aagja, Ruchi Tewari

Source: Journal of Indian Business Research Volume: 2 Issue: 3 2010

3. Architecture as brand: store design and brand identity

Type: Case study

Author(s): A.E. Kirby, A.M. Kent


4. Creative space: design and the retail environment

Type: General review

Author(s): Tony Kent


5. The influence of brand recognition on retail store image


Author(s): Stephen S. Porter, Cindy Claycomb


6. Understanding multifaceted job satisfaction of retail employees


Author(s): Te-Lin Chung, Brian Rutherford, Jungkun Park


7. Human factors in retail environments: a review

Type: General review

Author(s): Jae-Eun Kim, Jieun Kim


Case studies:-

1. Kyle Evans at Ruffian Apparel: Staffing a Retail Establishment

Kevin Hewins, Ann C. Frost















http://cb.hbsp.harvard.edu/cb/web/product_detail.seam?E=2453213&R=909C08-PDF-ENG&conversationId=75174



418

Publication Date: Jan 27, 2010 Product number: 909C08-PDF-ENG

2. Subhiksha: Managing Store Operations

Janat Shah, Rahul Patil, Trilochan Sastry

Publication Date: May 01, 2010 Product number: IMB323-PDF-ENG




4. Nil Nil

Name Dr. Londhe Adya Sharma Yashomandira Kharde



Management Studies




Operations

Management

Signature


Signature: Date:


• National –Not Available.

• International- http://www.mdurohtak.ac.in/pdf/Syllabus_pdf/Mgmt/MRM_Ordiance_DDE_2010.pdf

http://mdudde.net/pdf/Syllabus/Part2/MASTER%20OF%20RETAIL%20MANAGEMENT%20(MRM)

.pdf





http://www.mdurohtak.ac.in/pdf/Syllabus_pdf/Mgmt/MRM_Ordiance_DDE_2010.pdf

http://mdudde.net/pdf/Syllabus/Part2/MASTER%20OF%20RETAIL%20MANAGEMENT%20(MRM)

419


Retail Management

Course Name: Retail Strategy

Course Code: T2334 Course Code: RM P 8

UG/PG: P.G


Level: 6



• To provide a framework to use in analyzing retailers’ customer and competitive positioning.

• Critically analyses role and importance of Retail Strategy in formation business strategy

• Synthesize relationship between various elements involved in Retail Strategy.

• To provide insights into the ways in which Wall Street looks at retailers and how they value different companies

Leaning outcome


• Apply the communication processes to retail business problems

• Develop communication plan for retailers effectively compete in the market

• Design Retail Strategies for retail business

Pedagogy: Case studies

Projects

Theory

Pre-learning: Marketing Management

Sales and Distribution Management

420

S.No. Topic Hours

19.

Overview of retail marketplace , Retail Market Strategy ,Target market, Retail format Building sustainable competitive advantage Role of strategy in success/failure of retail concepts

3

20.

Growth Strategies Market penetration Market Expansion Diversification Strategic Opportunities and Competitive Advantage

4

21.

Strategic Retail Planning Business Mission Situation audit Develop retail mix

4

22.

Retail financial strategy

The profit path

The turn over path The strategic Profit Model

3

23. Implementing retail strategy: Merchandising, inventory management. customer experience

6

24. Evaluating retail strategy

4

25.

International growth strategies Global retail opportunities Entry strategies Key to successes

6

Total 30

421

Course outline

Books Recommended

1. Retail Strategy A view from the bridge by Jonathan Reynolds and Christine Cuthbertson

2. Retail Marketing by Dravid Gilbert

3. Retail Management; A Strategic Approach by Barry Berman, Joel R Evans

Suggested cases and readings:-

Articles:

I. Traditional malls vs. factory outlets: comparing shopper typologies and implications for

retail strategy by Kristy E Reynolds Corresponding author contact information, E-mail the

corresponding author, Jaishankar Ganesh, IOSR Journal of Business and Management

II. Organized Retail Strategy – A Study at Loyal World Supermarket by Aluregowda

Assistant Professor Post Graduate Department of Management Studies PES College of

Engineering, Mandya. Michael Luckett ,Department of Marketing, College of Business

Administration, University of Central Florida, Box 161400, Orlando, FL 32816-1400, USA

III. E-retailing versus physical retailing: A theoretical model and empirical test of consumer

choice

Khai Sheang LeeCorresponding author contact information, E-mail the corresponding author,

Soo Jiuan Tan Department of Marketing, Faculty of Business Administration, National University of Singapore, 10 Kent Ridge Crescent, Singapore 119260, Singapore

IV. E-retailing by banks: e-service quality and its importance to customer satisfaction

Carmel Herington, Department of Marketing, Griffith Business School, Griffith University,

Gold Coast, Australia Scott Weaven, Department of Marketing, Griffith Business School,

Griffith University, Gold Coast, Australia

Case studies:-

1. Wal-Mart and Bharti: Transforming Retail in India Indranil Bose, Shilpi Banerjee, Edo de Vries Robbe Publication Date: Aug 27, 2009 Product number: HKU845-PDF-ENG

2. Transformations of Wal-Mart: Experimenting with New Retail Paradigms

David W. Conklin, Danielle Cadieux

Publication Date: Apr 20, 2011 Product number: W11056-PDF-ENG

http://cb.hbsp.harvard.edu/cb/web/product_detail.seam?E=1366158&R=HKU845-PDF-ENG&conversationId=74695




http://cb.hbsp.harvard.edu/cb/web/product_detail.seam?E=3008224&R=W11056-PDF-ENG&conversationId=75174



422




5. Nil Nil

Name of Member Dr Londhe Adya Sharma Yashomandira Kharde


Org. / Inst.


Management Studies




Operations

Management

Signature


Signature:

Date:


• National – Not Available

• International-New York University Stern School of Business,

http://pages.stern.nyu.edu/~atakos/spring11syllabi/B70.2375_Kleinberger.pdf

- Colombia Business School, http://www4.gsb.columbia.edu/mba/academics/curriculum

http://pages.stern.nyu.edu/~atakos/spring11syllabi/B70.2375_Kleinberger.pdf

http://www4.gsb.columbia.edu/mba/academics/curriculum

423


Marketing Specialization Course Name: Rural Marketing


Learning Objective(s): After the completion of this course a student shall be able to:

1. To understand the present level of penetration of products and services in Rural Markets and its potential.

2. To familiarize with the changing profile of the rural consumer and at its consumption pattern. 3. To be exposed to the innovative marketing strategies developed by Indian firms as well as MNCs

for the Rural Markets. 4. To gain insight on designing product, price, distribution and promotional strategies for different

classes of product targeted at Rural Consumers

Pedagogy: Case Studies Projects Articles/ Research Articles

Pre-learning: Marketing Management

424

Course Outline Sr No.

Subject Hours

1 Introduction to Rural Market Marketing 2

2 Rural Economy 2

3 Rural Market Environment and structure of Indian Agriculture 2

4 Rural Consumer Behaviour 2

5 Rural Market Research 2

6 Rural Segmentation, Targeting & Positioning 2

7 Rural Product & Pricing Strategy 2

8 Rural Distribution Strategies 2

9 Rural Communication 2

10 Role of ICT &Agri retail Innovation in Rural India 2

12 Future Direction of Rural Marketing 2

13 Transformation of Indian Agriculture, Vision2020 2

14 Applications in Rural Marketing • FMCG

• Micro Financing/ Financial Services • Agricultural inputs: Contract farming

4

15 Role of agricultural price commission, central and state Governments, Institutions and organizations in agricultural marketing

2

16 Total hours 30

Books Recommended 1. KashyapPradeep / RautSiddharta [2008] Rural Marketing : Text and Practice – Biztantra. 2. Varma /Jiloka/Mandal [2006] Rural Agricultural and marketing Deep and Deep Publisher Pvt Ltd. 3. Badi R.V /Badi NV [2004] Rural ,Marketing Himalaya Publisher . 4. Rajago Pal [1998] Rural Marketing Rwat Publication. 5. Velaydhan S.K [2007] Rural Marketing 2nded Response Books. 6. KrishnamaCharyulu C.S.G / Ramakrishnan [2002] Rural Marketing Text nad cases Pearson

Education 7. Rural marketing- Thrust and Challenges by Anjali Saxena, Samiuddin, Harsh Dwivedi and M

Rahman, Rawat Publications, 1997 8. Marketing Management: New Paradigms by Batra and Dangwal, Deep and Deep Publications,

1991 9. Marketing Management and Rural Marketing by BalramDogra, Commonwealth Publications,

New Delhi, 1990 10. Rural Marketing in India by K S Habeeb-ur-Rehman Himalaya Publishing 2003 11. Velayudhan, Sanal Kumar, Rural Marketing: Targeting the Non-Urban, Sage Publications. 12. Gopalaswamy, T.P. Rural Marketing .Wheleer Publishing 13. Varma /Jiloka/Mandal [2006] Rural Agricultural and marketing Deep and Deep Publisher Pvt Ltd.

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Projects should be part of Evaluation

425



offered.

1 Rural Marketing SIIB, SIBM-P,B, SCMHRD, SIMS

Name of members

Shrirang Altekar Semila Fernandes

Adya Sharma Sandeep Prabhu

Designation

Org/Inst. ( Symbiosis- Noida)

(SIBM-B) (SIIB) ( SITM)

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

Benchmarking: Courses As Offered In Other National And International Universities

Rural Marketing

National Institutes IIM-A, MICA, SP Jain, MDI, XLRI

426


Course Name: Sales and Distribution Management


Learning Objective(s): After the completion of this course, a student shall be able to

1. Develop skills in managing a sales team, dealer management and innovative sales strategies as the situation warrants.

2. Appreciate and analyse the sales and distribution as a key function of the Marketing process. 3. Appraise and organize sales planning and budgeting , estimating market potential and sales

forecasting , setting the sales territory and quotas 4. Managing marketing logistics and channels, Channel integration – VMS, HMS, Channel

Management and Marketing channel policies.

Pedagogy: Case Theory Mix Advanced level: 40% cases(and Research Articles), 60% Theory

Pre-learning: Marketing Management Organizational Behavior

427

Course Outline

Sr. No. Topics

No. Of Hours

1 Introduction to sales Management, Role and duties of Sales Manager. 3

2 The Selling Process and different theories of selling. 3

3 People Management-Sales Outlook

• Sales Organization and Importance of sales force,

• Training of sales force

• The motivation of sales force

• Recruitment and selection,

• Compensation, • Monitoring and control

5

4 Sales Promotion 2

5 Sales Forecasting and Budgeting Sales 2

6 Management of Sales territory and sales quota 3

7 Introduction to distribution management The concept of channel flows Managing a channel design Basics of warehouse/inventory/ transportation planning

6

8 Intermediaries :Channel Formats 3

9 Managing channel partner ( includes channel conflict) 3

Total Hours

30

Books Recommended

1. Sales Management –Decisions, Strategies and Cases- by Richard R Still, Edward W. Cundiff and Norman A.P.Govani, Prentice Hall of India

2. The Management of Business logistics- a supply chain perspective- by Coyle, Bardi, Langley, (Thomson-South western edition)

3. Marketing Channels (7/E) Author(s): Anne T. Coughlan , Erin Anderson, Louis W Stern and Ansary (Pearson)

4. HBR –Jul/Aug2006 5. HBR-July/Aug 2012 6. The New Sales Manager- by Walter Vieira 7. Professional Sales Management- Ralph Anderson, Hair, Bush 8. Sales Management- Indian Perspective- Dasgupta 9. Sales Management- Charleson, Futrell 10. Strategies & techniques for successful selling- Francis Lobo 11. Sales and distribution Management- by Tapan K Panda, Sunil Sahadev, Oxford University Press 12. Sales Management-Analysis and Decision making- by Ingram, La Forge, Avila, Schwepker Jr,

Williams, Thomson-South Western 13. Selling and Sales Management- by David Jobber and Jeoff Lancaste, Pearson Education 14. Marketing Logistics-A supply chain approach – Kapoor & Kansal pearson Education 15. Logistics by David Bloomberg, Stephan Lemay & Hanna PHI 16. Marketing Channels by Stern and El-Ansari & Couglan PHI 17. Sales Management- Douglas Dalrymple, William Cron & De Carlo- JohnWiley & Sons7/e,

428

18. Selling: Principles and Practices by Buskirk and Buskirk, McGraw Hill International Ed. 19. Fundamentals of Selling by Futrell : Customers for Life, , McGraw hill Publishing 20. Logistical Management: The Integrated Supply Chain Process by Bowersox and Closs, 21. Marketing Channels: A Management View by Bert Rosenbloom, Dryden Press 22. Global Operations and Logistics: Text and Cases by Dornier, Ernst, Fender and Kouvelis, John

Wiley Publications 23. Sales and Distribution Management: An Indian Perspective. Pingali Venugopal 24. Sales and Distribution Management(Text and Cases)- Krishna K Havaldar, Vasant M Cavale, Tata

McGraw Hill

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Live projects should be compulsory besides other components like presentation, assignments, test etc.

Name of

Member

Dr B.R.Londhe Prof

Vanishree P

Designation Full Time

Faculty

Full Time

Faculty


Signature

429


Marketing Specialization Course Name: Sales Force and Channel Management


Learning Objective(s): After the completion of this course, a student shall be able to : 1. Analyze, differentiate and apply Domestics and Global Sales and distribution practices. 2. Compose the tools and techniques necessary for designing , motivating and evaluating Sales

force and Channel Management systems 3. Compare and summarize the future managers with application based knowledge in Sales Force

and Channel Management.

Pedagogy: Case Theory Mix Advanced level: 40% cases(and Research Articles), 60% Theory

Pre-learning: Marketing Management Organizational Behavior

430

Course Outline

Sr. No.

Topics No. Of Hours

1 Introduction to sales Management, Role and duties of Sales Manager. 2

2 The Selling Process and different theories of selling. 4

3 People Management-Sales Outlook

• Sales Organization and Importance of sales force,

• Training of sales force

• The motivation of sales force

• Recruitment and selection,

• Compensation, • Monitoring and control

6

4 Sales Promotion 4

5 Sales Forecasting and Budgeting Sales promotion 2

6 Management of Sales territory and sales quota 2

7 Introduction to distribution management The concept of channel flows Managing a channel design Basics of warehouse/inventory/ transportation planning

5

8 Intermediaries :Channel Formats 1

9 Managing channel partner ( includes channel conflict) 2

10 Channel information systems 1

11 International Trends in Sales and Distribution Management 1 Total Hours 30

Books Recommended

1. Sales Management –Decisions, Strategies and Cases- by Richard R Still, Edward W. Cundiff and Norman A.P.Govani, Prentice Hall of India

2. The Management of Business logistics- a supply chain perspective- by Coyle, Bardi, Langley, (Thomson-South western edition)

3. Marketing Channels (7/E) Author(s): Anne T. Coughlan , Erin Anderson, Louis W Stern and Ansary (Pearson)

4. HBR –Jul/Aug2006 5. HBR-July/Aug 2012 6. The New Sales Manager- by Walter Vieira 7. Professional Sales Management- Ralph Anderson, Hair, Bush 8. Sales Management- Indian Perspective- Dasgupta 9. Sales Management- Charleson, Futrell 10. Strategies & techniques for successful selling- Francis Lobo 11. Sales and distribution Management- by Tapan K Panda, Sunil Sahadev, Oxford University Press 12. Sales Management-Analysis and Decision making- by Ingram, La Forge, Avila, Schwepker Jr,

Williams, Thomson-South Western 13. Selling and Sales Management- by David Jobber and Jeoff Lancaste, Pearson Education

431

14. Marketing Logistics-A supply chain approach – Kapoor & Kansal pearson Education 15. Logistics by David Bloomberg, Stephan Lemay & Hanna PHI 16. Marketing Channels by Stern and El-Ansari & Couglan PHI 17. Sales Management- Douglas Dalrymple, William Cron & De Carlo- JohnWiley & Sons7/e, 18. Selling: Principles and Practices by Buskirk and Buskirk, McGraw Hill International Ed. 19. Fundamentals of Selling by Futrell : Customers for Life, , McGraw hill Publishing 20. Logistical Management: The Integrated Supply Chain Process by Bowersox and Closs, 21. Marketing Channels: A Management View by Bert Rosenbloom, Dryden Press 22. Global Operations and Logistics: Text and Cases by Dornier, Ernst, Fender and Kouvelis, John

Wiley Publications 23. Sales and Distribution Management: An Indian Perspective. Pingali Venugopal 24. Sales and Distribution Management(Text and Cases), Krishna K Havaldar, Vasant M Cavale, Tata

McGraw Hill

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Live projects should be compulsory besides other components like presentation, assignments, test etc.



1 Sales and Distribution Management SITM

2 Sales and Distribution Management SIIB(IB), SIIB(AB)

3 Sales and Distribution Management SCMHRD

4 Sales and Distribution Management SIBM-B, SIBM-P,

5 Sales and Distribution Management SCMS-P

Name of members

Shrirang Altekar Semila Fernandes

Adya Sharma Sandeep Prabhu

Designation

Org/Inst. ( Symbiosis- Noida)

(SIBM-B) (SIIB) ( SITM)

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

432

Benchmarking: National And International Universities

Sales and Distribution Management

Sales Management

Channel Management

Retail Management

Rural Marketin g

National Institutes

XLRI (3 credits) IIM-B (3 credits) Great Lakes institute of Management

IMT-Ghaziabad -SM & Personal Selling (University of Pune) -Sales Force

Management (FMS)

Logistics mgmt (IIMA) -Distribution & retail mgmt (Univ of Pune) -Mktg Channel (FMS)

Seminar on Retail Mgmt (IIMA) -Retailing mgmt(FMS Delhi) -Retailing mgmt(IIMB

IIM-A, MICA, SP Jain, MDI, XLRI

Internatio NIL Sales force Channel Retailing (wharton) nal management mgmt(Wharto -Retail Strategy

Institutes (Kellogg) -Leading the

n) -Mktg

(NYU-Stern

effective sales channel

force strategy

(exe.pgm)(Whart on)

(kellogg)

-sales force

management

(Wharton)

-NUY-Stern

-Technology

sales & SM (MIT

Massachusetts

inst. Of Tech)

1. (Sales Management syllabus) http://people.stern.nyu.edu/ncureton/Spring05/B70.2129.pdf 2. (Sales Management , Channel Management and Retailing-Brief

available))https://marketing.wharton.upenn.edu/programs/mba/program-information/marketing- major/

3. Syllabus of Sales and Distribution Management ,Retail Management , Rural Marketing(http://www.xlri.ac.in/academic-prog/pdf/BM.pdf)

4. Syllabus of Rural Marketing (http://www.rmai.in/pdf/courses.pdf) 5. ( Names of the subjects)

http://www.iimahd.ernet.in/programmes/pgp/programme/curriculum/courses-offered-second- year.html

6. ( Names of the subjects available) http://www.stern.nyu.edu/programs-admissions/full-time- mba/academics/specializations/marketing/index.htm

7. ( Names of the subjects available) http://www.iimb.ernet.in/pgp/courses

http://people.stern.nyu.edu/ncureton/Spring05/B70.2129.pdf

https://marketing.wharton.upenn.edu/programs/mba/program-information/marketing-major/

https://marketing.wharton.upenn.edu/programs/mba/program-information/marketing-major/

http://www.xlri.ac.in/academic-prog/pdf/BM.pdf

http://www.rmai.in/pdf/courses.pdf

http://www.iimahd.ernet.in/programmes/pgp/programme/curriculum/courses-offered-second-year.html

http://www.iimahd.ernet.in/programmes/pgp/programme/curriculum/courses-offered-second-year.html

http://www.stern.nyu.edu/programs-admissions/full-time-mba/academics/specializations/marketing/index.htm

http://www.stern.nyu.edu/programs-admissions/full-time-mba/academics/specializations/marketing/index.htm

http://www.iimb.ernet.in/pgp/courses

433



Course : FP43

Course Name: Security Analysis and Portfolio Management

Course Code: T2043


Level 5


52. Explain the significance of Fundamental and Technical Analysis.

53. Appraise various theories of Portfolio management.

54. Create and evaluate a portfolio in terms of risk and return

55. Apply decision making skills in analysing markets for effective portfolio

management.

Pedagogy: 191. Lecture/PPT 192. Case Study 193. Research papers 194. Newspaper clippings 195. Website of companies/stock exchanges

Pre-learning:

• Shares and Debenture

• Financial Markets

• Risk and return

• Economics

434

• Statistics

• Excel

435

S.No. Topic Hours

1. Introduction: Introduction to Securities- Investment vs Speculation, The investment process, investment categories, various investment avenues, objectives and constraints.

2

2. Capital market – primary & secondary, Equity & Debt, Options, Futures, SWAPS

2

3. Risk and return: Security returns, Types of risk, Risk in contemporary mode, using beta to estimate return, calculating expected return and risk,

2

4.

Fundamental analysis: a. Economic analysis b. Industry analysis c. Company analysis (quantitative and qualitative analysis) d. Company analysis: applied valuation

2

5. Bond Analysis- markets for debt securities, specialized bonds, Bond returns and prices, Systematic Risk in Holding Fixed-income securities,

2

6.

Technical Analysis: The Dow Theory, Types of charts, price patterns, trend lines, Advances technical tools, security valuation, DCF, DDM , PE Ratio

2

7. Efficient Market theory: Fundamental and Technical Analysis, Random Walk,

2

8. Portfolio Analysis- Traditional portfolio analysis, Markowitz Risk-Return optimization

2

9.

Portfolio Selection- Risk & Investor preferences, selecting the ‘best’ portfolio, simple Sharpe portfolio optimization, significance of beta in the portfolio, traditional portfolio selection, Portfolio selection and diversification, The Sharpe and risk function, Random walk and Martingale Model, Size of portfolio, Selection basis and readjustments, Timings of disinvestments

4

10. Capital Market theory : CAPM, arbitrage pricing theory, Utility Theory, Portfolio theory, Multi-factor Models

2

11. Portfolio Management: Portfolio theory, ,Portfolio Criteria , Efficient set, 2

12. Portfolio Management Strategies and performance Measurement- Buy- hold, constant mix, CCPI, TWR, MWR

2

13. Portfolio Management: Managed portfolios & performance measurements- Classification of managed portfolios, alleged advantages of managed portfolios, Management-Performance Evaluation

2

14 Case Studies 2

Course Outline

Books Recommended

14. Investments by Bodie Kane, Marcus, Tata McGraw Hill , 2012 15. Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management by Dr.Prasanna Chandra

16. Securities Analysis & Portfolio Management- Donald Fischer, J Jordan 17. Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management by Keith Brown & Frank Reily 18. Investment science- David G. Luenberger 19. Modern Investment Thoery- Robert A Haugen

436

20. A random Walk Down the Wall street- Burton G M 21. Capital Ideas – Peter L Berstein 22. Investment Gurus- Peter J Tanous


• Exam

• Assignment • Quiz


1. Security Analysis & Portfolio Management SSBM

2. Investment Analysis & Portfolio Management SIBM-B 3. SAPM & Technical analysis SIMS

4 Security Analysis & Portfolio Management SIOM

5. Portfolio Management SCMHRD

6. Assets Valuation & Portfolio Management SIBM-P

Name of Member

Prof. Arti Chandani


Org. / Inst. SIMS

Signature


Signature:

Date:17 August 2013

437




Course Name: Service Operations Management

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP26


Level: 4


56. To introduce the overview of service sperations, challenges, concepts of quality, customer satisfaction and management practices.

57. To discuss various factors in structuring the services operations. 58. To study the service quality management.

59. To discuss the various models of waiting lines.


• Assignments on various service operations concept in Various organizations

Pre-learning: NIL Course Outline

438

Sr. No. Topic Hours

1 SERVICES AND THE ECONOMY: The Role of Services in an Economy: Economic Evolution; Stages of Economic Development; Nature of the

Service Sector; Role of the Service Manager.

3

2 The Nature of Services: Service Classification; The Service Package; The

Distinctive Characteristics of Service Operations 3

3

THE SERVICE CONCEPT AND COMPETITIVE STRATEGY: Service Strategy: The Strategic service Concept; Classifying services for Strategic Insights;

Understanding the Competitive Environment of Services; Competitive Service Strategies; Winning Customers in the Market Place.

3

4

Services and Information Technology: Technological Innovations in Services; The Competitive Role of Information in Services; The Virtual

Chain; Limits in the use of Information

3

5

STRUCTURING THE SERVICE ENTERPRISE: Part 1 The Service Delivery System: Service Blueprinting; Strategic Planning through Process

Structure; Taxonomy of Service Process Design; Generic Approaches to Service System Design. The Supporting Facility: Design; Layout; Process Flow Charting; Environment Psychology and Orientation; Walk-Through

Audit; The Walk-Through Audit as a Diagnostic Tool.

3

6

STRUCTURING THE SERVICE ENTERPRISE: Part 2 Service Facility Location: Location considerations; Estimation of Geographic Demand;

Facility Location techniques; Site considerations. Managing Service Projects: The Nature of Project Management;

Techniques for Project Management; Resource Constraints; Activity Crashing; Incorporating Uncertainty in Activity Times; Problems with

Implementing Critical Path Analysis

3

7

MANAGING SERVICE OPERATIONS: The Service Encounter: The Service Encounter Triad; The Service Organization; Contact Personnel; The

Customer; Creating a Customer Service Organization; The Service Profit Chain. Service Quality: Defining Service Quality; Measuring Service

Quality; Quality Service by Design; Achieving Service Quality; Programs for Service Quality Improvement; Service Recovery; Stages in Quality

Development.

3

8 Managing Queues: Queuing Systems; The inevitability of waiting; The

Psychology of Waiting; The Economics of Waiting; Essential of Queuing Systems

3

9

Managing Facilitating Goods: Inventory theory; Order Quantity Models; Inventory Management under Uncertainty; Inventory Control Systems;

Single-Period Perishable Goods; Retail Discounting Model. Managing Capacity and Demand: Strategies for Managing Demand;

Strategies for Managing Supply; Yield Management

3

10 TOWARD WORLD CLASS SERVICE: Productivity and Quality

Improvement: Stages in Service Firm Competitiveness; Making Continual Improvement a Competitive Strategy; An Application of Deming’s

3

439

Philosophy of Continual Improvement. Growth and Expansion: Growth and Expansion Strategies; Franchising; Multinational Development; Global Service Strategies. World Class services in Banking, Financial

services, IT, ITES, Logistics, Retail, Hospitals, Travel & Tourism, Power sector, Public utilities.

Total 30

Books Recommended 1. Service Management: Operations, Strategy and Information Technology, by James A Fitzsimmons

and Mona J Fitzsimmons, published by McGraw-Hill International Editions; 2. Service Operations Management: Improving Service Delivery, by Robert Johnson and Graham Clark,

published by Pearson 3. Fundamental of Service Management by Wakalkar Chetan S, published Everest Publication House,

Pune. 4. Service Management and Operations by Haksever, Render, Russel & Murdick; Prentice Hall

Publications


• Class Assignments

• Case studies

440


Marketing Specialization Course Name: Services Marketing


Learning Objective(s): After the completion of this course a student shall be able to

1. Analyse and apply the knowledge of Service Marketing concepts, and growing importance of Service Industry.

2. Compare, discuss and ably utilize the tools and techniques used in services marketing. 3. Analyze and apply services marketing concepts to business situations.

Pedagogy: • Case Studies.


• Assignments.

• Projects.

• Workshops.

Pre-learning: None

441

Course Outline S.NO Topic Hours

I Foundations of Services Marketing

Nature, Scope and Importance of the service sector

Introduction of services concept; Elements of

Services Mix, Difference between goods and

services, Classification of Services, The Growth in

Services: Global & Indian Scenarios

5

II Customer Focus

Customer satisfaction –Service quality models-

Handling complaints effectively - Service Failure –

Recovery-Moments of truth.- Service encounters

5

III Service Design and Delivery

Service Delivery Process – Service Blueprints –

Service Mapping – Physical evidence and Services-

cape

Role of employee in services delivery- Role of

customer in services delivery.

5

IV Delivering services through Intermediaries and Electronic Channels. Distribution Strategies for Services – Challenges in

Distribution of Services

5

V Role of Pricing and Promotion

Advertising and Sales Promotion in Service Industry,

Objectives and foundations of pricing of services,

Managing Demand and Capacity in Services

5

6 Sectoral perspectives 5

Books Recommended Sr. No. Title of the book Author of the book Publisher Year of Publication

Services Marketing:

Integrating Customer Focus Across the

Firm

Valarie A Zeithaml

Services Marketing :

People, Technology

& Strategy

Christopher Lovelock Pearson 2011

Services Marketing Valarie A Zeithaml

and Bitner

Tata McGraw Hill

2011

Reference Books and Reading Material

Sr. No. Title of the book Author of the book Publisher Year of Publication

442

Essence of Services Marketing

Payne Adrian

Services Marketing Ravi Shanker

Strategic Services Management

Boyle

Excellence in Services

Balachandram

Services Marketing S M Jha

Services marketing Hoffman and Bateson

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Group Projects Presentation


S.No Name of the course Institute where it vwas offered.

1 Services Marketing and CRM SITM

2 Services Marketing SIIB-IB

3 Services Marketing SCMHRD

4 Services Marketing SCMS-P

5 Services Marketing SIBM-P

6 Services Marketing SIMS 7 Services Marketing SIOM

Name of members

Olive Nerurkar

Surya Rashmi Rawat

Sujata Joshi

Tarun Khuswa

Vaishali Mahajan

Richa Arora


Assistant professor

Assistant professor

Associate Professor

Associate Professor

Assistant professor

Org/Inst. SCMS-P SLS PUne SITM SIBM-P SCMHRD SCMS-P

Signature


Date:

Benchmarking:

443


Software Engineering

Course Name: Software Engineering (UG/PG): PG

Course Code: T3117


Level: 4


Over the years, managers and practitioners alike have recognized the need for a more

disciplined approach to software. Also, with more and more emphasis on the quality of the

software by the software organizations, it is necessary to furnish the student with the insights

on software process models, software engineering methods and software tools. This course

will help the student to learn and present the structural and object oriented approach in the

software engineering. The essence of software engineering will be taught by giving the hands

on experience through case studies on each concept with software tools/techniques.

Pedagogy:

Lectures Role Plays Exercise Labs Case Studies PM tools CASE Tool

Pre-learning: Basic software development knowledge will add the value.

444

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Software and System Concepts 3) System and software Characteristics 4) Examples on System and software models 5) Case Studies

3

2

Basics of Software Engineering concepts

• Evolution and adoption of software engineering

• Industry experience while adoption of Software Engineering concepts 6) Case Studies

3

3 Software Engineering Practices

• Software Development using structural and Object oriented approach • Life cycle model

6

4 Software Process Models

• Waterfall, Iterative, RAD, Agile • Uses, challenges and impact on the software development

9

5

Requirements Engineering

• Business Requirements Identification, Requirement Organization, Requirement Design, Tractability issues

• Requirement Shelling

9

6 Analysis

• Structural, object oriented, Agile • System Characteristics, DFD levels, Use Cases writing

6

7 Design

• Structural, object oriented, Agile • UI, Object Model, Class model

6

8 Coding

• Best Practices of coding • Applicable to the different programming languages

6

9 Verification and Validation

• Testing Methods, Testing Cycle • Testing Techniques, Measures and Metrics

6

10 Deployment and Maintenance

• Preventive,Adaptive,Corrective • Importance and Challenges by Industry

6

Total 60.00

445

Course Outline

Books Recommended 🟃 Pressman Roger, Software Engineering: A Practitioner's Approach, , ISBN-10: 0071267824 ISBN-

13: 978-0071267823 Publication Date: April 1, 2009 Edition: 7th

🟃 Software Engineering Body of Knowledge, A complete reference.

🟃 Sommerville Ian , Software engineering 8th edition, (2007). Harlow: Addison Wesley. ISBN 978-0-

321-31379-9 ISBN 0-321-31379-8.

🟃 Sommerville Ian , Requirements Engineering: A Good Practice Guide, Wiley Publications

🟃 McConnell Steve , Code Complete: A Practical Handbook of Software Construction ,, Microsoft Press; 2nd edition, ISBN-13: 079-0145196705

🟃 Booch Grady , Object-Oriented Analysis and Design with Applications (2nd Edition), , Addison- Wesley Professional, ISBN-10: 0805353402, ISBN-13: 978-0805353402

Magazine: 🟃 IEEE Software

Journals:

🟃 IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering

🟃 Transactions on Software Engineering and Methodology, ACM publication

Websites: 🟃 www.sei.cmu.edu, www. swebok.org

Suggested Evaluation Methods: • Quiz • Written Examination • Project



Name of Member

Designation

Org. / Inst.

http://www.sei.cmu.edu/

http://www.sei.cmu.edu/

http://www/

446

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

447


Course Name: Software Project Management

Course Code: T3120

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): Projects to produce software are worthwhile only if they satisfy real

needs at optimum cost in minimum time. Effective management of software projects in the

IT environment has been increasingly considered to be important in the recent years. It is

an established fact that majority of software projects end in disasters not because of low

technical skills of the project staff but because of inefficient project management: poor

estimation, incorrect scheduling, bad planning, no monitoring, etc. SPM covers many time-

tested techniques, which have, for several years been used effectively in the brick and mortar

world and can be equally effective in managing software projects. Students get hands on

experience on realistic cases using effective CASE tools used in project management.

Pedagogy: 🟃 Lecture 🟃 Case Study 🟃 Presentations

Pre-learning: Concepts of software engineering and SDLC

Skills in programming (minimum one programming language, developing user interface,

data structures and queries) Developing web applications (desirable)

Course Outline

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Software Project Management: Concepts & Definitions, Software

life cycle processes, competencies required in a Software Project Manager

3

2 A] Activities before a project: RFI, RFP, RFQ, WBS, estimation and

resource planning, estimation methods: 3 point, Delphi, Wide-band

Delphi, Function Points, Feature Points, COCOMO B] Making a Business Case

- Importance of creating a business case for a project - Link between requirements analysis and project costs

9

448

- Link between problem analysis and project benefits - Techniques to estimate return (ROI) on a proposed project

3 Project scheduling: Gantt Chart, Network modeling, CPM, PERT,

critical chain scheduling, resource allocation, - project organization

and managing project team, project plan.

6

4 Project implementation: progress review monitoring and control:

BCWP, ACWP, BCWS,SV SPI,CV, CPI, BAC, VAC, CR, project metrics, Quantitative Project Management

3

5 User acceptance, alpha tests and beta tests, system tests, project

close-out and delivery, parallel run, maintenance: adaptive,

corrective, perfective, preventive.

3

6 Risk management: risk analysis, planning, monitoring 3

7 Project finance, procurement management, subcontract management, communication management

1.5

8 Aspects specific to generic product development vis-à-vis user- specific application development, managing large projects,

managing multiple projects

1.5

9 Project quality management: software quality concepts, testing:

static testing, dynamic testing, phases of testing, test plans, black

box testing & white box testing, test cases Root Cause Analysis

- Phases of Root Cause Analysis - Techniques of Root Cause Analysis

6

10 Software Configuration Management: traceability, library control,

build and release 1.5

11 Principles of Quality, Software Quality Characteristics, Principles of

Software testing, Quality Standards / models : ISO 9000, SW

CMM, CMM I, P-CMM

4.5

12 Use of CASE / CAST tools 1.5

13 Overview of PMP,PRINCE models 1.5

14 Case study 15.0

Total: 60

Books Recommended •

• Effective Project Management by RobertWysocki,Robert Beck & David Crane,JohnWiley&

Sons • Software Project Management by Bob Hughes & Mike Cotterell, Tata McGraw-Hill

• Software Project Management: a unified approach by Walker Royce, Pearson Education

Asia

• Quality Software Project Management by Robert Futrell, Donald Shafer & Linda Shafer,

Pearson Education Asia

• Software Requirements and Estimation by Swapna Kishore and Rajesh Naik, Tata

McGraw Hill • The Art of Software Testing by G J Myers, John Wiley & Sons

• Software Testing in the Real World by Edward Kit, Addison-Wesley

• Software Engineering: a Practitioner's Approach by Roger Pressman, McGraw Hill 7) Information Technology Project Management by Kathy Schwalbe

8) Project Management body of knowledge

9) Software Project Management in practice by Pankaj Jalote, Addison Wesley

449

• Managing the Software Process by Watts Humphrey, Pearson Education Asia


🟃 On line Test 🟃 Class Test 🟃 Assignments 🟃 Problem solving on cost estimations 🟃 CASE tools for developing Project Management Plan



Name of Member

Lalit S Kathpalia Hiren Malani

Designation Director Visiting Faculty

Org. / Inst. SICSR

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

450




Course Name: SOFTWARE QUALITY SYSTEMS

Course Code: T3177

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): Objective of the course is to introduce the student managers to the more widely used software quality systems. There will be focus on ISO 9001:2000 standard and the SEI-CMMI. The students will understand the concepts behind these standards and models and become familiar with the terminology associated with the same. They will also understand the audit and assessment processes. The course also includes some sessions on software estimation techniques and Quantitative process management – two very important and sought after skills in IT managers.


Pre-learning:

451

S.No. Topic No of

Session

1 Overview of Software Quality Systems 3

2 ISO 9001:2000 3

3 SEI – CMMI 3

4 Practical Case Study 3

5 Quantitative Process Management (QPM) 3

6 QPM Case Study 3

7 Software Estimation Techniques 4

8 Software Estimation Case Study 4

9 Six Sigma 4

452

Course Outline

Books Recommended • ISO 9001:2000 for Software Organizations by Swapna Kishore / Rajesh Naik

• CMMI Distilled : Practical Introduction to Integrated Process Improvement by Ahern Dennis; Clouse Aaron; Turner Richard




Name of Member

Designation

Org. / Inst.

Signature

Name of the Expert: Signature: Date:

453

Strategic Human Resource Management Syllabus Name of the Faculty : Management

Course Name: STRATEGIC HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT Course Code: T2760

Semester: THIRD ( 3rd ) Credits: 2 Level: 5

Learning Objectives from Course 1. To understand the role of HRM as a source of competitive advantage in the working of a Global

organization

2. To acquire knowledge on HRM’s increasing role in achieving an organization’s ultimate business

results and taking strategic alternatives in deciding on course of action.

3. Understanding the relevance of strategic models of HR for both International & Domestic

functions across specific sectors.

4. To integrate Human Resource to the Total Quality Management process in organizations and

leading to higher productivity.

Particulars (Chapters

/Topics) Detail topics Hours Pedagogy

1. Framework of Strategic HRM

-Need and importance -Linking HR strategies with

business strategies. -HR strategies applicable to

organizations pursuing stability, growth, retrenchment

and turnaround strategies. -Strategic HRM Model

4.5 hrs

Discussion Lecture

Case Study

2. Scanning Human Resource

Environment

-Review and assess the HR environment in the

organization to understand strategic relevance

- Various factors to assessing the environment

2.5 hrs

Discussion Lecture

Case Study

3. Strategy Formulation

-Planning and Formulating Strategic HR policies,

-HR Strategies to increase firms performance,

-HR Metrics and their applications.

BSC and HR Scorecard

4 hrs

Discussion Lecture Exercise

454

Key Result Areas(KRA) and Key Performance Indicators(KPI)‐

importance, alignment - Drafting of KRAs

4. Investment Perspectives of HR

-HR as an investment consideration, ROI in HR

Functions -Investments in Training and

Development, -Investment Practices for

improved Retention, -Talent Acquisition and Talent

Engagement

4 hrs

Lecture Discussions Case Study

5.Strategy Implementation 1:

Workforce Utilization and Employment

Practices

-Efficient Utilization of Human Resource

-Dealing with Employee Shortages

-Dealing with Employee Surpluses

-Selection of Employees

2.5 hrs

Case Study Lecture

6.Strategy Implementation 2 :

Development Systems (Managing

Strategic Organizational

Renewal)

-Managing change and OD, - Strategic HR & M & A

-Instituting TQM Programmes, - Instituting High Performance

Work Systems -HR’s role in PCMM‐ People Capability Maturity Model,

HR and Malcom Baldrige Model,

-Creating Team based Organisations,

-HR and BPR (Business Process Reengineering),

-Flexible work arrangements - Learning & Development

Strategies

5 hrs

Conceptual maps

Lectures Discussions

Caselets

7. Strategy Implementation 3: Reward Systems

- Establishing Strategic pay plans,

-Determining pay periods, -Establishing periods,

-Pricing Managerial and Professional jobs,

2.5 hrs

Lectures Case Study Discussions

455

-Compensation trends, -Economic Value Added

Model‐ EVA and Compensation,

-Objectives of international Compensation,

-Approaches to international Compensation, double taxation

8. Productivity, Quality Systems &

HR

- Understanding Productivity -Managerial effectiveness and linking HR through - Kaizen -

Quality Circles – ISO standards – 5 S, Six Sigma, TQM

4 hrs

Lecture Discussions

9. HR Evaluations -Approaches to Evaluation -Evaluating Strategic

Contributions

1hr

Lecture

Total = 30 hrs

List of Reference Books / Journals/ Articles / Database

1. Strategic Human Resource Management‐ Paul Boselie‐ McGraw Hill

2. Strategic Human Resource Management-Charles R Greer, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi.

3. Strategic HRM‐ Tanuja Agarwala‐ OUP

4. Luis R. Gomez‐Mejia, David B. Balkin, Robert L. Cardy, Managing Human Resources,

PHI, 2001.

5. Strategic human resource management; a guide to action, Armstrong, Michael.

6. Business policy and Strategic Management- Azhar Kazmi, Tata McGraw, New Delhi.

7. Strategic HRM- Jeffrey Mello

456

Sub Committee for Curriculum Development: Strategy Course Name: Strategic Management (SP 1) (No. should be between 600 and 899)

(UG/PG): PG Ideal positioning will be in Sem III

Number of Credits: 2 Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): 3. Students should be able to analyze aspects related to strategic management such as

environment scanning

4. Students should be able to interpret the scope of a firm and the formulation of corporate level

strategies

5. Students should be able to analyze the core competence of a firm and interpret decisions

related to diversification and value chain decisions

6. Students should be able to analyze the implementation of strategy with relation to the culture

and structure of the firm

7. Students should be able to compare and contrast strategies related to change management

decisions

Expected Outcome (s): 1. Students will get a comprehensive understanding of the entire process of creating and

implementing strategy in organizations 2. Students will understand the issues that need to be focused upon while developing strategy

and develop the ability to interpret organizational strategies

Pedagogy: 196. Case Study discussions

197. Interactive discussions on strategic management theories Pre-learning:

Core courses on Economics, Marketing, Finance, HR, Quantitative Methods

457

S.No. Topic Hours

1. Introduction to strategy

2

2.

External environment scanning – use of PESTEL and Porter’s five forces

model for opportunity spotting. Use of blue ocean strategy

4

3.

Deciding the ‘scope’ of a firm –setting the vision, mission, objectives and

goals

2

4.

Corporate Level Strategy – decisions relating to product diversity, international diversity and globalization, corporate policies, diversification

decisions, portfolio planning (BCG Matrix).

4

5.

Business Level Strategy or SBU strategy – Porter’s competitive strategies –

low cost, differentiation, niche/focus

2

6.

Internal Environment Analysis – analyzing strategic capabilities, resources,

core competence. VRIO framework.

4

7.

Value chain (primary and support activities) – Porter’s value chain and it’s

analysis

2

8.

Strategy and Structure – culture and business processes to support strategy

execution; ethics and governance

4

9. Managing Change – using the McKinsey 7S model for change management

4

Course Outline

Books /Articles Recommended • Crafting and Executing Strategy by Thompson, Strickland, Gamble and Jain published by Tata

McGraw Hill

• Competitive Strategy by Michael Porter published by Free Press

• Competitive Advantage by Michael Porter published by Free Press

• Strategic Management: A south Asian perspective by Michael Hitt, Duane Ireland, Robert

Hoskisson and S Manikutty published by Cengage Learning

• Strategic Management by John Pearce and Richard Robinson published by McGraw Hill

• The McKinsey Mind: Understanding and Implementing the Problem-Solving Tools and

Management Techniques of the World's Top Strategic Consulting Firm by Ethan Rasiel and Paul

N. Friga published by McGraw Hill

458

• BLUE OCEAN STRATEGY. By Kim, W. Chan; Mauborgne, Renée. Harvard Business Review.

Oct2004, Vol. 82 Issue 10, p76-84

• The Core Competence of the Corporation. By: Prahalad, C. K.; Hamel, Gary. Harvard Business

Review. May/Jun90, Vol. 68 Issue 3, p79-91

Suggested Evaluation Methods: • Case analysis

• Group projects/assignments • Research Paper/Book Review

http://web.ebscohost.com/ehost/viewarticle?data=dGJyMPPp44rp2%2fdV0%2bnjisfk5Ie45PFItqauT66k63nn5Kx95t%2fxWLalsEewpq9Lnqi4TbKwr0iet8s%2b8ujfhvHX4Yzn5eyB4rOrS6%2butkmzprRRpOLfhuWz44ak2uBV4OrmPvLX5VW%2fxKR57LOvTLOvt1GvqaR%2b7ejrefKz5I3q4vJ99uoA&hid=22

http://web.ebscohost.com/ehost/viewarticle?data=dGJyMPPp44rp2%2fdV0%2bnjisfk5Ie45PFItqauT66k63nn5Kx95t%2fxWLalsEewpq9Lnqi4TbKwr0iet8s%2b8ujfhvHX4Yzn5eyB4rOvS7Gst06vprdOpOLfhuWz44ak2uBV4OrmPvLX5VW%2fxKR57LO3SK6sr1CvqrFMpNztiuvX8lXk6%2bqE8tv2jAAA&hid=22

459




(Revised 18th November 2016)

Course Name: Supply Chain Management

(UG/PG): PG

Code: T2827


Level: 4


60. To describe the fundamentals of Supply Chain Management and its applications 61. To describe issues in Global SCM 62. To demonstrate importance of supply chain in the Business Operations 63. To analyze the application of various supply chain concepts in the Industry. 64. To evaluate performance measures for Supply Chain Networks in organizations

Pedagogy:

198. Lectures supported by case studies 199. Projects /Assignments on application of Supply chain concept in Various

organizations

Pre-learning: Nil

460

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Elements of Supply Chain, Organization dynamics and Operating environments, Decision and Interaction Phases

2

2 Process view and Strategic fit – Importance and Current Issues of Supply chains in the Industry- other contemporary concepts.

2

Designing the supply chain network 4

3 Planning Supply and Demand in a Supply Chain , Demand Management , Aggregate Planning in a Supply Chain

4

4 Planning & Managing inventories in Supply Chain 6

5 Designing and planning transportation networks 4

6 Sourcing decisions in Supply Chain 4

7 Relationship & Coordination in Supply Chains 2

8 Humanitarian supply chain management 2

Total 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended

• Chopra S. / Meindl P./Kalra V.D.(2010) - Supply Chain Management – 4th Ed. - Pearson Education • Ballou R. H./ Srivastava K.S. [ 2009 ] - Business Logistics / Supply Chain Management – 5th

Ed. - Pearson Education • Simchi Levi David/Kaminsky Philip [2010] –Designing & Managing the Supply Chain – 3rd Ed. -

TMH • Mentzer John T and Slone R.E. [2010] The New Supply Chain Agenda – Harvard Business Press • Sahay B S [2004] – Emerging Issues in Supply Chain management – Macmillan Pub. • KulkarniSarika [2005] – Supply chain management – TMH • Introduction to Materials Management (5th ed.) by Arnold, J R Tony, Prentice Hall publication • Purchasing and Supply Chain Management – by Handfield, Monszeka, Cengage Publications. • APICS – CSCP, CPIM – Learning System.


• Sectorial Analysis through Industry Interactions • Case Study Analysis



1 Supply Chain Management SIBM-P

2 Supply Chain Management SIBM-B

3 Supply Chain Management SIMS

461

4 Supply Chain Management ScmHRD

5 Supply Chain Management SIIB

6 Supply Chain Management – I/2 SIOM Supply Chain Management SIBM H

Name of Member

Dr ShyamSunde Chitta

DrPrabir Bandopadhaya

Dr Rohit Singh

Dr Kansara Mr SHiba Parhi

Designation

Org. / Inst. SIBM H SIBM P SIOM SIOM SIOM

Signature

Name of the Expert: 13. Dr. Vandana Sonwaney

Signature:

462




Course Name: SC Performance Measurement

Course Code: T2180

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP19


Level: 4

Learning Objective(s): 65. To illustrate the performance measurement and balance score card in SCM 66. To design a network to improve supply surplus 67. To analyze and evaluate various Supply Chain Performance measurement tools and

technologies 68. To analyze impact of various internal and external parameters on Supply Chain costs

Pedagogy: 200. Lectures supported by case studies 201. Projects /Assignments

Pre-learning:

• Supply chain management (OMP05) OR (OMP06)

463

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Introduction to performance measurement system, Balanced Score Card, SCOR Performance framework

4

2 Activity based cost management and activity based costing 4

3 Importance and Impact of Financial Management 2

4 Integration of physical and financial supply chain management 2

5 ROI framework and investigating supply chain design using ROI framework

2

6

Understanding impact of working capital of firm profitability, Relationship between cash conversion cycle, days of sales outstanding (DSO), days of payable outstanding (DPO) and Total inventory in days (TID) and its impact on business decision

4

7 Designing network to improve supply surplus 2

8 Cash flow statement analysis and NPV 2

9 Introduction to Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) and its implication on decision making

2

10 Impact of Tax on supply chain design 2

11 Impact of fuel price on supply chain network 2

12 Impact of inventory turns and its implication on business decision 2

Total 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended 1. Capital Investment Analysis for Engineering and Management, 3rd ed, Canada J., Sullivan W.,

Kulonda D., White J. 2. Relevant research papers and case studies

Suggested Evaluation Methods: • Group assignments • Sectorial Analysis through Industry Interactions

• Case Study Analysis


1 Supply Chain Performance Measurement and Capital Investment Analysis

SIOM

2 Financial and services SCM SIIB

464

Name of Member

Mrs. Manisha Ketkar

Mr. V.G.Venkatesh

Designation Deputy Director Assistant

Professor

Org. / Inst. SIIB SIOM

Signature

Name of the Expert: Mrs. Manisha Ketkar

Signature:


465




Course Name: Supply Chain Strategy

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP20


Level: 5


69. To review the strategies for efficiently managing Supply Chain Operations 70. To analyze and evaluate the contribution of supply chain strategy in the organization’s

success 71. To construct and recommend different approaches to implement supply chain

72. To discuss next generation supply chains 73. To review innovations in supply chain management

Pedagogy:

1. Lectures supported by case studies 2. Projects /Assignments on supply chain strategies

Pre-learning:

Supply chain management (OMP05) OR (OMP06) Course Outline

466

Books Recommended 1. Strategic supply chain management, Cohen S. and Roussel J., McGraw- Hill, 2004

2. Supply chain management at Wrap speed, Schragenheim E., Dettmer H., Patterson J., CRC Press, 2009

3. Supply Chain optimization, Poirier C. & Reiter S., Berrett-Koehler Publishers, Inc, 1996 4. Havard Business Review on Managing the Value Chain, 2000

5. Successful strategies in supply chain management, Chan C. & Lee H., Idea group publishing, 2005

6. Supply chain strategy, Frazelle e., McGraw Hill Education, 2004

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Criteria of Good Supply Chain Strategy, Path setting supply chains 3

2 End to end supply chain management 3

3 Right supply chain for your product 3

4 Life cycle considerations for supply chain strategy 3

5 Supply chain globalization and complexities of cost-minimization

strategies 3

6 Building relationships and trust among supply chain partners 3

7 Next generation organization and network design 3

8 Next generation collaboration 3

9 Next generation performance measurement 3

10 Innovations in supply chain management and Innovations Award

winning supply chain practices 3

Total 30

7. Logistics and supply chain integration, Sadler I., Sage, 2007 8. APICS module 3

9. Relevant research papers and case studies

Suggested Evaluation Methods: • Group assignments • Scenario analysis

• Case Study Analysis

467


Marketing Specialization Course Name: Sustainable Marketing Course Code: T2145 Number of Credits: 2 Course Code – MM P 033 Course Range – 600-899 Level – 4/5

Learning Objective(s): After the completion of this course a student shall be able to

1. Understanding concept theories and framework of environmental sustainability through

sustainable marketing values 2. Understanding the role of ethics and morality in marketing 3. Developing insight into the corporate responsibility towards the society.

Pedagogy: • Case Studies.


• Assignments.

• Projects.

• Workshops.

Pre-learning: Basic Marketing Concepts

468

Course Outline S.No Topic Hours

1 Introduction and historical overview of Sustainability 2

2 Global Responses and Accords 2

3 Business logic for sustainability: renewable & non renewable resources, manufacturing and services

2

4 Establishing link between consumerism, marketing and environment 2

3 Green Marketing : Definition, Role & Significance 3

4 Green Marketing Mix: 5 Ps (Product, Price, Place, Promotion & Planet) 4

5 Green Consumer Behaviour: Green Consumer, Models, Impact of Gender, Age and

Income over Green Consumer Behaviour

4

6 Challenges before Green Marketing: Green Wash, Eco Certification, Eco-Labeling, Lack of Awareness & Cost

2

8 Corporate Social Responsibility: Definition , need and implications Social and environmental management tools :ISO 14001 and ISO 26000

5

9 Consumerism, consumption and ethical marketing 2

10 Discussion on Green marketing, CSR, Ethics in marketing 2

Books Recommended Sr. No. Title of the book Author of the book Publisher Year of Publication

1 The New rules of green marketing: strategies, Tools, and Inspiration for Sustainable Branding

Jacquelyn A. Ottman

Berrett- Koehler Publishers .

2010

2 Green Consumerism: An A-to-Z Guide - ISBN: 9781412973809

Juliana Mansvelt 2010

3 Green Culture: An A-to-Z Guide - Kevin Wehr ISBN: 1412996937

Kevin Wehr 2011

4 Corporate Social Responsibility: Concepts and Cases: The Indian Experience

C. V. Baxi, Ajit Prasad

Pearson 2010

5 Corporate Social Responsibility in India

Sanjay Agarawal Sage publications

2008

6 Corporate Social Responsibility in India

Bidyut Chakraborty McGraw Hill 2010

http://www.bkconnection.com/ProdDetails.asp?ID=9781605098661



http://sage-ereference.com.authenticate.library.duq.edu/view/greenculture/SAGE.xml

http://sage-ereference.com.authenticate.library.duq.edu/view/greenculture/SAGE.xml

469

7 Consumer Behavior: A Strategic Approach

Henry Assael Biztantra Publication

2005

8 Consumer Behavior Hawkins / Best / Coney

9thed Tata Mcgraw Hill Publisher

2004 ( refer latest edition)

No specific text books are recommended as it is an emerging field hence we will have to rely mostly on research papers and guidelines provided by above books mentioned

Suggested Evaluation Methods: Group Project



offered.

1 CSR -----------

2

3

4

5

Name of members Surya Rashmi Rawat Gauri Joshi

Designation Assistant professor Teaching associate

Org/Inst. SLS, Pune SCMHRD

Signature

Name of the Expert:

Signature:

Date:

Benchmarking: Australian national university https://studyat.anu.edu.au/courses/MKTG2002;details.html Nanyang Business School http://nanyangbusinessschool.ntu.edu.sg/undergrad/common/contents/courseoutline/co_AB0501.pdf Ontario Business School http://www.conestogac.on.ca/fulltime/1301.jsp XLRI http://www.xlri.ac.in/academic-prog/pdf/BM.pdf 1 What is corporate social and environmental responsibility and why should strategists care?

https://studyat.anu.edu.au/courses/MKTG2002%3Bdetails.html

http://nanyangbusinessschool.ntu.edu.sg/undergrad/common/contents/courseoutline/co_AB0501.pdf

http://www.conestogac.on.ca/fulltime/1301.jsp

http://www.xlri.ac.in/academic-prog/pdf/BM.pdf

470

• Triple bottom line approach

• Bottom of the pyramid opportunities 2 Issues and opportunities for business in socially and environmentally sensitive world 3 Social and environmental problems and how they shape markets / Equator principles, Socially Responsible Investing. etc. 4 Stakeholders and the power they wield 5. Reducing socio-environmental costs and risks: managing the downside 6. Driving revenues and creating intangible value: managing the upside 7. Socio-ecological advantage - What Wave Riders do? Looking through a socio-ecological lens 8. Understanding ecological "footprint": Eco-tracking 9. Designing for the environment and "greening' the supply chain 10. Creating organizational focus on corporate citizenship 11. Green marketing 12. Social and environmental risk/liability management 13. Creating firm capabilities: Social and environmental management tools, technologies and system concepts • Environmental Managements Systems, ISO 14001 and the Natural Step • ISO 26000: Social responsibility guidance standard, Global Compact Principles • Environmental Impact Assessement, Life Cycle Analysis, Social Impact Assessment • Trends and opportunities in green energy technologies 14. Taking it to the next level: Corporate sustainable development strategies IX

471


HR Specialization

Course Name: Talent Acquisition HR P3

Course Code: T2281

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4 and 5


1. To compare and contrast the Forecasting Techniques, types of recruitment and selection

methods

2. To evaluate latest Staffing Strategies for effective Talent Acquisition

3. To recommend techniques for effective Selection Strategies

Pedagogy:

4. Case Studies

5. Lectures

6. Student Presentations

7. Role Plays

Pre-learning:

Knowledge of Human Resource Management (Course Code) required

472

S.No. Topic Hours

1

Introduction to the concept of HR Planning, Strategic Planning and


• Aim of HR Planning

• Process of HR Planning

2

2

Forecasting Demand & Supply, Quantitative & Qualitative

determination

• Work Study and its application

• Methods Study; The approach to Methods Study

Work Measurement, Work Sampling and Time Study

3

3

Career Planning & Succession Planning

• Career Stages, Career Development, Career Anchors, Role of

Training & Development in Career Development

• Meaning and definition of Succession Planning, Steps in

Succession Planning, Importance of Succession Planning • Strategic Career Planning

3

4

Human Resource Planning & Technology

• Introduction to Human Resource Information System

• Role of Technology in Human Resource Planning

• Effectiveness

2

5 Current trends in HR Planning 2

6 Strategy Staffing, Business & Staffing Strategies – Planning, Types of

recruitment, sources, attracting talent 3

7 Job Analysis, Job Description & Job Specification, Sourcing and

Recruiting 3

8 Recruitment yield pyramid, Employer Branding – Planning for building

a better employer brand 2

9

Interviewing Techniques, Types of Interviews, avoiding mis-hires,

Selection Process, Introduction to Assessment Centers, Tools and

Techniques used in Interviewing

3

10 Assessing External and Internal candidates, Employee Referral, Transfer

and Promotion 2

11 Managing workforce flow 2

12 Staffing Strategies and Best Practices, Latest trends in Talent

Acquisition, Use of Technology in Talent Acquisition 3

Total 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended:

473

4. Strategic Staffing by Phillips, Jean & Gully, Stanley, Pearson Publications

5. Human Resource Management by Gary Dessler, Pearson Publications

6. Capitalizing on Capabilities by Ulrich, Dave, Smallwood, Norm, Harvard Business Review


Quiz, Presentation, Group Assignments, Role Plays



1 Human Resource Planning SIBM, Pune

2 Talent Acquisition and Retention SIBM, Bengaluru

3 Talent Acquisition SIMS, Pune

4 Employer Brand Management SIIB, Pune

5 Recruitment & Selection SCMHRD & SCMS, Noida

6 Human Resource Planning SCMS, Pune

Name of

Member

Prof. Lavina

Sharma

Prof. Priya D

Gupta


Professor

Associate

Professor

Org. / Inst. SIBM, Pune SCMHRD

Signature


Signature:

Date:

Other members










474


HR Specialization

Course Name: Talent Management HR P5

Course Code: T2283

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 4 and 5


1. To understand the competencies and distinguish between types of competencies

2. To identify how to build a talent pipeline to meet an organization’s human capital needs

3. To create a personal development plan and engage in pursuits to accomplish professional

goals

4. To develop a diagnostic and conceptual understanding of the management of talent in the

organization

Pedagogy:

1. Case Studies

2. Lectures

3. Group Exercises

4. Class Discussion

5. Student Presentations

Pre-learning:

Knowledge of HRM (Course Code), Recruitment & Selection (Course Code) and Performance

Management (Course Code)

475

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Introduction to Talent Management (TM), Defining Talent Management,

Principles of Talent Management, Types of Talent, Skills and Knowledge defined

4

2 Understanding Talent Management – Guidelines, Importance and Benefits, Challenges, The talent value chain,

4

3 Competencies, Competency Mapping & Functional & Behavioral Competencies

3

4 Assessment Centers- Pre-requisites, designing assessment centers, Role and skills of assessor

3

5 Managing & motivating talent through Training & Development, Feedback, Coaching & Mentoring for performance

4

6 High Potential Employees- identification & management ; Building a Talent Reservoir through diverse groups

3

7 Talent Retention Strategies, Attrition Analysis, 3

8 Engagement – employee engagement, generating engagement, influence, Talent Management culture,

3

9 Use of Information Technology to support talent management systems, Developing Talent Management Information Systems

3

Total 30

Course Outline:

Books Recommended:

1. The Talent Management Handbook by Lance Berger and Dorothy Berger, McGrawHill

2. The Talent Era by Subir Chowdhary Pearson Education, New Delhi

3. Talent on Demand: Managing Talent in Age of Uncertainty by Capelli Peter , Harvard

Business Press

4. Talent Management Systems: Best practices in Technology Solutions for Recruitment,

Retention and Workforce Planning by Allan Schweyer, Wiley Publishers


Quiz, Presentation, Group Assignments



1 Talent Management SIBM, Pune

2 Talent Acquisition and Retention SIBM, Bengaluru

3 Talent Management SCMHRD

4 Talent Engagement & Management SIMS, Pune

5 Talent Management SIIB, Pune

476

Name of Member

Prof. Lavina Sharma

Dr. Asha Nagendra


Professor

Org. / Inst. SIBM, Pune SIMS

Signature

6 Managing Competency & Career Development

SCMS, Pune


Signature:

Date:

Other members










477

(Established under section 3 of the UGC Act 1956, by notification No.F.9-12/2001-U3

Government of India) Accredited by NAAC with ‘A’ Grade


BoS (FoM) Subcommittee (Banking & Finance specialisation)

Sub Committee - Specialization for Curriculum Development

Post Graduate/ Under Graduate

Course Title: Taxation

Course Code:

Number of Credits : 2 Level : PG

Learning Objective/Outcome (s): Learning Objective(s) The students will be able to:

1. Explain the concepts and provisions of the Direct and Indirect Taxation Laws.


3. Apply the concepts in tax planning and Mgt.

4. Analyse the implications of various taxes on the functioning of the business

Pre-learning:_ Basic knowledge of financial accounting is advisable. Course Outline

478

S.No.

Topic

Hours

Part A – Direct Tax Hours

1

Basic Concepts & Exemption from Income: Tax systems in India, Important Definitions, Residential Status, Scheme of exemptions and deductions, Overview, and basic definitions under the Income Tax act, 1961. Various exemptions under income tax act

3

2

Computation of Income under different Heads of Income: Overview of computation, computation and tax planning of salary income, house property, Business income: important deductions, disallowances and exemptions , Capital gains, Capital gains , Income from Other Sources

9

3 Deductions under Chapter VI A and Set off and Carry forward of losses and computation of tax liabilities

3

4

Part B – Indirect Tax Introduction n to Goods and Services Tax: Important Definitions, Classifications and interpretation of Tariff, HSN, composition levy

4

5 Concept and Scope of Supply, Time and Place of Supply Tax, Invoices, Debit Note, Credit Note, Vouchers, Reverse Charge Mechanism 4

6 Input Tax Credit, Returns, Payments and Records 3

7

Provisions of Customs and Introduction to Foreign Trade Policy 2015-20 ( based on December 2017 Mid Term Review)

4

Total Hours 30

Pedagogy 202. Lectures and PPTs 203. Use of technology in Tax reporting and planning

Books Recommended

1. Basics of GST - Author : Nitya Tax Associates , Edition : August 2016, Date of Publication : August 2016, ISBN No.:9789386189158

2. Students Guide to Income Tax, Taxmann Publication 3. Systematic Approach to Income Tax, by Dr Girish Ahuja & Dr Ravi Gupta

Suggested Assessment/ Evaluation Methods 3. Class test 4. Assignment based on real world situation

https://www.taxmann.com/bookstore/authproduct.aspx?authid=306

https://www.amazon.in/s/ref%3Ddp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=Dr%2BGirish%2BAhuja%2B%26%2BDr%2BRavi%2BGupta&search-alias=stripbooks

479

Benchmarked against similar courses in other national/ international universities /organizations

S. No.

Name of the Course Name of University where it is offered

Name of Members

Dr. Shilpa Parkhi

Designation Associated

Professor

Org. / Inst.


Operations Management.

Signature

Signature of Dean:

Date: 12.12.2017

480




Course Name: Technology and Innovation Management

Course Code: T2192

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP31


Level: 5


1. To provide an overview of management of technology in industry and its importance to the organization.

2. To provide clear understanding of product design and associated design – manufacturing – distribution processes and the linkages with various business functions.

3. To discuss effective management of currently operational technology for productivity and profit maximization

4. To discuss critical issues in innovation management. 5. To analyze different manufacturing strategies and its impact on product and process design

Pedagogy:


Pre-learning: Nil

481

Sr. No. Topic Hours

1

Nature of Technology: Concepts of technology, Nature of technological change, Economics of technology management. Technology Ecosystem and linkages

3

2

Technology and Management: Corporate technology strategy, Analysis for technology strategy, Realization of new technology, adoption of new manufacturing technologies, Project Management for new technology, Accounting for technology, Management of improvement, Technology and standards.

6

3

Technology and Government: Import and export of technology, Scouting, sourcing, choosing and implementation of new technologies and imperatives for management of change in technology, National technology policies; objective and role of government, Frame work and evaluation of technology.

5

4 Effective Management of currently operational technology for productivity and profit maximization.

2

5 Technology and people management for application. 1

6 Innovation Management : Need for new products, Product development principles, Basics of Product and Process Design

6

7 Manufacturing Strategy and its impact on Product and Process Design, Factors influencing process design, Process analysis

4

8 TQM Aspects of P&PD, Management of Innovation, Tuning the Planning & Control Systems to Product and Process Design

3

Total 30

Course Outline

Books Recommended 1. The Management of Technology: Perception and Opportunities by P. Lowe (Chapman and Hall) 2. Technology in modern corporation- A strategic Perspective by Horowich (Pergamon Press) 3. Technology & the firm: Strategies by M.Dodgson (Longman, Harlow) 4. Managing Technology: The strategy View by L.W. S, Stele 5. Strategic Management of Technology and Improvement by R.A. Burgeleman, M.A. Maidique

(Irwin Illionis) 6. Integrated product design, M.M. Andreasen.


• Case Analysis • Projects



1 Technology and Innovation Management SIOM

482

2 Technology and Innovation Management SIBM-P

3 Technology and Innovation Management SIBM-B

Name of Member



Dr. Suresh Jakhar

Prof. Shirish Jeble

Designation


Assistant Professor

Assistant Professor


Signature


Signature:


483


HR Specialization

Course Name: Technology in HR /SAP HR/ People Soft HR P24

(UG/PG): PG


Level: 5


1. To understand the importance of technology in HR processes 2. To apply the latest technology in all HR processes


2. On hands training on computers

Pre-learning:

Knowledge of Human Resource Management (Course Code) required

Course Outline

Books Recommended:

Course: HR Process and Technologies (based on SAP HCM) Duration: 30 hours Faculty: Tejpal Singh Batra Course Content Topic Time Learning outcome Evaluation Criteria Methodology

What makes HR effective in an Organization? • Is it the HR Philosophy? • Is it doing what

Business wants • Is it the implementation • Or is it something else 3 • Understanding what

makes HR effective • What is the current trend in HR globally? • Introduce the importance of

innovation and process based thinking in HR • Understanding what makes HR effective and a

strategic business partner • Understanding the need of process based approach • Class room

sessions • Discussion latest HR trend papers • Group discussion/ activity Technology Over view •

Overview of Technology • Context wrt to Business • Why is technology important in HR (SAP as

example) 7 • Understanding how technology plays a major role in meeting HR vision and

objective • Understand what is technology, what are the various forms • Importance of

technology in HR • How it is as importance as the process itself • Class room sessions • Group

activity Systems / SAP HCM • Overview • Need • Modules 2 • What is HCM • Why is it required •

What are various modules and what do each do • Inter dependency (RACI) • HCM

understanding and its importance • Classroom session • Group discussion Life Cycle • Typical

candidate life cycle • Typical Employee Life cycle 1 • Understanding of life cycle • Its

interdependency • How to avoid duplication of data (simplify)? • Understanding of lifecycle and

importance of each step • Why interdependenc y and why simplify • Classroom session • Across

484

Group discussion Commented [TSB1]: Introduce the concept •HR is an Experience generator

• Enhance experience for candidate •Enhanced experience for employee •Enhanced experience for ex-employees Commented [TSB2]: Make them do process mapping basis their current understanding Commented [TSB3]: Introduce to concept like cloud computing, gamification, apps, social media … Commented [TSB4]: Demonstrate how theory (art) links with process and

then with technology Commented [TSB5]: Establish how tools like SAP are very important Commented [TSB6]: Demonstrate how technology is required to seamless integrate and avoid

process wastage Module – HR Operations (Master Data) • Process mapping • Enterprise

structure • Org Structure • Personal Administration • Info types • Interdependenc ies • Hiring/

Termination 3:30 • Understanding of MD module • What action to be run when • How to

maintain quality (RACI) • Understanding of MD module • Classroom session • Simulation •

Group discussion Module – ERecruitment • Process mapping • Recruiter action • Candidate

action • Hiring manager action • Moving data to MD directly • Linkage with Social media / Job

boards 3:00 • Understanding of REC module • Understanding of various actions • What action to

be run when and by whom • How to maintain quality (RACI) • Understanding of REC module •

Classroom session • Group discussion Module – PPM • Process mapping • HR action • Employee

action • Manager action 2:30 • Understanding of PM module • Understanding of various actions

• What action to be run when and by whom • How to maintain quality (RACI) • Understanding

of REC module • Classroom session • Group discussion Module – C&B • Process mapping • HR

action • Employee action • Manager action 2:30 • Understanding of PM module •

Understanding of various actions • What action to be run when and by whom • How to maintain

quality (RACI) • Understanding of C&B module • Classroom session • Group discussion Module –

L&D • Process mapping 2:30 • Understanding of L&D module • • Classroom session


Training on computers,

Assignments

485




Course Name: Warehouse Management

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP08


Level: 5


1. To describe the concepts of warehouse managements. 2. To describe Global Practices in Warehousing and Distribution management

3. To analyze different issues in cold chain management 4. To demonstrate international benchmarks on warehouse management

5. To design and evaluate the performance of the warehouse systems.

Pedagogy: 3. Lectures supported by case studies

4. Projects /Assignments on Design and Evaluate the Warehouse Operations

Pre-learning: • SCM (OMP05) OR (OMP06)

486

Course Outline Books Recommended

• Ten Hompel, Micheal and Schmidt (2007), Thorsten, Warehouse Management, Springer, Germany

• Ballou R. H and Srivastava K.S. (2009) - Business Logistics / Supply Chain Management, 5th ed, Pearson Education

• Tomkins et al, (1996), Facilities Planning, John Wiley & Sons • Georgia Tech – Warehousing and Distribution Science Manual

• Case studies

S.No. Topic Hours

1 Warehousing Overview – Importance – types – Indian and Global

Scenario 2

2 Fundamentals about the Logistics Frameworks – Logistics Principles with

respect to Warehouse- Packaging and Logistics Units 2

3 Functions & System interfaces in Warehouse Operations 3

4 Warehouse Location, Layout and Design 3

5 Cross Docking – Processes in Warehouses 3

6 Inventory Systems & Material Handling in Warehouses 3

7 Warehouse Management Systems 3

8 Packaging fundamentals, Operational Issues 3

9 Key Performance Indicators in warehouse management, Optimization of

Warehouse performance 4

10 Cold Chain Management 2

11 Global Practices in Warehousing and Distribution management 2

Total 30

Suggested Evaluation Methods: • Project for Design, Analysis and Performance of Warehouses

• Case Analysis

487



Course : FP54

Course Name: Wealth Management


Level:3

Course Contents

Learning Objective(s): Student will be able to:

74. To understand various personal investment avenues and asset classes 75. To understand investors’ psychology & requirement

76. To develop skills of personal financial planning by customizing investment portfolios and evaluating them for clients according to their needs & requirements

77. To develop skills in financial advisory & relationship management

Pedagogy:

204. Presentations 205. Case Studies of different types of client portfolio

206. Newspaper & Journal articles

Pre-learning: Basic Idea of SAPM or Capital Markets Course Outline


1

Introduction to Wealth Management: World’s Wealth – Statistics and Forecast World Wealth Report, Key

Drivers of Wealth Management. The Players– Global and Indian Wealth management Scenario, Wealth management – Indian

Perspective.

2

488

2

Wealth management Process: Savings Cycle and Wealth Creation Cycle, Client Segmentation- Ultra

high net worth individuals, High net worth individuals, Mass Affluent. Client Expectations. Wealth Accumulation, Wealth Preservation, and Wealth Transfer. Private banking, Family office, Offshore, Onshore,

International investment. Wealth management tools. Ethical principles relevant to wealth management

3

3

Lifestyle Management for better future: Asset Allocation Principles, The Lifecycle Investment Guide, Private

Banking and Client Characteristics, Identifying Client Needs. Performa financial statement, NRIs as Clients.

2

4

Investment Avenues: Financial and Non-Financial (Real Assets)

Financial Assets: Money Market Instruments, Bonds, Corporate Securities, Debt

Securities Variable Income Products: Equity and Equity Mutual Funds Derivatives, Structured products, Credit Cards.

Mutual Funds: Income funds, Growth funds, Balanced funds, Sector funds, Index funds, Private equity funds, Fund of funds, Thematic

funds, Systematic Investment Planning. Non-Financial Investment Options – Art, Gold, Antiques,

Commodities, Real Estate.

3

5

Asset Allocation and restructuring: Asset Allocation Process, Partitioning Criteria, Asset Classes, Strategic

Asset Allocation, Tactical Asset allocation.

3

6

Personal Financial Planning: • Need and Steps.

• Tax Planning: Fundamentals, Basic income tax saving techniques, Capital gains tax, Charity and tax;

• Insurance Planning: Human Life Value, Life Insurance, Health Insurance;

• Retirement Planning: Basics of retirement planning, Economic problems of retirement years, Steps in planning for retirement

income, Sources of retirement income, Pension plans, Annuities and annuity schemes;

• Estate Planning: Need, objectives, methods of property disposition, using wills and trusts, settling the estate.

9

7

Marketing of financial products Relationship Marketing – Selling in a competitive environment, Steps in the relationship management process – Segment, Profile, Expose,

Strategize, Execute, Monitor and review Personal Selling skills.

2

8

Behavioral Skills for Wealth Manager Time Management, Negotiation skills, Convincing skills, Etiquettes and

Manners.

2

9 Investor Psychology: Customer hesitancy, Client objection handling,

Closing a deal. 2

10

Financial Scams and Frauds: Know your customer, Money laundering, Investor Awareness,

Regulation, Corporate Responsibility Act (SOX).

2

489

TOTAL 30

Books Recommended

1. Gitman, Personal Financial Planning 2. Keown, Arthur: Personal Finance

3. Halman, G Victor Rosenbloom, Jerry S: Personal Financial Planning 4. Jeff Madura Pearson: Personal Finance & Wealth Management, 2007

5. Altfest, Personal Financial Planning, McGraw-Hill Irwin, 2007 6. Reilly and Brown, Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management, South-Western

College, 9th edition 7. Bodie, Kane and Marcus, Investments, McGraw-Hill Irwin International edition, 8th

edition, 2009.


Case Studies, Presentations, Test & creation of wealth management portfolio of an HNI

490




Course Name: World-class Manufacturing Techniques

Course Code: T2525

(UG/PG): PG

Code: OMP 41

Number of Credits:2

Level:4


1. To explain the new management system which has revolutionized operation management 2. To discuss the principles implemented by world class companies. 3. To recommend ways to improve productivity and direct continuous improvement.

Pedagogy:


Pre-learning:

• Operations Management (OMP25) • Quality Management (OMP02)